POLICE DRILL MANUAL

Bureau of Police Research And Development

Ministry of Home affairs
Government of India
2012
 PREFACE

The last editions of the Police Drill Manual were brought

by Bureau in 1977 & 1995. It received an overwhelming response
from well as State Police forces and we continued to get demand
for copies of the Manual.

To meet this demand, it was decided to republish the

revising it thoroughly. Revision of the Manual was done in
consultation with experts. The present edition is the result of
this effort.

In addition to many alterations done in the provisions of

the earlier publication, the present Manual incorporates nine
new chapters i.e., on Drills & Parades, Role of Drill Instructors,
Selection of the Drill Instructors, Drill with 5.56 mm INSAS
Rifle, Conduct in Uniform, Injury Management, Medals & Medal
Ribbon, Flag code of India, Band Music & Saluting without
Arms.

Besides incorporating the Hindi words of command at

places, Hindi equivalents of English words of command had
forth in an annexure.

We shall gladly welcome your comments and suggestions

if any.

SD/- Vikram Srivastava

Director General
March, 2012 Bureau of Police Research & Development
 CONTENTS Page

CHAPTER I
Definitions 1
CHAPTER II
Object of Drill 3
Principles of Instructions 3
Preparation 4
Method of Instructions 4
Arrangements and Conclusion of Instructional Periods 5
The Backward Man 5
General Instructions on Drilling Recruits 5
Words of Command 6
Inspection 9
CHAPTER III
Drills & Parades 13
CHAPTER IV
Role of Drill Instructors 19
CHAPTER V
Selection of The Drill Instructor 26
CHAPTER VI
Injury Management 32
CHAPTER VII
Conduct in Uniform 40
CHAPTER VIII
Medals & Medal Ribbons 54
CHAPTER IX
Band Music 66
CHAPTER X
Flag Code of India 74
CHAPTER XI
Drill With 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle 90
CHAPTER XII
SQUAD DRILL AT THE HALT
Formation of Squads with Interval 95
Attention 95
Standing at Ease 96
 CONTENTS Page

Standing Easy 96
Dressing a Squad with Intervals 96
Turning and Inclining by Numbers 97
CHAPTER XIII
MARCHING
Length of Pace and Time in Marching 99
Position in Marching 99
Marching in Quick and Slow Time 100
Paces Forward and to the Rear 104
Changing Step in Slow and Quick Time 104
Marching in Double Time 105
Breaking into Slow, Quick and Double Time 106
The Side Pace 107
Turning when on the March 108
CHAPTER XIV SALUTING
WITHOUT ARMS
Saluting at the Halt 110
Saluting on the March. 112
Dismissing without Arms 113
CHAPTER XV
CANE DRILL
Introduction 114
Difference between Baton and Cane 114
Position of Cane 114
Saluting with Cane 115
Dismissing with the Cane 116
Drill Movements when Marching with Baton/Cane 117
CHAPTER XVI
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ON SALUTING
Saluting when without Head-Dress and when Wearing Plain Clothes, etc. 118
Miscellaneous 119
CHAPTER XVII
DRILL IN THREE RANKS AT THE HALT
Falling in a Squad/Platoon 121
Blank File 121
 CONTENTS Page

Dressing 122
Drill on the Move 123
Platoon in Line and in Threes 124
Dressing on the March 124
Marching in Line 125
A Line Changing Direction to a Flank 126
Marching in Threes 127
Turning from Threes into Line on the Move 128
Turning from Line into Threes on the Move 129
Wheeling in Threes 130
Forming Line from Threes Facing the same Direction 130
CHAPTER XVIII
FORMING TWO RANKS
To form Two Ranks from Three Ranks 132
To form Three Ranks from Two Ranks 133
CHAPTER XIX MARCHING OFF
IN SINGLE FILE
A Squad Facing its Right Flank in Three with the Front Rank
On the Left, Marching Off in Single File 134
A Squad in Three Ranks (Line) in the Advance Position,
Marching off in Single File 134
CHAPTER XX
PASSING OUT PARADE (DEEKSHANT PARADE)
Introduction 136
General Instructions 136
Formation of Parade 137
Presenting complements to the head of the Organisation/Institution 140
Arrival of the VIP/VVIP 141
Review of the Parade by the VIP 141
Oath Taking 142
Ceremonial March Past 144
Formation into close column 145
March Past 146
Advance in review order, report by the head of the Institution,
Prize distribution and VIPs address 149
 CONTENTS Page
Peeling off 151
Special Notes 152

CHAPTER XXI
SWORD DRILL
Sword Drill Movements 153
Saluting with the Sword 156
General Notes 157
CHAPTER XXII
EXTENDED ORDER DRILL
Introduction 159
Words of Command 164
Signals with the Hand 164
Signals with the Rifle 166
Control by Whistle Blast 166
CHAPTER XXIII
STREET LINING
For Guarding a Road on Both Sides 167
Closing 168
For Guarding a Road on Both Sides Alternately 168
Closing 169
For Deploying a Platoon or Company from the Centre 169
For Dividing a Road into Two Halves for Passing Vehicular and
Pedestrian Traffic 169
Closing 170
CHAPTER XXIV
Strength of a Company COMPANY DRILL 171
Formations and Positions of Officers and Under Officers 171
Dressing 173
A Company in Close Column of Platoons Failing in 174
A Company when Halted Changing Ranks 174
Close Column Movements 175
Column Movements 179
 CONTENTS Page
Line Movements 183
Movements from Column of Threes 186
Movements from Line of Platoon in Three (In Column Distance) 189
Dismissing 191
CHAPTER XXV
CEREMONIAL DRILL
General Arrangements 193
The Inspection or Review Parade Ground 195
Unit Organisation 197
Parade Formations 197
Sizing a Dismounted Unit 197
Telling Off a Dismounted Unit 198
General Instructions for Inspection and Review 198
Special Instructions for Officers 199
Receiving an Inspecting or Reviewing Officer 200
Receiving the President and the Governors 201
The Inspection 201
Marching Past 202
Post of Officers 203
Battalion Marching Past by Companies 203
Marching Past in Column of Route 205
Marching Past by Platoon in Quick Time 205
Marching Past by Platoon in Slow Time 206
Advancing in Review Order 207
Appendices A, B, C.D, E, F, and G 135
CHAPTER XXVI
GUARDS AND SENTRIES
Definitions 216
Guard Mounting 217
Relieving, Posting and Dismissing a Guard 222
Posting, Relieving, Marching and Dismissing Sentries and Reliefs 225
Turning Out a Guard for Inspection by Day 225
Turning Out a Guard by Night 226
General Rules for Sentries 227
General Instructions and Compliments to be given by
 CONTENTS Page
Guards and Sentries 228
CHAPTER XXVII
GUARD OF HONOUR
Composition, Strength and Occasions 231
Dress 233
Formation 233
Aide-De Camp 234
Conduction Officer 234
Colors 234
Salute 234
National Anthem 235
Inspection 235
General 236
CHAPTER XXVIII
FIRING A FEU-DE-JOIE
Occasions 238
Procedure and Words of Command 238
Giving of Cheers at Parades 239
CHAPTER XXIX
PASSING OUT PARADE

Introduction 241
General Instructions 2441
Formation of Parade 242
Presenting Compliments to Head of the Organisation/Institution 244
Arrival of the VIP / VVIP 244
Review of the Parade by the VIP 245
Oath Taking 245
Ceremonial March Past 247
Advance in Review order, Report by the Head of the
Institution, Prize Distribution and VIP’s Address 251
Peeling Off 252
Special Notes 253
 CONTENTS Page

CHAPTER XXX
COLOR PRESENTATION PARADE
PART-I
Definition of Color, its parts and their Measurements 255
Carry Belt and its Dressing 255
Dressing of Color 256
Casing and Uncasing the Color 256
Uthao Nishan and Bazu Nishan 257
Uthao Nishan to Kandhe Nishan and vice versa 258
Let Fly, Holding and Dipping of the Color 258
Color Party, Escort, and Priests 259

General Instructions 261

VVIPs to Present the Color 261
Strength of Parade 261
Formation of Parade 262
Arrival of Cased Colors 264
Presenting Compliments to the DGP 265
Arrival of VVIP/VIP 265
Review of the Parade by VVIP 266
Parade Troops 266
Formation of Hollow Sphere 267
Pilling of Drums and Consecration of the Color 268
Presentation of Color 268
Re-formation of Parade on the Inspection line 269
Ceremonial March Past 270
Advance in Review Order and Speech by VVIP 272
Return of Colors 272
Handing over the Parade 273
CHAPTER XXXI
FAREWELL PARADE
Introduction 274
General Instructions 274
Strength of the Parade 274
Formation of Parade 275
 CONTENTS Page

Arrival of the Out-going Officer 276

Review of the Parade by the Out-going Officer 277
Ceremonial March Past 277
Advance in Review Order and Speeches 277
Giving Cheers to the Out-going Officer 278
General Notes 278
CHAPTER XXXII
FUNERAL DRILL
Ceremony to be Observed at a Funeral 279
Procedure on arrival at the place of Interment/cremation Ground 280
Procedure during the Service 281
Procedure for Firing the Volleys 282
Procedure for Carrying the Coffin 282
Procedure for doing Reverse Arms and Rest on your
Arms Reversed 282
Procedure when Sword is used in Funeral Drill 285
CHAPTER XXXIII
Guidelines for Saluting & Types of Dresses 297
 Gajendra Singh Chaudhary
Dy. Director (Training)
E-mai: [email protected]
 CHAPTER I
DEFINITIONS
1. Alignment—Any straight line on which a body “of men is formed or is to
form”.
2. Column—Bodies of men—one behind the other on parallel and successive
alignments, at such a distance from one another as when formed to an angle
of 90 degrees to either flank, will bring them into line with three paces
interval between each.
3. Close Column—A column with distance reduced to suit requirements.
For normal purposes Close Column of platoon will be formed at 12 paces
distance. For Drill seven paces is more convenient.
4. Column of Route—A column of threes with not more than three men abreast
in any part of the column, including officers and supernumeraries. The
normal formation for men marching closed up on a road.
5. Column of Threes—A column with its officers and supernumeraries
maintaining their places except for the officer in command who places
himself at the head of the unit or sub-unit.
6. Covering—The act of a body placing itself directly in rear of another.
7. Depth—The space occupied by a body of men from front to rear.
8. Directing Body—The body, unit or subordinate unit on which the direction,
pace and alignment or relative positions of several parts of a formation
depend.
9. Distance—The space between men or bodies of men from front to rear.
10. Dressing—The act of taking up an alignment correctly.
11. File—A front rank man and his coverer or coverers.
12. Blank File—A file without a centre and rear rank man, or without a centre
rank man. A blank file is the second file from the left. While in two ranks,
the blank file is the third file from the left.
13. Flank—Either side of a body of men, as opposed to its front or rear.
14. Directing flank—That by which units march or dress.
15. Inner flank—That nearer the directing flank and serving as pivot when a
body is changing its direction.
16. Outer flank—That opposite to the inner or directing flank (often known as
reverse flank).
17. Forming—A method of changing direction as opposed to wheeling.
1
18. Front—The direction in which men are facing or moving at any given time.
19. Frontage—The extent of ground covered laterally by a body of men.
20. Incline—A diagonal movement by which ground is gained to the front and
flank simultaneously without alteration of the original alignment.
21. Interval—The lateral space between men or bodies of men on the same
alignment measured from flank to flank. Between dismounted men intervals
are measured from elbow to elbow. Each dismounted man is allotted a lateral
space of 24 inches in two ranks; in three ranks this lateral space is at arm’s
length with first clenched.
22. Line—Units formed on the same alignment.
23. Markers—Personnel employed in certain circumstances, to mark points on
which to direct a movement or by which to regulate a formation or alignment.
24. Mass—A battalion with its companies in line of Close Column of Platoons,
with 5 paces of interval between companies.
25. Open Order—An increased distance between ranks for ceremonial or
inspection purposes.
26. Close Order—The normal distance between ranks in line.
27. Pace—A measurement of distance on foot (e.g. 30 inches). Movement.
28. Rank—A line of men, side by side.
29. Single file—Men one behind the other on a frontage of one man at normal
marching distance.
30. Supernumeraries—The N.C.Os etc., forming the third rank if in the fourth
rank if in threes.
31. Wheeling—A movement by which a body of men on parade changes
direction, each rank of file pivoting on the inner flank but staining its
dressing.

2
 CHAPTER II
Section 1
Object Of Drill
1) The primary object of parade ground drill is to build up and maintain
in a recruit a high standard of discipline, turn-out, bearing and pride in self
and in the Police Force. In addition to these qualities being instilled among
the force, well executed parade ground drill also indirectly develops
individual self-respect and gives to the Force a feeling of power, cohesion
and purpose. Drill brings about the co-ordination between mind and body
and serves as the basis for imparting other service training.
2) A high standard of drill has a value over and above that obtained by
the participants in a particular parade, for it also gives to the spectators a
feeling of pride and confidence in the Force. The public generally see single
policemen, or small parties on duty in the cities and rural areas, but they
have too few opportunities of seeing larger formations to judge the police
as an efficient and disciplined force. The Ceremonial Drill provides a
valuable opportunity for the Force to demonstrate to the public as a whole
their high standard of training and discipline.
3) The drill plays an essential part in the training of men for outdoor
field work, for it teaches strict and implicit obedience to orders and develops
in the man pride and confidence in the force to which he belongs. Well
executed drill causes the men temporarily to exchange their individuality
for the corporate spirit and thus helps to develop collective morale and
esprit de corps.
Section 2
Principles of Instruction
The drill instructor must bear in mind that instruction is an art and should
be studied as such. He must always bear in mind the primary object of his subject,
which is to promote and maintain a high standard of discipline, turnout, hearing
and esprit de corps. He will at all times reflect to his squad the qualities which
drill is designed to instil in the men. The drill instructor must ensure that a squad
understands reasons for doing various movements. He must not be a slave driver
nor must he imagine that he can achieve his object only by bullying and shouting,
but at the same time his attitude towards his squad must always be firm and
determined. He, cannot afford to accept anything but the very highest standards
in all movements. To achieve the best results the instructor himself must mirror
the qualities that drill is designed to develop—he must in fact teach by his own
example.

3
 Section 3
Preparation
The drill instructor must prepare his lesson with the same care and attention
to detail as is necessary for all other instructions. He must think out his lesson
beforehand and know thoroughly the subject matter he is to teach. The drill
instructor must also plan his instruction with an eye to the position of and
arrangements for his squad. No member of the squad should be allowed to face
or have his back to the sun. If possible, the whole of the squad should work in the
shade.
Section 4
Method of Instructions
Action is the main means of instruction in drill. Words alone are of little
value and the talkative instructor will soon lose the interest of his squad. The
following should always be adhered to:—
(a) Complete demonstration.
(b) Demonstration by numbers, with explanation. (Supernumerary if present,
to be used for demonstration). Instructor to point out and explain drill
movements.
(c) Collective practice by squads, by numbers
(d) Individual practice by numbers
(e) Collectively by squads (counting the time)
(f) Collectively by squads (judging the time)
The instructor will not attempt to explain his actions during the complete
demonstration of the drill movement. He will not demonstrate the wrong way of
doing the movement. During the period of individual practice he will check each
individual and explain his faults to him.
The drill instructor must remember that he is a teacher like any other type
of instructor. He must employ normal principles and methods of instruction to
teach his squad, but at the same time bear in mind that his example will always
retard or improve their performances. When actually giving a word of command
to his squad, he himself will stand to attention, though he will of course be free to
move afterwards in his own time to check faults or errors in the squad.
When exercising the trained man, it should not be necessary for the instructor
to depart from the correct position of attention though it will often be necessary

4
and desirable for him to demonstrate and correct faults in his squad. Again it
cannot be too strongly emphasized that example constitutes the finest teaching in
DRIL the bearing, manner and carriage of the instructor will inevitably and
accurately reflect themselves in his squad, and it is, therefore, the task of the
instructor to set his squad a high standard by his personal example and employ
normal techniques of instruction to instil this standard into them.
Section 5
Arrangements And Conclusion Of Instructional Periods
Instructional periods must be planned with an eye to variety. Un-organized
periods of aimless drill are valueless and teach nothing. Fifteen minutes is the
maximum time to spend on any one drill movement at a time.
Instructional periods should not exceed forty minutes at a time. A drill period
should always end with five minutes “Good Drill” devoted to movements which
the instructor knows the squad can execute perfectly. The squad will thus leave
the parade ground with a sense of achievement and pride in their performance.
Section 6
The Backward Man
Instructors must never be allowed to make the backward man in a drill
squad the butt for their abuse or sarcasm. A man must not be allowed to develop
the impression that he is slow, by the instructor constantly calling out his name.
The instructor should gradually and unobtrusively work round to the backward
man in a squad, and by standing in front of him show him what he is doing
wrong. Patience and understanding will soon develop the slow starter, who with
proper handling will often prove ultimately to be one of the best men in the
squad.
Section 7
General Instructions On Drilling Recruits
The object of drill is to teach and maintain discipline. It is essential that
drill should be done extremely well. Slovenly drill merely impairs discipline. The
quality of drill is all important and this matters far more than the variety and
quantity of drill practices. It is, however, essential that while the standard of drill
should be higher than it was ever before, the amount of time which can be devoted
to it should be reduced.
All movements on parade are to be performed smartly. Stamping of feet
insuch movements as turning, coming to attention or standing at ease should not
be permitted.

5
 The details of drill movements given in the following sections are for the
information of the instructor only. It will not be repeated word for word to the
men on parade.
When recruits are being taught a particular motion or exercise the
instructor will form a squad round him and explain what is required in simple
language. As soon as he is satisfied that his meaning is clear he will proceed
to the second stage, (Demonstration) by performing the motion himself. During
this stage he will point out details done by him or by his demonstrator. The
men will then be made to perform the movements themselves firstly by
numbers, secondly by individual practice, thirdly by counting out the time
collectively and fourthly by judging the time. It is stressed here that the recruits
will learn through practicing the movements and being corrected while doing
so individually.
Recruits will be taught that, when on parade, it is the duty of every man
to see that he is at all times in the correct dressing from which ever flank is
the directing flank. This principle applies both when falling in and whenever
the squad is brought to face the advance position after marching except in
ceremonial drill where men will not correct their dressing on completion of a
movement until they receive the command to dress.
Men should be given frequent short rests (Stand Easy) between exercises.
When men of a squad are being tested separately in any movement,
those not under instruction at the moment should be ordered to stand easy or
to continue practicing the movement in their own time.
In drill movements which have two or more movements, when judging
the time, recruits should be taught to make a uniform pause after each motion,
equal to two paces in quick time. In early stages of training, every member of
a squad must be made to call out the time for each movement. This fixes the
standard time of 40 movements in a minute.
Section 8
Words Of Command
Good drill depends in the first instance on good words of command.
Drill instructors and those responsible for taking drill parades must frequently
practice giving words of command. This practice will give them confidence in
giving words of command distinctly and loudly and accustom them to use their
voices in the best manner. A word of command to a squad of six men need not be
as loud as a command to a battalion.
Commands which consist of one word will be preceded by a caution, which
6
may be part of the word itself. The first or cautionary part of word of command
will be given deliberately and distinctly. The last or executive part which, as a
rule, should consist of only one word or syllable will be given sharply [e.g.
PLATOON (Slowly)—HALT (sharply). A pause, which should be uniform in all
words of command, will be made between the cautionary and the executive words
of command. When however an order is given which cannot be executed quickly
(e.g. wheeling which takes some time to carry out) the executive should itself be
lengthened. Example— LEFT WH — E — EL.
The cautionary and executive words of command given in this pamphlet
refer generally to one flank only but the same with certain modifications
can be applied to movements to the other flank also.
Words of command must be given at all times with precision; indistinct
and slovenly words of commands produce slovenly movements and must be
avoided.
Instructors, when giving words of command, must stand to attention
and should not move along with the squad. They should adopt a correct
bearing thereby setting an example of alertness to their men.
It should always be remembered that a word of command is an order
which must be obeyed smartly and properly. Instructors must after giving
the word of command observe the drill movements of the squad and check
any tendency on the part of men to carry them out in a slovenly manner. For
instance, when men are called to attention, or after completion of the
movement ordered to stand at ease, absolute steadiness and silence must be
insisted upon. There must be no talking by the squad when they are being
drilled. It should be the principle to perfect one movement before proceeding
with the next. If faults and slack habits are passed over in the early stages,
they will, in time, undermine discipline without which no force can train or
perform their duties efficiently.
When it is desired to resume the position which obtained immediately
prior to the last word of command, the command “AS YOU WERE” should
be given.
The words of command laid down for use in close order drill are not
intended for use in movements in the field. They are designed with a view
to training the recruit’s mind and body to habits of strict obedience to the
will of the leader.
The following table shows when to give words of command to men on the
move during close order drill: —

7
Word of Command Slow Time Quick Time
Halt (Tham) .. .. .. As the left foot is coming to As the right foot is
the ground and level with coming to the ground.
the right
About Turn As the right foot is coming As the left foot is
(Pichhe Mur) to the ground and level coming to the ground.
with the left
Right Turn (Dahine As the left foot is passing and As the right foot is coming
Mur), Right Incline level with the right foot to the ground.
(Adha Dahine Mur),
Right Form (Dahine
ban), On the right
form—squad (Dahine
ko squad Bana)
Left Turn (Baen Mur), As the right foot is passing and As the left foot is coming
Left Incline (Adha level with the left foot to the ground.
Baen Mur), Left Form
(Baen ban), On the
left form squad
(Baen ko squad Bana)
Mark Time (Qudam Tal) Do Do
Halt (Tham) When As the right knee is just As the right foot is coming
marking time fully raised. to the ground.
(Qadam Tal)
Forward (When When the left foot is touching When the left foot is
marking time) the ground. coming to the ground.
(Agebarh –Qadam
Tal Par)
Break into quick time, When the left foot is touching
Quick March (Tej the ground.
Chaal Men Aa,
Tej Chal)
Break into slow time, When the left foot is
Slow March (Dhire coming to the ground.
Chaal Men Aa, Dhire
Chal)
Break into double time, When the left foot is
Double March (Daur coming to the ground.
Chaal Men Aa, Daur
Ke Chal)
2—104 BPR&D/74

8
 Section 9
Inspection
1. (i) Whenever a squad parading in three ranks is to be inspected, the ranks
will be opened for the inspection and closed on its completion, by the
following orders:—
(a) ‘OPEN ORDER-MARCH’ (Khuli line-chal)
The front rank will take two paces forward, the rear rank two paces to
the rear.
(b) ‘CLOSE ORDER—MARCH’ (Nikkat line-chal)
The ranks will re-form close order, the front rank taking two paces to
the rear, the rear rank taking two paces forward, the centre rank will
remain steady in the position of attention throughout.
(ii) The Instructor will pay attention to the personal cleanliness of the
men as well as to the state of their arms, equipment and clothing. A
clean and smart turnout must be insisted on at all times. In this respect
instructors must set a high standard for young recruits to emulate.
Men learn good habits more quickly by example than by any other
method.
(iii) Instructors will be trained in methods of inspection so that with
practice, they will be able to tell at a glance whether or not each man
on parade is correctly turned out.
(iv) A man ordered to adjust his dress, if in the front and middle ranks will
take a pace forward; if in the rear rank a pace to his rear. On completion
of adjustments the men will regain their original places in the ranks.
(v) The following points become second nature with experience, both in
their being noticed at inspection and in their observance by the men.
Full wear must be extracted from clothing and as long as it is
serviceable it must be worn.
There is, however, no reason why part worn clothing should not be
clean, correctly pressed, and in good repair.
(vi) It is usual to inspect, starting at the right hand man of the front rank,
from the head downwards, the front of the rank before the back of it,
and the men before their arms. After the inspection of the front rank
has been completed the other two ranks will be inspected similarly.
2. General impression—Is the man clean? Is his uniform clean, well fitting,
pressed, and correctly put on? Are his arms clean? Is he standing at the
correct position of Attention?

9
NOTE:— Before starting to inspect, see that any incorrect positions are put right.
The Inspecting Officer should be accompanied by the Platoon or
Section Commander who will note anything he is told.
3. Head-Dress
(a) From the front
(i) Is the hat, safa, or side cap clean and free from sweat and hair
grease?
(ii) Is the head gear placed correctly, or is it falling back, or tilted to
the side?
(b) From the back
(i) Is the head gear clean from the back?
(ii) Is the hair short? If in doubt, tell the man to take off his cap so as
to see if it is of moderate length on top.
4. Face and neck clean and shaven
NOTE : Check that the men’s eyes do not follow the Inspecting Officer.
5. Shirts
(a) From the front
(i) The shirt should be well fitted and properly tucked in.
(ii) Should be well starched, sleeves properly rolled, if wearing long
sleeve shirts.
(iii) Buttons intact and not broken.
(iv) Designation and badges of rank must be clean and properly sewn
on.
(v) No ends of cotton from the stitching must be allowed to appear.
(vi) If tunic is worn see that it is properly starched and that the shirt
collar and tie are well fitted and clean.
(vii) See that buttons are clean and placed correctly.
(b) From the back
(i) Is the collar clean?
(ii) Is the back of the shirt properly tucked in and pulled down?
6. Belts
(a) From the front
(i) This must be fitted so tight that during marching the weight of
the bayonet cannot pull it down one side.

10
 (ii) The buckle must be central to the front and in line with the cloth-
ing buttons. In case of Web belts the brass loops should be at one
inch from the buckle.
(iii) The brass and silver fittings in the belt should be well polished.
(iv) When wearing a cross belt on Tunic, see that it crosses between
the first two buttons from the collar end.
(b) From the back
(i) The frog when worn with the belt should be on the left hip—not
under the arms or in the small of the back.
(ii) The belt fittings in the rear should be clean.
7. Hands—Clean, with no tobacco or other stain, nails clean and trimmed.
8. Shorts and Trousers
(i) See that they are properly fitted specially at the waist.
(ii) See that they are of the regulation pattern and well starched and
creased.
9. Hosetops
(i) See that they are of the approved shade.
(ii) Are tied immediately below the knees and the upper folds are correctly
turned over— approximately 4 inches.
(iii) See if gaters are worn.
10. Putties and Anklets Putties
(i) See that they are of the approved shade and pattern.
(ii) That they are properly tied and the bow of the tape is in line with the
ankle and neatly tied.
(iii) Not more than two folds should be seen when wound round the ankle.
11. Ankles
(i) These must be of a large enough size not to wrinkle, gape at the side,
or bulge, and must be so tightly fitted as to remain straight and not
turn round at ankle.
(ii) The webbing and the straps must not be frayed.
(iii) Buckles if of brass, will be polished back and front.
12. Boots
(a) From the front

11
 (i) These must be in a good state of repairs and free from cracks.
Laces must be strong and not twisted or knotted. Laces must be
done up tight, so as to close the lace holes.
(ii) Should be neatly polished.
(iii) The angle of the feet when at Attention is correct (30 degrees). If
carrying arms, the toe butt is in line with the toes of the boot.
(b) From the back
(i) See that the heels are together and in line.
(ii) Get some men to lift one foot at a time to see if the soles are in
good repairs and properly studded.
13. Inspection of Arms
(i) Arms should be clean and dry for inspection.
(ii) Slings should be tight and properly fitted.
(iii) When at the Order see that the sights are down and the safety catch is
rear.

12
 CHAPTER III
DRILL AND PARADES
The term "DRILL" comes from the old tradition of formation combat, in
which soldiers were held in very strict formations as to maximize their combat
effectiveness. Formation combat was seen as an alternative to mêlée combat,
which required strict soldier discipline and competent commanders. As long as
the formations could be maintained, the 'civilized' soldiers would maintain a
significant advantage over their less organized opponents.
Although modern warfare has shirked this in favour of guerilla combat and
loose formations, modern militaries still use parades for ceremonial purposes or
in noncombat environments for their efficiency, ease of organization and
encouragement of discipline. Roughly synonymous are "drill" and "march".
Drilling started in the 16th century with the Dutch army of prince Maurice of
Orange. The English word drill is from Middle Dutch origin. All new recruits to
the police and para military forces are taught drill to teach them how to work and
move as a team. In addition, formations are still used in riot control situations.
A drill in military terms is the action of memorising certain actions through
repetition until the action is instinctive to the soldiers being drilled. Complex
actions are broken down into simpler ones which can be practised in isolation as
when the whole is put together the desired results are achieved. Such is necessary
for a fighting force to perform at maximum efficiency in all manner of situations.
Drilling increased in importance when men stopped fighting as individuals and
began to fight together as units. Drilling as a vital component of a war machine
further increased with the increases in the size of armies, for example when Phillip
II of Macedon disciplined his army so they could swiftly form the phalanxes that
were so critical to his successes as a general. Military drilling later was used by
the Roman Army to maximise efficiency and deadliness throughout their long
history. After the fall of the empire, and the Dark Ages set in Europe, most feudal
lords more heaviliy relied on peasant levies and their wealthy knights to fight
their wars, the knights for the most part reverting to fighting as individuals. Massed
military drilling was used mostly by only the foremost armies and nations, such
as the Normans.The U.S. drill is based on the contributions of Baron von Steuben,
a Prussian Army officer who served as a volunteer in the Continental Army. During
the winter quarters in Valley Forge, Pennsylvania, von Steuben taught a model
company of 100 soldiers musket drill. These soldiers, in turn, taught the remainder
of the Continental Army.
Parades consist of four directions:
Advance
Retire
Left
Right

13
 The Advance is the primary direction of movement, regardless of which
direction the soldiers are actually facing (similar to a ship's bow.)
The Retire is opposite the advance, against the primary direction of
movement (similar to a ship's stern.)
The Left is to the left of the Advance (similar to a ship's port.)
The Right is to the right of the Advance (similar to a ship's starboard.)
If the Advance is changed, then all other directions are changed to be based
on the new Advance.
Movements
There is only one person in charge of a parade at a time. Changing this
person is very ceremonious. This is to make it obvious to the personnel who is
currently in command, and therefore whom to pay attention to.
During parades, unless explicitly told otherwise, the personnel have restricted
movement, meaning they can only move exactly when they are told, and then
only doing exactly what they are told to do. In most stances any movement at all
is disallowed, and is held to such an extent as to have soldiers fainting on parade,
although fainting under any conditions short of plural hours standing still in the
hot sun is considered a sign of medical disability.
Attention ( Savdhan) : standing straight, eyes forward, chest out, shoulders back
and down, knees straight but not locked, heels together, feet at a 30-degree angle
(540 mils). All muscles are rigid. The hands are held in tight fists with the thumbs
aligned with the seam of the trousers.
At Ease (Vishram) : a modified position of attention in which the left foot is
moved to shoulder width and the hands are placed behind the back with arms
fully extended. The right hand is placed inside the left with all fingers together
and pointing rigidly downwards.
Easy (Aaram Se) : Legs remain at Ease position, arms are brought to the sides to
a more natural standing position. Member may relax their muscles and make
minimal movements.
Commands
The typical parade commands are spoken extremely clearly and emphatically,
and consist of four major parts.
Identifier or who is to follow the command. This is typically (number) Section,
(number) Platoon, (letter) Company, or (name) Regiment, although the prefixes
are often dropped when there is no ambiguity (Section, Platoon, Company (Coy.)
or Regiment) Parade can only be given by the parade commander, and always
refers to the entire parade, regardless of size.

14
Precautionary, or what is to be done in an abstract sense: Move to the Advance,
Move to the Retire, etc. (This is not always used in American usage)
Cautionary, or the first part of what is to be done. This is called the "preparatory
command."
Executive, or execution, a single syllable on which the soldiers actually move.
This is as true in the other services; however, the accent of the commander often
leads this to be heard as simply huh on commands such as "Present Arms" and
"Order Arms." There is always a significant pause between the Cautionary and
the Executive. The executive command is always given a greater emphasis than
the preparatory command. Often there is no chance of ambiguity, and much of
the command can be unspoken. In such cases there must always be the Cautionary
and the Executive.
Common parade commands
Fall In : Have the forementioned troops fall into formation.
Fall Out : Have the troops fall out. This is done with a right turn followed by
either three steps or a Quick March in a straight line to the edge of the parade
square, determined by context.
Dis -Miss : A fall-out where the soldiers have free time until their next designated
work period (typically done at the end of a common day, although often is simply
an erroneous substitution for Fall Out).
Attention : Have the soldiers uniformly adopt the Attention position, the most
constrictive position (with feet together), but the only position from which sol-
diers can actually be made to move. Actions such as a salute also return soldiers
to the attention position.
Alignment commands :
Dressing right, Dress, or just Right Dress,- All personnel in the unit except
the right marker. take two steps forward, pause, and bring up their arms parallel
to the ground and at the same time snap their heads so they're facing right, unless
otherwise specified (Elbow Dressing, Shoulder Dressing). After this, they pause,
and then shuffle back to a new position, where their hand is extremely close to
the soldier's shoulder on their right. On the command of 'Eyes Front', the front
rank snaps their arms down and faces forward, while all other ranks simply face
forward.
Rest positions :
Stand at Ease : Have the personnel adopt the more relaxed position At Ease
position, with feet shoulder width apart, although still no movement is allowed.
This is typically used when soldiers must wait a short duration. This is also the
initial positions soldiers are in when they fall into formation. Changing from At

15
Ease to Attention and back again, or the converse, is standard when the command
of a parade is transferred (typically between the commanding officer and his
Sergeant-Major), since command of a formation isn't actually transferred until
the new commander makes a command.
Stand Easy : Have the soldiers adopt the next easiest stance, where hand are
hung at the sides and the shoulders can actually be slacked. This is often, but not
always, followed by an implicit 'Relax' ('Rest').
Marching with weapons/saluting
Shoulder Arms : If the personnel have the weapons at the order, then it is brought
up and carried on the right shoulder. Although Left and Right Shoulder Arms are
both valid commands, right is assumed if it is unstated. The police/para military
personnel must be at attention to shoulder weapons. This is typically done through
a throw rather than a carry.
Port Arms : The weapon is brought out in front of the personnel, and held by the
right hand on small of the butt, or equivalent, and the left hand about the forestock,
or equivalent.
Present Arms : The police/para military personnel use the salute for their par-
ticular weapon. Personnel without weapons use a salute appropriate for their
headdress. Often officers can salute on behalf of their troops, and any such ambi-
guity will be discussed with the personnel before hand. This is often used with
the precautionary General Salute, when appropriate.
Order Arms : If the personnel are carrying a weapon which can be ordered they
will lower it so that is resting on the ground, touching the outer toes of the right
boot, and being supported by a slightly bent right arm.
Saluting/saluting on the march
To the front Salute or Salute: The right arm is raised so the forearm is placed at
a 90° angle, while pointing at the temple. It is generally to a count of "Up, two,
three, down!" While marching it is exactly the same, except the count is "Up,
two, three, four, five, down, away!"
To the Right Salute: The right arm is raised so the forearm is placed at a 90°
angle, while pointing at the temple. It is generally to a count of "Up, two, three,
down!" while marching it is exactly the same, except the count is "Up, two, three,
four, five, down, away!" This is done while looking to the right, except the right
marker, who must stay looking to the front, to keep the flight, squad, platoon, etc.
staying straight.
To the Left Salute: The right arm is raised so the forearm is placed at a 90° angle,
while pointing at the temple. It is generally to a count of "Up, two, three, down!"
While marching it is exactly the same, except the count is "Up, two, three, four,

16
five, down, away!" This is done while looking to the left, except the right marker,
who must stay looking to the front, to keep the flight, squad, platoon, etc. staying
straight.
Turning motions while marching
Right Turn : A 90° turn to the right done by rotating on the right heel and left
ball. The cautionary and executive are both called on the left foot. The left leg is
then brought up to be parallel to the ground (although different patterns are fol-
lowed by the Police forces and the para military forces) and slammed into the
ground in the position of attention. This motion is done at a particular fixed point.
Left Turn : A 90° turn to the left, done by rotation on the right ball and the left
heel. The right leg is then brought up to be parallel to the ground and slammed
down into attention. This motion is done at a particular fixed point.
About Turn: A 180° turn to the right, done as an exaggerated version of the right
turn. Right Flank MARCH or Right turn, it is still the same even on the march for
some countries: All members marching execute 90° turn to the right done by
rotating on the right heel and left ball. Left Flank MARCH or Left turn, it is still
the same even on the march for some countries: All members marching 90° turn
to the left, done by rotation on the right ball and the left heel.
Turning motions while still
Right Turn: The body is rotated 90° to the right members shall bend the left
knee, straighten it in double time and smartly place the left foot beside the right
to assume the position of attention.
Left Turn: A mirror image of Right Turn.
About Turn: The body is rotated 180° in a clockwise direction, knees locked.
Members shall bend the left knee, straighten it in double time and smartly place
the left foot beside the right to assume the position of attention.
Right Incline: Exactly the same as a right turn, but one only turns 45°.
Left Incline: Exactly the same as a left turn, but one only turns 45°.
Drill movements for recruits
When a recruit is training in a Police Training School, usually have to call
out timings of their parade moves, for example for a left or right turn, they call
out "1" whilst they are turning, "2" is the regimental pause, "3" times the left or
right foot to the parallel position and "4" is the timing to slam/drill your foot in to
the floor.
For a salute on the halt, you halt, check, 1, 2 then call out 2, 3 up (then you
bring your arm up into the salute call out 2, 3 pause or a second or two then lower
your arm in to your attention stance. Do this according to your command.

17
 Saluting on the march. Commands ARE ALWAYS given off on the LEFT
foot. While marching, you will be commanded on your left foot, saluting,
regimental pause, saluting to the right, then salute on your LEFT Foot, in which
you will call, up miss over 2, 3, 4, 5, down (then you bring your arm down and
face forward) swing, in which your right arm will be in position with your left
foot, whilst marching.
Marching motions
Quick March: The standard pace is 120 beats/minute with a 30in. step. The pace
is based on the individual units, the pace given by the commander, and the speed
of the band's rhythm.
Slow March: This is a ceremonial pace, used for funeral marches and when a
unit's colors are marched out in front of the troops. The standard pace is 60 paces
per minute.
Double March: This is essentially a moderate jog at approximately 180 paces
per minute. It creates a travel speed of approximately double that of Quick Time,
designed to be used even when carrying heavy burdens. This is often erroneously
used to describe a sprint or an ordinary run.
Easy March: This is an unrestricted march at approximately Quick Time. This is
designed for field marches and other rough conditions, though is not used in
combat areas.
Mark Time: This is essentially a stationary march with the knees coming up
parallel to the ground or the foot dangling six inches off of the ground. This is
designed to maintain the time of large parades when portions need no forward
speed.
Step For-Ward or Forward or Forward, March: This causes troops marking
time to resume a normal march.
Cavalry drill
The purpose of cavalry drill was to train men and horses to work together
for war. It survives to us in a much diminished form in the modern sporting
discipline of dressage. The movements sideways, at angles the pirouettes etc.
were the movements needed for massed cavalrymen to form and reform and to
deploy. Of the proponents of classical dressage from which modern dressage
evolved probably the best known are the Lipizzaner Stallions of the Spanish
Riding School. The Canadian Mounties Musical Ride giving us an inkling of
what massed cavalry drill at speed would have been like.

18
 CHAPTER IV
THE ROLE OF THE DRILL INSTRUCTORS IN INCREASING
TRAINEE MOTIVATION AND INVOLVEMENT IN ADULT
TRAINEES
Training of the Police Personnel & Para Military Forces is receiving attention
of the Leaders of the Force. The Padmanabiah Committee report on Police Reforms
has made certain recommendations regarding the training of the Police personnel.
Outdoor training is an important feature of Police Training. It has to be remembered
that the personnel joining the Police & Para military forces are well educated and
they are to be treated as Adults who have different qualities and their capability
of learning is quite different as compared to children.
Training is a conscious effort to impart, improve or increase knowledge and skills
to develop attitudes and values of an individual in a desired direction. It is, thus,
a process of developing a person's effectiveness through carefully selected methods
by competent trainers in a suitable training climate. It should be directed not only
towards preparing him/her for the efficient and effective performance of his/her
duties in the assigned job, but also towards developing his/her capacity for greater
responsibility and, where appropriate, fitting him/her for other duties.This fact
requires that we reassess a major issue in training: how best to enable recruits,
trainees of the basic courses, and the in service participants to learn what they
need to know. At the heart of this issue lies the topic of motivation: unless learners
are adequately motivated they will not perform effectively, nor will they find
learning rewarding or satisfying.
Designing the Programme
It is accepted that the first necessity of a good training programme, is the
manner in which the programme has been designed. Designing and carrying out
training activities can be challenging and rewarding; ingenuity and imagination
are often required. The satisfaction of gaining or helping to impart to others
knowledge about learning is also an important task. In each designed programme,
there should be a lot of flexibility, depending on the number, background and
learning styles of the participants, learning environment and other variables. In
addition, the trainer will need to be familiar with the following:
3 Effective ways to present the material,
3 How to deal with problem participants
3 How to keep momentum going
3 How to determine how much the trainees have learned
The Adult learner
One aspect that has to be remembered is that the personnel joining the

19
Police and the Para Military Forces are adults and there is a need to understand
that there is a different way to deal with adult learners. Even the trainees who
attend the basic courses are adult learners, some of whom have past job experiences
also. Some of the women trainees who join fresh from college find that their pre-
professional education may have left them ill-equipped to adapt to the learning
styles in the Police institutions, where it may be authoritative presentation of
information and encouragement of dependency relations with the Instructors.
There is a lot of difference between transferring learning to younger people and
to adults. There are certain characteristics which are totally different and which
cannot be ignored by a trainer. While few of them doubt their own learning
ability, their participation and learning are affected by the need to avoid revealing
professional incompetence in public. What, then are the optimum conditions for
adult learning? Given below are six of the areas, which form an important part of
the adult learning:
3 Learning goes on throughout life;
3 Learning is a personal and natural process;
3 Learning involves change;
3 Learning is bound with human development;
3 Learning pertains to experience and experiencing;
3 Learning has its intuitive side
Learning then is an activity of one who learns. It may be intentional or
random; it may involve acquiring information or skills, new attitudes,
understanding or values. It usually is accompanied by change in behavior and
goes on throughout life.
Critical Characteristics of adult learners
In any Training Institution, the learning process imparted for the trainees, through
training should be designed for the Adult learner. They differ from children and
youth as learners and the implications for practice. What are the special
characteristics of adult learners that have to be kept in mind?
(a) A different orientation to education and learning: Adults have multiple roles,
unlike children. Time to the adult is precious. They are able to internalize
long-range goals and work towards them over a period of time. On the
other hand, many adults live in here-and-now and will seldom work towards
distant goals unless they themselves have a commitment towards these goals.
The adult has a firmer and more fully formed self-concept than the child
learner. If the adult thinks that learning and change are much a part of his
life as his work, he will be more likely to enter into learning and achieve
higher level of intellectual performance. Hence, the adult's orientation
towards life and their broader experience bases is that they can usually

20
 identify or help identify what they need to learn.
(b) An accumulation of experience: Adults enjoy the potential benefit and
drawbacks or more accumulated life experience than younger persons. Past
experience then constitutes a base for new learning and a source of obstacles
discouraging deliberate entrance into learning or hampering learning.
(c) Special developmental trends: The term development refers to more or less
orderly, predictable and sequential changes in characteristics and attitudes.
Adults pass through developmental phases that are different from those
experienced by children. There is continuous individual growth and change
together with periodic changes in orientations, assumptions and patterns of
relationships. During periods of transition or following major change events,
adults appear receptive to learning related to reassessing personal goals,
reasserting themselves as valued members of the organization and society
and reconfirming their self-esteems.
(d) Anxiety and ambivalence: Very often, many adults confront learning with
mixed feeling and even with fear. Understanding these reactions can help
one to learn more effectively and assist others to do so. Sometimes, learners
confronted with more responsibility for their learning than they expected,
usually respond with anxiety and sometimes withdrawal. Later adulthood
are periods when people are especially prone to this source of anxiety.
Methodology poses problems too. People may be uncomfortable with certain
techniques, certain tasks, and certain environments. The anxious learner
will have to be helped to overcome this anxiety.
Does Authority Block learning
As soon as an individual attains the maturity of a self-responsible adult, he is in
the process of moving from dependency to autonomy. During this period a learner
can become resentful, sometimes intensely so, of the continuing efforts of
instructors to provide direction. At this time the learner is particularly eager to be
self-reliant, despite an instructor's misgivings. Some learners soon find their
sense of autonomy and self-esteem confirmed through a general situation of
responsible self-identity. But for others the struggle to achieve autonomy is far
more difficult and may not be completed until middle age or later. These are the
trainees that may reject authority and be problem trainees during Drill classes.
The period of transition to full mature adult status in society has two
important characteristics that are relevant to learning: authority repudiation and
colleague affiliation. The intensity with which any individual manifests these
characteristics varies, but the prevalence of these responses in training institutions
accounts for the ineffectiveness of the authority- obedience model of learning.
Authority repudiation is a strong term to use, yet it is an apt description that
denotes the individual's rejection of supervision, direction, instruction, and so

21
on. In general, individuals who are struggling to assert their autonomy tend to
resist the efforts of persons in authority to exercise control over them. The authority
may be an instructor or the 'ustad'. The individual does not necessarily reject the
legitimacy of the authority, but rather seeks to extend his/her own autonomy by
working to control the interaction with the authority.
This is a problem faced by some of the women trainees when they initially
undergo the basic training at the Training Institutions. Understanding the problems
and providing help to overcome this behaviour should be the aim of the Trainer.
At the same time that the individual is resisting authority figures as sources
of direction, colleagues are becoming a much more important source of mutual
reliance. The problems faced by the trainee joining the Police Training Institutions
in adjusting to the tough rigour and adjusting to a very disciplined life brings
them closer to each other, friendships blossom, confidant relationships are
established, groups and cliques form, and experiences of the problems of
adjustment to a new atmosphere are shared. As a result, the trainees are drawn
together as people who can share and understand one another within their own
subculture, whose standards are their own rather than outsiders'. The trainees are
normally open to one another and very much influenced by how their peers view
them. This openness to colleague influence usually continues, through in a more
subdued form, after the initial period of difficulty in adjusting to changed
atmosphere.
In addition, trainees share essentially the same pursuit of autonomy. Each
tends to rely on contemporaries as models for self-direction. A trainee who
continues to lean on authority figures is likely to be rejected by contemporaries
as immature or childish. Within their groups, the trainees can vent their hostile
feelings toward authority figures, who become "anti-models". Such colleague
affiliation dynamics bear directly on trainees responses to the authority-obedience
model in the parade ground. For example, one way by which a trainee can gain
colleague approval is to challenge a "Ustad" on an order which may appear to the
trainee as uncalled for. Another way is to object to the slightest token of
arbitrariness or unfairness on the part of authorities, and to get others to rally
around in demanding justice from the Trainer or the "ustad". There, is therefore,
a need to look into this aspect of the conditions that are essential for imparting
proper training in Drill to the police and Para military service personnel.
Optimum Conditions for adult learning
Adults are characterized by special orientation to life, living, education and
learning; a relatively rich experience based to draw on and cope with; different
developmental changes and tasks than younger learners and their own brand of
anxiety and ambivalence. These essential characteristics generate some optimum
conditions for adult learning- conditions that trainers find useful to activate and

22
that learners have a right to expect. Adults learn best when these conditions are
met:
™ They feel the need to learn and have inputs into what, why and how they
will learn;
™ Learning's content and processes bear a perceived and meaningful
relationship to past experience and experience is effectively utilized as a
source of learning;
™ What is to be learned relates optimally to the individuals developmental
changes and service tasks;
™ The amount of autonomy exercised by the learner is congruent with that
required by the mode or methods utilized;
™ They learn in a climate that minimizes anxiety and encourages freedom to
experiment;
™ Their learning styles are taken into account.
Effects of learning and instruction on learning how to learn
The content for every trainee in every training activity influences the trainee's
skills in, or attitude toward learning. Teaching, learning and learning how to learn
are related in at least five ways:
A spirit of inquiry: Fostering a spirit of inquiry and curiosity enhances the trainee,
leaving behind positive residues in addition to the information required. Any
activity that requires or encourages the learner to ask questions or identify or
solve problems is relevant. Helping the trainee sharpen his/her questions or
internalize a problem solving methodology would contribute more.
Transference capability: The capacity to transfer has been called the most
powerful capacity a person can possess. This involves the transfer of situations
containing elements matching those where application is to take place. This
involves the training for desired outcomes. The learning skill element will accrue
from instructions that foster the outcomes and provide opportunities for the trainee
to plan application and implementation.
Subject matter mastery: The study of a content area of any subject provides
opportunity to think critically and use methods of inquiry peculiar to that subject.
Thinking and reasoning are involved.
Self-understanding: Training experience that involves constructive self-
examination stands to leave the learner better equipped for further learning because
a central task of learning how to learn is developing awareness of oneself as a
learner. It can be furthered by helping the trainees relate problems, issues and
ideas to their own lives and by helping them to acquire new ways of perceiving
their environment.

23
Process awareness: Learning how to learn involves a set of processes in which
the individual leaner acts at least for some time as his own manager of change
and his focus of change is his own self-concept and learning processes.
Finally the adult who has learned how to learn knows the following:
• How to take control of his own learning;
• How to diagnose strength and weaknesses as a learner
• How to overcome personal blocks to learning;
• How to learn from everyday experiences;
• How to learn from computers;
• How to lead and participate in discussion and problem solving groups;
• How to get the most from a training class;
• How to help others learn more effectively
The Importance of change of attitude of the trainee:
One of the most neglected aspects of training is the significant influence attitudes
have on learning and performance. Administrators of companies, universities,
and schools, as well as teachers, usually pause to consider the quality of employees'
or students' attitudes only when they have become so negative or deviant as to
result in confused, divisive, unacceptable, or even illegal behavior. Other attitudes
are likely to be regarded as a personal and individual matter- part of one's
personality-and are rarely seen as subject matter that is significant enough to be
brought into focus through teaching, evaluation or appraisal.
The Role of the Chief Drill Instructor
The Chief Drill Instructor, who performs the role of a learning administrator,
may be a trained teacher or an individual who joins the training establishment for
the first time as a trainer. There is significant difference between a teacher and a
trainer of adults. First, he/she must relinquish the idea that he/she is a person
responsible for producing learning. The effective learning administrator is one
who has no rewards to give or withhold, who may or may not be a subject expert
and whose activities are limited to administering a learning process. A key
difference concerns the exercise of leadership. He/she encourages the trainee to
exercise self- initiative and plays the role of a facilitator in the learning process.
As and when there is a problem in the learning event in a Drill Class, the decision
about whether or not to intervene is the initial issue of a learning administrator. In
deciding whether or not to intervene, a learning administrator might ponder the
following questions:
3 Is the problem serious enough to require his/her intervention or should the

24
 learners solve it themselves?
3 Do the trainees have enough time to resolve the problem through critique?
3 Would intervention help silent members who are presently being ignored,
to express their thoughts or feelings?
3 Would intervention motivate the trainees to wok harder or better?
Motivation
Perhaps the most important factor in learning is motivation to learn. Experimental
evidence indicates that little learning takes place in the absence of motivation.
What motivates one person to learn may, of course, be quite different from what
motivates another, For some people, it is the interest or challenge of the task
(intrinsic motivation): for others, it is the anticipated reward or punishment
(extrinsic motivation, e.g. reward); for still others, it is the need for recognition
or status - (becoming the Parade Commander). Up to a point, the stronger the
motivation, the more learning takes place, but beyond a critical level, the learner
becomes too anxious and tense to learn effectively (some of the energy that has
been aroused is spilling over in tension, which disturbs learning).
Drill instructors should have an adequate understanding of the part that "needs
satisfaction" can play in effective learning, from the basic problems of participant
comfort (lighting, seating and ventilation) and fatigue (the timing of training ) to
an awareness of the trainees' need to feel accepted and respected by colleagues
and by the instructor. If these needs are met in large measure, participants will be
more likely to try to satisfy their needs for creativity and self-fulfilment in the
learning experience.

25
 CHAPTER V
SELECTION OF THE DRILL INSTRUCTOR
The first and most essential requirement of a good Drill instructor is that he
should have adequate professional knowledge and experience of the subject, which
he is to teach with sincerity and enthusiasm for the job. He has to deal with the
most sensitive material in existence, namely human personality. For the young
and the impressionable trainees, the instructor's devotion to duty, enthusiasm
should be catching. A good teacher must have a well-balanced personality and an
even disposition. His bearing and appearance should display abundant self-
confidence and vitality. Only then will he have the force of character sufficient to
mould the character and attitudes of the trainees who come to the training
institution as adults.
The skills and competencies of an Instructor should broadly cover the following
areas:
(a) Imparting of necessary knowledge and skills;
(b) The creation of right attitudes;
(c) The generation of decision making ability;
(d) Stimulation of critical and innovative thinking.
Trainers Role today is not merely that of an instructional agent. He is very much
involved in the organizational development and contributes research on training
programmes, their methodology and affects. Hence it would be necessary to
identify the following trainer characteristics:
(a) Trainee orientation: observing and analyzing trainee behaviour
around him while at the same time placing himself above the trainee
behaviour in the classroom and outside it;
(b) Involvement in the Training Programme: Such a trainer will hold a
strong basic responsibility for all trainees and understand their aptitude
and opinion. He will be able to communicate better and effectively
and develop constructive and amicable personal relations;
(c) He should be practical in his approach to the problems of the
organization and match the training inputs to the organization needs,
to bridge the present gap between theory and practice;
(d) He should have the ability and willingness to recognize change as the
basic law of life, affecting the environment both outside and the inside
the training centre. This enable him to devise methods, procedures,
attitudes and skills and seek to enhance his own competence;
(e) He should understand that the training resources are scarce and should

26
 be meticulously used. The above trainer characteristics further depend
on the following five factors which contribute to trainer effectiveness:
3 Knowledge and experience of the trainer
3 Motivation
3 Organizational framework and climate
3 Training policies
3 Interest and support of senior officers
Identification of Instructors in the Courses conducted at the Academy:
It will have to be remembered that any person identified as an Instructor may not
be a born teacher. While every training institution does lay stress on Academic
development but it is the development of the overall personality of the trainee
that is of importance. Thus, for a new Trainer who joins any training establishment:
(a) It will take about 3-4 months when he would have the competency to take
classes in outdoor subjects;
(b) It will be necessary to be the Under-study of a senior Drill Instructor to
understand the designing and conduct of the course;
(c) Will require a minimum of three to four months to develop the capability of
preparing the lesson plans etc. for the Drill classes.
Hence, the essential qualities that would be necessary for being selected as Drill
Instructor in a Training institutions should be :
(a) Good, pleasant and smart personality;
(b) Physical Fitness;
(c) Sound professional knowledge;
(d) Good power of communication/presentation;
(e) Sociability;
(f) Positive attitude;
(g) Will be accepted as a role model by the trainees;
(h) Computer awareness.(additional qualification);
(i) Field experience;
(j) Application of theory to practice;
(k) Ingenuity of ideas supported by logical analysis, though contrary to
normal line of thinking
Tenure : The normal tenure of an instructor in Training Institution will be
four years.

27
 An officer SO/OR who has been an instructor in any Training Institution
should normally not be posted back as an instructor again. However, exceptionally
talented instructors can be reconsidered for fresh posting after fresh empanelment
on attaining two years actual field experience.
Cases of officers/sos/OR who are posted as instructors in the Training
Institutions after lapse of considerable period of their empanelment may be
considered for re-empanelment immediately on the recommendations of Heads
of Training Institutions.
QRs FOR SELECTION OF INSTRUCTORS
(A) FOR OTHER RANKS
1) Should not have been awarded major punishment in a case of moral
turpitude in his entire service. There should be no red entry in service
record during last three years at the time of empanelment.
2) Should hold matriculate or above educational standard.
3) Should have obtained three or more Good reports during the last five
years at the time of empanelment. Should not have earned any adverse
entry in the ACRs during this period. The last report should be
"GOOD" or higher grading.
4) Should be medically fit.
5) The maximum age limit should be forty five years.
6) Should have obtained minimum b/by grading with specific
recommendations regarding. Regarding instructional capability in the
prescribed course attended within seven years at the time of
empanelment.
(B) FOR OFFICERS AND SUBORDINATE OFFICERS
1) Should have clean record of service (no adverse entry during the last
5 years ) with at least two more "above average"/very GOOD" ACRs.
In case of CDO/PT courses, last three ACRs will be considered.
2) Should not have been awarded any major or minor punishment during
the last five years. Major punishment involving moral turpitude at
any time in his service would permanently debar an Officer/SO from
being selected as instructor. However while examining the cases of
those punished under minor punishment, in exceptional cases, nature
of the minor punishment should be examined and offences, having
no direct relevance with the discipline of the individual may be
overlooked.
3) Should be medically fit (SHAPE-I/AYE). However, a person with
some handicap may also be considered if he is exceptionally good
and the proposed instructional assignment does not involve much

28
 physical strain. The departmental screening committee may consider each
case on merit after ascertaining full details about physical ability of the
person and the requirement the courses for which he is being considered.
QRs FOR SELECTION OF DRILL INSTRUCTORS
Rank Age Med.Category Course attended Remarks
1 SO's Below Shape I (a) UID/ Experience of a
45 years UID(Army) (within Drill Instructor
seven years) - in any Training
(B-Grading) Institution
(b) PW or YO's
Leg I
2 NCO's Below Shape I (a) UID/UID(Army) Experience of a
40 years with BY Grading Drill Instructor
within seven years in any Training
(b) PW Course Institution
TRAINING OF TRAINERS' COURSE FOR THE DRILL INSTRUCTORS
The Role of the Trainer :
Quality in Training is generally associated with rigour, hardwork, excellence and
such other notions valued by society. It will have to be appreciated that competent
professionals are the best judges of how to exercise their professional skills. Good
training like good practice in other professions comes from a marriage of training,
knowledge and personal qualities, not from rigid application of externally imposed
formulas. There are, of course, other things that have to be considered. It is clearly
important that trainers, like other professionals, are accountable and it is important
that standards are maintained.
Flexibility : Flexibility in training is an important feature, which is often neglected.
Every change in the training programme suggested by the Trainers should be
examined and implemented. It is to be remembered that the flexibility to be aimed
at it’s flexibility to enable good trainers to train well - not bad ones to do the job
badly.
The problem is to get the balance right, and that is by no means straightforward.
An important aspect that has to be remembered by the trainers is that they should
behave professionally and should be called to account when they do not. That
requires rigorous self-criticism and some robust system for ensuring that the
trainees are properly served. When the regulation of the profession is purely
internal - professional setting the standards and judging whether they have been
achieved or not - the possibilities of complacency and arrogance are likely to be
high.

29
Conduct of Training of Trainers' Course
Once the selection of a Drill Instructor has been completed, there is need to prepare
him for his role as a Drill Instructor. The Drill Instructor plays a very significant
role in the early stages of the training and hence, should be able to generate a
lasting impression on a trainee. The Drill classes can become very monotonous
for a trainee and it is for the Instructor to generate a positive interest in the Drll
classes. There is, therefore a need for the conduct of a Training for Trainers Class
for Drill Instructors before the commencement of a new course as well as during
the induction of a new Drill Instructor to the training Institution.
The conduct of the
(a) Discussion about the objective of conduct of Drill for the trainees;
(b) Syllabus of the Drill Training;
(c) Expected standard to be achieved by a trainee at different stages of training;
(d) Evaluation of the standard achieved by a trainee and handling of the trainees
who are lagging behind;
(e) Group Discussions on the common problems faced during the conduct of
the Drill classes and management of such problems;
(f) Handling of the Adult trainee;
(g) Use of training aids during class (Use of mirrors, Video camera etc);
(h) Common injuries that are sustained, prevention and injury management;
(i) Sequencing of the Training events;
The Training of Trainers Course can be conducted with the in-house Drill
Instructors. However, some of the classes on Handling of the Adult Trainees,
Common injuries and evaluation of training should be handled, wherever, possible,
by experts on the subject.
In addition to the Training of Trainers’ Course, there should be periodical
discussions amongst the Drill Staff on the following:
(a) Common Problems being faced;
(b) Evaluation of the Standard that has been attained by the trainees and handling
of the trainees who are not coming up to the required standard;
(c) Sequencing of the training events.
The decisions on sequencing will depend on:
i. How to start on past experience and knowledge - where to start
ii. How to build up progressively the inputs on skill and knowledge

30
 iii. How chunks will be used to complement each other in the development
of the learning
iv. Where and when to attempt the "unfreezing" of the past attitudes
v. When and how to include practise, reinforcement, transfer application
vi. How to maintain variety and interest
vii. How best to pace the learning
Induction of the new Instructor
Every new Instructor selected in any training establishment should be made to
work as a Under-study of a senior Instructor, during the Drill classes, for a period
of a fortnight, following which he should be given independent charge of
conducting the Drill classes.

31
 CHAPTER VI
INJURY MANAGEMENT
Suffering an injury can be a terrible and aggravating experience for a trainee.
All training institutions of the Police and the Para Military Forces where trainees
frequently sustain injuries ranging from muscle sprains and joint strains, to the
more severe orthopedic and chronic pain problems. Though not all injuries are
career ending, all do require some form of appropriate (medical) attention heading
down the path toward effective recovery. It is very difficult to continue with the
Drill Classes effectively, when injured or recovering from injury. A nagging injury
always seems to crop its annoying head. Injuries interrupt training, cause de-
conditioning, and can be downright discouraging ... It often takes trainees months
of serious training to merely gain back what was lost to begin with.
Good injury management aims to prevent additional pain or discomfort to the
trainee and minimise the consequences of the injury. The benefits include reduced
acute symptoms (pain, swelling, etc) and a faster recovery. Effective injury management
is especially important for those sustained directly or indirectly in Drill Classes.
Injuries that are not investigated thoroughly can lead to problems for a trainee.. With
proper treatment and supervision however, injuries sustained during drill classes tend
to heal quickly. The early, accurate diagnosis by a medical professional of any injuries
such as stress fractures or to joints is of specific importance. Failure to detect these
injuries may lead to serious consequences for a trainee. Many of the injuries that are
sustained during Drill classes are because of the inability of the Drill Instructor to
understand the reasons and cause for such injuries.
The human body is designed to move in many fluid and meticulous manners.
Knowledge of the machine-like nature of the body is necessary to understand the
effects and stress of Drill and other forms of training. Like all other activities, Drill
has very specific stresses and stressors all impacting the body in various ways. There
is, therefore a need for the Drill Instructors to be aware of the unique mannerisms of
the human anatomy, so they can have a better understanding of biomechanics and
how to properly teach Drill, without affecting serious bodily injury.
Before examining some of the more basic injury management protocols,
it's important to note that injury management by a Drill Instructor is not a substitute
for the attention it should receive from a Medical specialist. The role of the Drill
Instructor is to appreciate the nature of injury and decide the attention it should
receive.
PHYSICAL STRESS
Does stamping the feet, marching on the heels, swinging the arms to shoulder
height and above, damage the body more than another? What affect does increased
drill practice have on the body and its energy systems? Will sport-specific training
minimize the risk for injury? The body is subject to wear and tear, not oblivious

32
to an occasional flat tire or a breakdown. Repeating a motion over and over again
places many physical stresses on the joints including the bones, muscles, tendons,
ligaments, cartilage, and other supporting tissues. Performing drill every day, a
trainee places tremendous stress on many of the joints, thereby requiring increased
levels of physical fitness to support the activity. Without it, a breakdown is sure
to occur.
COMMON INJURIES THAT AFFECT TRAINEES IN DRILL CLASSES:
The following are some of the common injuries that affect trainees, which may
develop during the Drill training classes:
(a) Tendonitis
Tendonitis is a nagging ever-present injury, commonly sustained during
Drill classes that, once developed, never seem to go away. The injury sustained
in a drill class is very often aggravated by other rigorous training activities.
Tendonitis produces a dull ache or sometimes-sharp piercing pain that persists
with most any movement of the specific joint. The type of pain is directly related
to the severity of the injury. Many trainee experience tendonitis once or more
during their basic training. It can develop in the knee, shoulder, wrist, and more
commonly the elbow joint. These are the most active of all joints that sustain
large amounts of stress while performing drill - persistent stamping of the feet
etc. Some cases are more severe and require greater amounts of treatment, therapy,
and recovery. Others demand proper attention of the injured individual
implementing various assistive healing measures (those which only assist the
healing process). No matter what the specific degree or extent of the injury,
tendonitis is both painful and debilitating.
Factors Affecting the Development of Tendonitis
Several factors contribute Tendonitis. The presence of these factors does not
necessarily cause the problem itself, but rather amplify the risk of developing or
promoting the injury. The following are some of the factors for the cause of this
type of injury during drill classes:
1) Poor Mechanics - A forced or unnatural release of the arms or the legs
places excessive stress on the wrist, elbow, and shoulder joint. The body
may not immediately respond to these undue stresses, but give it time; it
will sooner or later relay the message to the trainee.
2) High Repetition - High repetition of some drill movements requiring frequent
stamping of the feet.
3) Poor Physical Condition - Weak stiff muscles and joints accelerate risk.
Joint mobility, flexibility, and range of motion are terms used in the exercise
community to describe the amount of elasticity or pliability of a given joint
or set of muscles. A lack of strength and flexibility in a joint most certainly
increases the risk of injury. Stiff weak joints are highly susceptible to the
cumulative stress of our sport.

33
4) Poor shoe fit - a stretched span or improper fit will often strain the tendons
of the legs .
(b) Stress Fracture of the Foot
A stress fracture is an overuse injury. It occurs when muscles become fatigued
and are unable to absorb shock and repeated impacts. Over time the fatigued
muscle transfers this stress to the bone, resulting in a small crack (a stress fracture).
Cause of Stress Fracture
Stress fractures often are the result of overuse or repeated impacts on a hard
surface. Increasing the amount or intensity of an activity too rapidly is a common
cause of a stress fracture, as is using improper equipment. The usual mechanical
factors seen are an imbalance between the posterior and anterior muscle groups.
The posterior muscles may be both too tight and too strong. The effect of too
tight posterior musculature has ramifications for the gait cycle at two points. The
first time in which too tight posterior muscles have an impact on the anterior
muscles is just before and after foot contact (heel during Drill movements). At
this time the anterior muscles (anterior tibialis, extensor digitorum longus, extensor
hallucis longus) are functioning to slow up the forward and downward
(plantarflexion) of the foot. They are acting as decelerators. If the posterior muscles
are too tight they will force the anterior muscles to work longer and harder in this
decleration. The second point in the gait cycle where the anterior muscles may
work too hard is when the foot leaves the ground, at march off. The anterior
muscles should be lifting up, or dorsiflexing, the foot as this time, so that the toes
will clear the ground as the leg is brought forward. If the posterior muscles are
too tight, the anterior muscles again will be working harder than they should be.
Repetitive impact on hard surfaces is another frequently associated factor.
Excessive pronation may be a minor factor, but it is a much greater factor in the
medial tibial stress syndrome (medial shin splints).
Key Causes and Solutions
The key factors to correct will be:
z Tight posterior muscles
z Imbalance between the posterior and anterior muscles
z Stamping on concrete or other hard surfaces
z Improper Shoes - inadequate shock protection
z Overtraining
(c) Specific Problems Related to Drill Shoe Design Flaw
Achilles Tendonitis Shoes that have inflexible soles cause the calf muscles
to work harder and can contribute to the development of achilles tendonitis. The
mechanical reason for this is that the looking at the Drill shoe and leg as a fulcrum

34
and lever system, they make the lever arm function over a longer distance and
make the tip of the shoe the location of the fulcrum. The Drill shoe should flex at
the point where the toes join the foot, which also happens to be the widest part of
the shoe. The shoe should also have a slight heel lift, which most Drill boots do.
Shoes that have too much heel cushioning, including some of the air-
cushioned models can also contribute to achilles tendonitis. After the heel strikes
the ground, it continues moving, as the shoe's cushioning continues to absorbs
shock. This continued motion can stretch a susceptible achilles tendon excessively.
Plantar Fasciitis Shoes that are too flexible in the midsole or that flex before
the point at which the toes join the foot result in forces that can both directly
cause a stretch in the plantar fascia and contribute to excess pronation in the foot
(sublatalar joint). The lack of stability that exists in a shoe with this characteristic
occurs not just at the transverse plane of the shoe where the shoe actually flexes,
but also in a longitudinal plane, reducing the effectiveness of the shoe in controlling
pronation.
(d) Heat Related Injuries
Heat exhaustion is very common during Drill Classes in places with very
warm climates. There is, therefore, a need for the Police and Para Militray Training
centres to have a comprehensive heat injury prevention capsule which should
include Heat Stress Control and Heat Casualty Management , which covers all
aspects of heat injury prevention. Heat mitigation procedures include identifying
high-risk individuals, heat acclimatization, fluid and electrolyte replacement, work/
rest guidelines, management of heat casualties, and vigilance. Early recognition
of heat exhaustion is critical to prevent progression to more serious heat injury
and death. Fresh recruits, especially those from cool climates, are more at risk of
becoming a heat casualty when exposed to hot weather and not properly heat
acclimatized.
Three variables interact to cause a heat injury: (1) climate (temperature and
humidity), (2) intensity of activity and (3) individual risk factors. Individual risk
factors include: lack of heat acclimatization, cumulative exposure to heat, poor
physical fitness, overweight, concurrent illness, medications/ alcohol use, prior
history of heat injury, skin disorders, and age older than 40.
Prevention
Prevention is the best injury management procedure to implement. It is the initial
days of training in which the trainees are prone to some of the injuries mentioned
above. Very often, trainees are afraid of revealing their injuries for fear of being
reprimanded. There is, therefore need for a Drill Instructor to be able to screen
those trainees whose injuries need attention.
Injury Management
Injuries lead to damage to soft tissues (muscle,tendons, ligaments, capsules,

35
fascia and skin). This results in an abnormal fluid build-up, which is visible as
swelling. The increased pressure caused by swelling can inhibit healing and cause
pain and muscle spasm. An effective way of reducing the amount of bleeding at
the site of injuries such as muscle strains, ligament sprains and bruises is to apply
the R.I.C.E.D. procedure and avoid H.A.R.M-ful factors.
† Rest minimises further damage. Avoid as much movement of the injured
part as possible.
† Ice is an effective way to reduce pain and spasm and minimise the swelling
caused by bleeding.
† Compression helps to reduce bleeding and swelling.It decreases the blood
flow by applying pressure to the blood vessels close to the injury site. Care
must be taken to ensure bandaging is not so tight that it cuts off circulation.
† Elevation of the injured area above the level of the heart will reduce the
blood supply that it receives and swelling will be reduced.
† Diagnosis. If the pain or swelling has not gone down significantly within
48 hours, there is need that the trainee must be referred for medical aid
from a qualified Physician.
Avoid the following H.A.R.M-ful factors within the first72 hours after an injury:[4]
† Heat increases the bleeding within the injured tissues.Hot baths and showers,
saunas, hot water bottles, heat packs and liniments should be avoided.
† Alcohol should not be consumed as it increases the bleeding and swelling
around soft tissue injuries.
Repair and regeneration of tissues and rehabilitation of injuries can only
begin after the swelling has disappeared. Increased bleeding and swelling
consequently lengthens recovery time. Alcohol masks the pain of an injury;
† Running, Drill classes or exercise of the injured part can cause further
damage and increase the severity of acute injury. Activity should not be
resumed within 72 hours unless approved by a medical professional
† Massage causes an increase in bleeding and swelling and should be avoided
in the initial stages of an injury.
Professional Advice and Rehabilitation
Advice from medical professionals on the effective treatment and
rehabilitation of injuries is beneficial and should be used. Doctors, physiotherapists
and rehabilitation experts are skilled and experienced in sports injury and care
and can help make the recovery process as effective as possible.
Rehabilitation is the restoration of an injured person to the level of physical
function they had before the injury. A thorough rehabilitation process is important

36
because it decreases the risk of future/recurrent injury. Rehabilitation aims to
first restore the functional abilities (strength,flexibility, endurance, speed,
proprioception) and then restore the Drill -specific abilities (e.g. Quick march,
swinging of arms, stamping of feet). Regaining confidence to return to the normal
Drill classes should also be part of the rehabilitation process. These psychological
factors may need to be addressed specifically.
Shoe Wearing & Selection Tips
A shoe's sole lasts according to the use it is put on. It degrades from use and
the resultant useful life of a Drill Boots depends on the nature of Drill training as
well as on the other uses the Boots are put to.(Route marches/Weapon Training
etc). A trainee will, accordingly have to decide when to change the Drill Boots -
as the requirements from a Drill Boot, in terms of its outside appearances, is
much more than what is required for other aspects of training. The old shoe may
still serve a useful purpose - weapon training,route marches etc. There should be
a shock liner inner sole - which designed to be comfortable and cushy in the
initial stages of wear after which it loses shock absorption capacity quickly.
z Sole wear does not necessarily reflect the loss of shock absorption by a
shoe. Even with a new looking shoe, adequate shock absorption may be
lacking.
z Length:
† It should be made sure that there is about a finger's width at the front
of the shoe being provided to a trainee. This will help prevent (black)
toe. The shape and depth of the front of the shoe also have an effect
on this problem.
† The shoes should be checked for size by the trainee at the end of the
day, when his/her feet are somewhat larger from the day's walking.
z Width:
† The widest part of the shoe should be at the widest part of the trainee's
foot.
z If the trainee has had no problems while using a shoe, in the first two weeks,
it can be presumed that his/her shoes are comfortable.
z New shoes are provided before a Ceremonial Occasion., Don't provide the
shoes just before the event - it should be provided much earlier so that the
trainee can make the shoes comfortable by periodical wear.
z Lacing:
† Make sure that the trainee carefully laces his/her shoes before the
commencement of the Drill class. Too tight a shoe may make parts of

37
 the top of the foot sore or squeeze the trainee's metatarsals too tightly.
Too lose a shoe may make the trainee's foot move excessively and be
less stable, resulting in more than normal pronation.
Shoe Wear - What Can It Tell You?
Shoe wear is often taken to hold much meaning. While it may tell you much,
there is much ambiguity present also. It will be useful to examine a foot and
watch the gait of a trainee. It will tell more about how the shoes will wear, than
examining the shoes will tell you about either the feet or his gait. One of the
things to look for is asymmetry in wear. This will reflect asymmetry of function.
There may be a leg length difference, one foot may pronate more than the other,
muscles may be tighter or weaker on one side, or a rotational deformity may be
present.
Sole Wear
Outer Heel - Rearfoot striker. The point of initial contact with the ground is
usually the place showing the most wear. This could be normal wear. Most people
have wear here. This can occur with a slight outtoe and the increase in the various
foot position that occurs in drill movements because of the narrower base of gait
(the distance from the midline that the foot strikes the ground).
Inner Heel Rearfoot Striker. Possibly in-toe gait, which would make this area
the initial point of contact with the ground. Could also be severe pronation, if the
heel counter is bent inward and the medial part of much of the sole shoes wear.
The best way to tell is really looking at the foot in addition to the shoe.
Forefoot Wear
Much forefoot wear and little heel wear, usually indicates forefoot strike. Uneven
wear, or wear below a second or third metatarsal area may indicate a Morton's
foot (short first metatarsal) and excess pronation. The indicated metatarsal may
be at higher risk for a stress fracture.
Middle of the Sole
Lateral sole wear in general, may reflect a high arch, excessively supinating foot.
Medial sole wear, with a bent counter and a medial shift of the upper, probably
indicates severe excessive pronation.
Heel Counter
The heel counter may be bent inward with excessive pronation and tilted to the
outside by a high arched foot.
Upper
The upper may likewise tilt inward with a hyperpronating foot and tilt outward
with a supinated (under pronating) foot. It may exhibit holes by the toes, or by the

38
big toe alone. This means it may be too shallow or too short at the front of the
foot. There should be a fingers width at the front of the shoe in front of the toes.
If the toes make a big bump in the shoe less than 1/2 inch from the tip of the shoe,
the shoe is probably too short.
How to ensure correct Fit of the drill boots
• Make sure that the trainee is provided good quality shoes to be worn during
Drill Classes;.
• Sock thickness affects the fit of the shoe. Make sure the trainee wears the
same socks he/she intends to wear while choosing a new pair of Drill
Boots.
• Be fit for the shoe late in the day. The foot expands later in the day after
bearing weight.
• Make certain that the trainee wears the shoe to see how the shoe feels when
he/she is moving.
• The trainee should choose a shoe that feels comfortable; it won't feel better
in a week, if it doesn't feel good when it is purchased.
Some guidelines for fabrication/selection of drill boots
Very often a trainee may have peculiar features in his feet which need attention to
prevent injuries. The following are some of the examples:
a) Low Arch - Needs much support. Stable shoe needed with good rearfoot
control.
b) High Arch - Needs more shock absorption. Better with a narrower heel A
wide heel may make the rear foot, which in a high arched foot, may be
restricted in inversion and aversion, move too much and too fast at heel
contact.
c) Normal Foot - Probably best with a combination of control and shock
absorption.
d) Post Stress Fracture - Don't forget to get a shoe with adequate shock
absorption.
e) Achilles Tendinitis - See above discussion. Use a heel lift. Avoid shoes that
are too stiff in the sole. It should bend where the toes attach to the foot.

39
 CHAPTER VII
CONDUCT IN UNIFORM
Introduction
Most people can identify a police officer by the official police uniform.
When citizens on a busy street are in need of help, they scan the crowds of
pedestrians looking for the distinctive uniform of a police officer. Drivers who
come to an intersection occupied by a person in a police uniform usually willingly
submit to that person's hand directions. Criminals usually curb their unlawful
behaviour when they spot a uniformed police officer in the area. Many parents
teach their children to respect and trust a person in the police uniform. Police
academy recruits relish the day when they may finally wear their official police
uniforms. What is so special about a uniform which is often made of cheap
polyester and is usually hot and uncomfortable to wear?
The crisp uniform of the police officer conveys power and authority. When a
police officer puts on his or her uniform the officer is perceived in a very different
way by the public. He or she is viewed as embodying each person's stereotypes
about all police officers. Research has suggested that clothing has a powerful impact
on bow people are perceived, and this goes for the police officer as well. The uniform
of a police officer has been found to have a profound psychological impact on
those who view it. Research has also suggested that even slight alterations to the
style of the uniform will change how citizens will perceive the officer.
The police uniform is a tradition as old as the field of law enforcement
itself. In 1829 the first modern police force, the London Metropolitan Police,
developed the first standard police apparel. These first police officers, the famous
"Bobbies" of London, were issued a dark blue, paramilitary-style uniform.. The
color blue was chosen to distinguish the police from the British military who
wore red and white uniforms at the time. The first official police force in the
United States was established in the city of New York in 1845. Based on the
London police, the New York City Police Department adopted the dark blue
uniform in 1853, Other cities, such as Philadelphia, Boston, Cincinnati, Cleveland,
Buffalo, and Detroit quickly followed suit by establishing police departments
based on the London model, including the adoption of the dark blue, paramilitary-
style uniform.
Therefore, while in uniform all police personnel are expected to maintain a
very high standard of smartness and discipline. Unless an officer is smartly turned
out and well-disciplined and knows how to conduct himself, while in uniform, he
cannot command respect from his subordinates. Nor can he tick them off for
lapses. It is, therefore, most essential that all officers should learn and practice
good turn-out and correct manner of paying and receiving compliments while in
uniform.

40
Turn-Out
2. Good turn-out, while in uniform, is the basic essential of discipline. Turn-out
reflects one's personality. All officers should take pride in good turn-out of their
own while in uniform at all times. Uniform of the correct regulation pattern should
be worn properly and at no time should the officers appear outside their rooms
/ quarters partially dressed in uniform and partially in civilian clothes. A
clothing item worn must be very clean and correctly pressed and also correctly
put on.
3. The following points should be remembered on good turn-out :-
(a) Head dress
(i) It should be of the regulation p a t t e r n and should be
correctly fitting; in case of the beret, it should be drawn well to
the right side and should cover up to half of right ear.
(ii) It should be clean and free from sweat and hair grease.
(iii) It should be worn properly.
(iv) The hair should be cut short, to moderate length.
(b) Face
Clean shaven. A gentleman will shave every day. (Sikh officers should
keep their beard and moustaches well groomed).
(c) Shirts
(i) Should be well-fitting and properly tucked in, with all gathers at
the sides.
(ii) Should be well cleaned and ironed and sleeves properly rolled if
wearing a long sleeve shirt.
(iii) Buttons should be intact and not broken, and fastened properly.
(iv) Badges of rank should be clean and worn properly.
(v) No ends of cotton from the stitching should be allowed to appear.
(vi) Lanyard and the whistle should be worn properly.
(d) Belt
(i) Should be tight-fitting.
(ii) The buckle should be central to the front and in line with the
clothing buttons. In case of web belts the brass loops should be
at a distance of one inch from the buckle on either side.
(iii) The brass/silver fittings in the belt should be well polished.
(iv) If wearing web belt the back loop of the trousers should be
centrally located between the two hooks of the belt.
(v) Web belts should be properly polished and the leather brown
belts polished neatly.
41
 (e) Trousers
(i) Should be of regulation pattern and well-fitting specially at the
waist. The bottom should neither be too tight nor too loose.
(ii) Should be well cleaned and ironed.
(iii) The loops for the belts should be of proper size and fastened by
buttons with the belt through the same.
(f) Socks
(i) Should be pulled fully up.
(ii) If elastic tops are not provided in the socks or if the elastic gives
way, elastic suspender may be used.
(iii) Under no circumstances should torn socks be worn.
(g) Shoes
(i) These should be of regulation pattern and in a good state. Laces
should be strong and not twisted or knotted. These should be
done up tight so as to close the lace holes and flap.
(ii) Should be neatly polished.
(iii) The soles should be in good repair.
Compliments
4. Each and every officer must understand the importance of salute. It is a
method of greeting a superior and not a servile act. It is an outward sign of
the inward spirit of discipline and respect for superiors. The general tone
and feeling in a Police force is indicated as much by the manner in which
the men salute and the officers return the salute as by any other action.
5. A salute is, in fact, the normal greeting between comrades in arms. That a
salute is given when a subordinate meets a superior officer is a basic matter
of discipline. That the salute is properly and smartly given is a matter of
training. That the salute is promptly and properly returned is a matter of
duty. Failure to salute or to return a salute shows disrespect and a low
standard of discipline. Failure by the officer in uniform to insist on being
saluted is also a breach of discipline.
6. Salutes should be given in the following manner:-
(a) With Head Dress on
(i) White reporting to a senior officer: While reporting to a senior
officer for some verbal communication, march to the officer
smartly, halt at a distance of two paces from the officer and salute.
After the communication, salute again, turn about and march
off.

42
 If reporting to a superior officer for handing over or taking over
something, take a step forward after the salute and hand over/
take over the thing, after which take a step back, salute, turn
about and march off.
(ii) While passing a superior officer: While passing a superior officer,
salute should be given to the flank. Salute should begin from a
distance of about three paces from the officer. The head should
be turned to the officer while saluting.
(iv) When approached by a superior officer: When a superior officer
approaches, one should come to attention facing the officer and
salute. If a group of officers in some disciplined formation are
present in one place, the senior-most will face the senior officer
and call the whole to attention and he alone will salute.
(b) Saluting when without head-dress and when wearing plain clothes
(i) When reporting to an officer, march to the officer and halt smartly
in attention position only.
(ii) When passing a superior officer, cut both the hands the sides and
turn the head and eyes to the flank. Do no salute by hand.
(iii) When spoken to by a senior officer stand to attention.
(iv) When passed by an officer stand to attention. If two or more
persons are present in a disciplined formation in one place, the
senior-most will call the whole to attention.
(v) When in plain clothes, if wearing a western head dress, remove
the same well clear off the head and come to attention facing the
officer.
General
7. (a) When reporting to a senior officer for the first time inside his office
room, do not go without head dress. Report t o the superior officer
with the head dress on and salute as indicated above. For the second
or subsequent time the head dress may not be used inside the office.
(b) When going out of any building, do not go without the head dress on.
(c) When inside the office room of a superior officer if asked to sit down,
remove the head dress and then sit down, especially when using a
peak cap. After removing the cap do not keep it on the desk of the
superior officer. Keep it on the lap or on a chair etc., available nearby.
Before taking leave from the officer, again put on the cap, salute and
take leave.
(d) When entering into the Mess lounge or dining room remove the head
dress and hang it on the rack provided at the entrance.

43
 (e) While sitting in one's own office or anywhere the head dress should
be removed.
(f) Officers will receive and return a salute with the courtesy it deserves.
When two or more officers are present the senior will return the salute.
(g) When riding a horse with both hands on the reins, give an eyes right
or left without moving the hands. When holding the reins with only
one hand, give a salute by the right hand.
(h) When driving a Motor vehicle (including a motor cycle), do not salute
but when the vehicle is stationary, salute the superior officer in the
usual manner while sitting in the driver's seat.
(i) When in uniform the ladies are to be greeted in the usual manner or
paying compliment i.e., if wearing a head dress by saluting and not
doing 'namaste' and if not, by coming to attention.
(j) Where through physical incapacity, a salute with the right hand is
impossible, the salute will be given with the left hand.
Dress Regulations
All ranks must ensure that they are conversant with the instructions on the
dresses/Uniforms given as follows and they comply with Dress Regulations: -
a) Officers will ensure that they are in possession of all types of Uniforms.
b) The Supdt. Of Police/Commandant will ensure that all ranks (less
Officers) under their command are issued prescribed uniforms.
c) While in uniform, no un-authorised ornament or emblem is to be worn.
The wearing of signet ring is made permissible.
d) Personnel, who are to keep beard, are not permitted to tie thatha on
their beards when in Uniform while on duty or when appearing in
public.
e) Personnel on leave must be in possession of the Uniform articles,
permitted for carrying with them while proceeding on leave to meet
the necessity arising for them to do the same for many official purposes.
f) Occasions when uniform is required to be worn: -
i) While on duty
ii) While travelling in service transport
iii) When doing courier or escort duties
iv) While travelling with troops
v) While attending ceremonial functions
vi) Any form of Uniform other than the prescribed
uniform will not be worn.

44
 Note: When in uniform, the head gear will be worn except in mess,
conferences, class rooms or while attending meeting etc.
g) When dancing in restaurant, Hotels or other public places (except
when attending Regimental/Official/Social functions), Civil or Clubs,
uniform will not be worn.
h) Walking/Going out for shopping in uniform should invariably be
avoided and discouraged except when individual / group is going for
official purposes.
i) Officers may be dressed in plain clothes: -
i) When going or coming back from organised games and other
recreational activities, whether as participants or spectators.
ii) When the transport is hired by the officers for amenity purposes.
iii) When attending office in the afternoon or on holidays or other
specified weekdays at the discretion of Supdt. Of Police/
Commandant or other Superior Officer.
iv) When travelling on duty in any public or private conveyance.
j) An officer, while receiving the President and Head of a State or Senior
Officers in an area other than field/operational area, will be dressed
in ceremonial dress. All other civil dignitaries can be received in normal
working dress with Peak Cap/Black Pagri except for any ceremonial
occasions or when specially ordered.
k) Coat Parka/Short Great Coat/Great Coat may be worn while travelling
in open vehicle or riding motorcycle/ scooter.
l) Ceremonial dress will be worn on State ceremonial occasions or
Investitures, Independence Day ceremonies, Republic Day Parade,
Beating of the Retreat Army/CPO/CPMF Parades, Visit to President/
Governor House or any occasions specifically notified as such.
m) Serving Officers will not wear miniature medals with civilian dresses.
n) Sword will be carried by the following only: -
i) Commanders and other supernumeraries of Guard of Honour.
ii) Parade Commanders at Colours Presentation Parade.
iii) Commanders and other supernumeraries of Contingents
participating in BSF Day, Republic Day Parade and Presentation
Parades.
iv) Adjutant or the CDI during the passing out parades at Academy
or other Training institutions.
v) All Supernumerary Appointments during the passing out parade

45
 at the Correctional Training Institute or such other locations where
the parade is held;.
Note: - The Reviewing Officers may carry a Sword.
Types of Dresses
The type of dress to be worn on different occasions will be described in
orders issued by the Inspector General of Correctional Services.
Civil Dress
Civil dresses to be worn by Officers are given below: -
(a) Normal
(i) National Dress: - Black Achkan with white Churidar Pyjama or
Cream Achkan with Cream Churidar Pyjama or Cream Short
buttoned up Coat (Jodhpuri) with Cream trousers or Black Short
buttoned up Coat (Jodhpuri) with White Trousers.
(ii) Trousers and closed collar tunic (Jodhpur).
(iii) Dinner Jacket.
(b) Formal
(i) Lounge Suit.
(ii) Black Trousers, Full sleeves White Shirt (open collar).
(c) Casual
(i) Combination Suits.
(ii) Trousers and bush-shirt or shirt tucked in with or without tie.
(iii) Safari Suit.
Note: - Chappals will not be worn with civilian dresses when
these dresses are worn on duty or in any organised social function.
Details of Dress Items
The details of the dress items vary from force to force. However some of
the common features of a uniform is given below:
Specifications of Major Items of Dress
The types of head dress to be worn are given as under:-
(a) Ceremonial Head Dress
(i) Non Sikh personnel Officers - Peak Cap
(ii) Sikh Personnel Officers - Khaki Pagri or color as prescribed
(b) With working dress
Pagri or specified color or Beret Cap with Badge.
(c) Training and Field Service (Including Operational Environment)
(i) Non Sikh Officers - Jungle Hat/Monkey Cap Helmet - steel/fiber.
(ii) Sikh Personnel - Pagri with camouflage nets.

46
Dimension of Crown and other details of Beret
Size No. Measurement in Centimetres Depth of level to seam
on ribbon binding all round Diameter of
Internal Crown Circumferences
6. 48.5 23.5
6¼ 50.5 24
6½ 52.5 25
6¾ 54.5 25.5
7 56.5 26.5 Cms
7¼ 58.5 26.5
7½ 60.5 27.5
7¾ 62.5 28
8 64.5 28.5
Specifications of Peak Cap
1. The specifications of Peak Cap are given below: -
(a) Crowns: - The overhand of the crown on the two sides will be 5 Cms,
in front 6 Cms and at the back 4 Cms. The height of the top of the
crown in the front from the base of the headband level will be 11
Cms. There will be two ventilation holes 1.5 Cms apart on both sides.
The ventilation holes will be as near as possible to the headband level.
(b) Chin Strap: - For Comdt and above, the chin strap will be made of
black patent leather. The width of the chin strap will be 1.9 Cms. The
ends of the chin strap will be fixed with two minature buttons. The
buttons on both sides of the Peak Cap will be fixed to the head hand
level 1.5 Cms from the end of the peak.
(c) Peak: - The peak will be set at an angle of 20 degrees to the horizontal
and will have a compressed fibre interlining. The width of the peak at
the centre will be 6.5 Cms. The peak will also be covered with Khaki
barathea, serge.
(d) Headband bevel: - The width of the headband bevel will be 5 Cms all
round. The thickness of the headband bevel will be 0.5 Cms.
2. All work of Zari on the Peak Cap will be done in white color Zari where
authorised.

47
 Appendix 'C'
SHOULDER WEAR
1. Embroidered Shoulder titles will have the letters as specified in orders,
Shoulder Title - half inch in height and shall be worn at the base of the
shoulder strap. Embroidered shoulder titles may be worn alongwith the
embroidered badges of rank when wearing informal working dress at the
time of operations and such other duties.
2. Badges of rank - White metal, the State emblem to be 5/32 by ¾ inches.
The stars to be of the 'Star of India’ five pointed pattern and 1 inch broad
Badges of rank to be worn by an Officer should be related to the rank that
he actually holds either substantively or in an officiating capacity in the
IPS.
Note: No back ground material will be used under the Cap Badge
Note: Gorget patches by Commandant and above Collar Dogs with
Flash backing as authorised.

NECK WEAR
Scarfs
1. Scarfs of pattern approved by the Competent Authority may be worn with
Dress. All ranks participating as members of contingent in Republic Day
Parade, Investiture Parades and Guards of Honour, if in Ceremonial will
wear scarf of prescribed Patterns. Personnel of ceremonial and quarter guards
and stick orderlies may also wear such Scarfs.
Gorget Patches and Collar Dogs
2. Officers of the rank of Supdt. Of Police/Commandant and above, as per the
prescribed rules will wear gorget patches of size and specification as under -
a) Dress with which to be worn
i) Shirt Terrycot Khaki (summer)
ii) Shirt Angola Drab (Winter)
iii) Service Dress
b) Gorget patches worn with Shirts: - The inner edge will be 4 Cms long
and the outer edge 4.5 Cms long. The width will be 3 Cms. The top of
the gorget patch will be made pointed by adding an isosceles triangle
of sides 2.5 Cms to the dimensions given above. The bottom edge of
the gorget patches will be slightly slanted because of the variations
between the inner and the outer lengths so that it conforms to the cut
of the shirt collar. Gorget patches will be clipped on the collar with
the metal clip going under the collar or fixed with Velcro. Gorget

48
 patches will be worn on the collars in such a way that the shorter
inner edge is in line with the fold of the collar.
c) Description: - A metal miniature button, will be in the middle of the
triangle at the pointed end. The button will be of IPS pattern for
Commandants and above. The design of the embellishment on the
gorget patches will be Single Strip of White Zari for Supdts of Police/
Commandants, Addl DIsG and DIsG. The design of the embellishment
on gorget patches for Inspectors General of Police and above will be
an Oak Leaf to two leaves.
Medals and Medal Ribons
a) Description and method of Wearing: the medals will be fixed on a
piece of hard buckram or metal plate covered with scarlet lining. The
size and method of wearing full medals are as under: -
i) Horizontal dimension of the backing will be a maximum of 20
Cms (though where possible it should be restricted to 15 Cms)
and the vertical dimension 7.5 Cms
ii) The vertical length of the medal ribbon upto the top of the medal
will be 4 to 4.5 Cms and at the back of the medal it should cover
the whole of the backing i.e. 7.5 Cms The medals will be so
stitched that half the medal hangs out side the backing and all
medals are uniformly dressed in line at the bottom.
iii) When the medals can not, on account of their numbers, be stitched
on so as to be fully visible, they will overlap from right to left so
that the senior most decoration or medal is full visible.
iv) Full medals will be worn over the left pocket of the shirt or tunic
so that the bottom edges of the medals fall in line just above the
top of the pocket flap button.
v) The medals will be worn so that the backing is symmetrical on
either side of a vertical line drawn through the middle of the
pocket button.
vi) The backing will be affixed to the shirt or tunic with Velcro and
supported at the top by a hinged metal bar fixed to the backing,
the bar running through threat loops on the shirt or tunic and
fastened to the backing with a hook.
b) Occasions for wearing: Full medals will be worn on all ceremonial
occasions with shirt terrycot Khaki. They will also be worn with mess
dress while attending Official functions at Rashtrapati Bhawan, Raj
Bhawans, Raj Niwas and formal receptions at the residence of the all
CPOs chiefs.

49
Miniature Medals
a) Description and method of wearing. Miniature medals will be fixed
on a piece of hard buckram covered with scarlet lining. The size and
method of wearing miniature medals are as under: -
i) Horizontal dimension of the backing will be a maximum of 17
Cms (though where possible it should be restricted to 15 cms)
and the vertical dimension 4.5 cms
ii) The vertical length of the medal ribbon will be 3.5 to 4 Cm upto
the top of the medal. At the back of the medal to cover the whole
backing it would be 4.5 Cm. The medals will be so stitched that
half the medals hang out side the backing and all medals are
uniformly dressed in line at the bottom.
iii) When the miniature medals cannot, on account of their numbers,
be affixed so as to be fully visible they will overlap from right to
left so that the senior most decoration or medal is fully visible.
Miniature medals will be worn over the left pocket of winter or
summer mess dress jackets so that the bottom edge of the medals
fall in line with the top edge of the pocket.
iii) The medals will be worn so that the backing is symmetrical on
either side of the vertical line drawn through the middle of the
pocket button.
b) Occasions for wearing Miniature Medals: With mess jackets, summer
and winter between retreat and reveille.
Medals Ribands
a) Description and Method of Wearing. Medal ribands will be mounted
on a flat bar -
i) Each medal riband will be fully visible. There will be no overlap.
ii) The vertical dimension of the visible portion of each riband will
be 1.3 Cms
iii) A maximum of four medal ribands will be worn in each row.
When larger numbers are authorised they will be worn in two or
more rows.
iv) The shorter row will be worn upper most and displaced
symmetrically on either side of the centre of the longer row.
iv) Except when only one medal riband is authorised, a single medal
riband will never be worn as a row. Where necessary, the top
two rows will be adjusted that the top row has two medal ribands
and the one below has three medal ribands.

50
 v) Ribands will be worn in order of their precedence, with the one
having the highest precedence being worn at the right extreme
of the top row, and the one with the lowest precedence worn at
the left extreme of the bottom row.
vi) Plastic medal ribands will not be worn. Backing underneath the
ribands to give them a curbed appearance will not be used.
Ribands will not be encased in transparent plastic material.
b) Occasions when worn: - On all occasions when wearing uniform,
except when wearing the following:
i) Over Garments (Great Coat, Short Great Coat, Coat Parka, Smock
Denimson or Jersey Pullover
ii) Field Service Marching Order
iii) Full Medals or miniature medals
Buttons
1. Buttons to be used on various types of dresses are given in the succeeding
paragraphs.
2. Terrycott Uniform Khaki: Ordinary Khaki Bone or Plastic Buttons.
3. Shirt Angola Drab: - On these, buttons of two sizes will be used. The details
are as under :
i) On the Front: 2.5 Cms in diameter
ii) On Pocket Flaps: 1.5 Cms in diameter Epaulettes and Cuffs
4. Buttons on Peak Caps and Gorget Patches: - White metal buttons of size 1.2
Cms.
5. Designation of Button: - the three sizes of the buttons mentioned in this
Appendix will be designed as under: -
a) 2.5 Cms button - Large
b) 1.5 Cms button - Small
c) 1.2 Cms buttons - Miniature
Name Tabs and Special Insignia
1. Name Tabs: - Will be worn above the right breast pocket symmetrically on
either side of a vertical line running through the pocket button. They will be
worn on all dresses.
2. The design, material, size of lettering and attaching system of name tabs
other than one worn with the combat dress will be as under: -
a) Colour - Black background with white letters inscribed in script as

51
 Prescribed by the Competent Authority on top and in
Roman below
b) Material - L a m i n a t e d sheet of plastic
material c) Size - Length - 80 mm
Width - 17 mm
Thickness - 1.5 mm
d) Size of - .53 Cms X 40 Cms (Square type) in block letters and capital
letters.
e) Attaching- They will be affixed to the garment using system press
buttons, Velcro or a metal bar with hook running through
small button holes. They will not be worn through thread
loops.
3. Only initials and surnames without rank will be engraved. There will be no
full stops between the initials and the surname in name tabs. Surnames will
follow the initials.
5. Special Insignia
a) Commando Badge: Will be worn by entitled personnel in the centre
of the right breast pocket of the Shirt T/C or Shirt angola drab or tunic
b) Other Types of Supposedly Commemorative Badges: These will not
be worn on any uniform
WAIST WEAR
1. Leather Belt
a) Officers: - A leather belt with the Unit Crested buckle will be worn by
all officers with Dress Nos. 1, 2 and 4. T Plastic coating/cover will
not be used with these belts.
c) Belt Buckle: - It will be of size 8 Cms horizontally and 6 Cms vertically
and made of polished or dulled metal. It will be affixed with
Organisation crest as currently authorised.
2. Cross Belt i.e. Pouch Belt : - Cross Belt i.e. Pouch Belt is authorised to
officers only and will be worn with mess dresses or winter ceremonial dress
when taking part in or while witnessing parades.
3. Web Belt : Web belt will be worn while on field service or during training.
4. Bayonet Frog
a) By troops, when authorised to wear black leather belt. Leather bayonet
frogs will also be black in colour.
b) Bayonet Frog Web: When wearing belts web during field service and
training.

52
5. Cummerbund
a) All Ranks will be wearing taking part in Republic Day, Investiture
Parades, and Guard of Honour. It may also be worn by quarter guards,
ceremonial guards, in peace areas and stick orderlies. Black leather
belt with crested buckles will be worn on top of Cummerbands on all
such occasions.
FOOT WEAR
1. Boot Ankle or Boots DMS (Double Moulded Shoe). These Boots will be
worn by all ranks as authorised. Details are as under: -
a) Color : Black/Brown
b) Design : Ordnance
c) Occasions for wearing : Officers when on parade, training
or on exercise with all ranks.
2. Shoes
a) Color : Black
b) Type : Oxford Type/ Plain Toe
3. Socks
i) Officers : Socks Khaki woollen or Nylon
or colour as prescribed for the
4. Spats unit

a) Description : To be of white
colour b) Occasions for wearing
i) Officers : When acting as contingent commanders and
supernumeraries during guards of honour, Republic Day,
Colour Presentation and Investiture Parades.

53
 CHAPTER VIII
MEDALS AND MEDAL RIBBONS
There is certain aura of mystery and fascination attached to the Medal ribbons
and medals worn on the uniform by the officers and men of the armed forces.
People usually associate them with some war of distinction bestowed on them,
but comparatively only a few can distinguish between the different medals and
medal ribbons by just looking at them.
Most of them have their distinctive colourings and stripes and though it is
true that some medals are awarded in time of peace, a complete summary of a
man's career can often be obtained by observing the medals and medal ribbons
on a uniform.
For the Officers and men of the Police and the Para Military Forces, medals
have a peculiar fascination. They take great pride in having won them, often at a
great personal risk and wear them to show the distinction bestowed on them for
their gallant deeds. Medals for gallantry in action are always won at a great risk
to life in the face of action by enemy terrorists and other anti national elements
and a policeman feels rewarded if he finds recognition and appreciation for his
deeds. In fact there is nothing more precious to police personnel than his medals
which he displays proudly on ceremonial occasions.
Bravery and self-sacrifice in the battle have always been regarded as the
highest qualities of service personnel. They are taught and trained to accept
hardship, risk, injury and even death as a normal hazard of their profession. A
policeman considers bravery as part of his duty. There are some police men who
have urge to go beyond the call of duty regardless of the consequences, in response
to some inner challenge.
Gallantry has always commanded respect and attention. In the primitive
societies the leadership of the clan or the tribe fell upon the bravest. The origin of
the state saw the brave elevated to kingship, Indra, the most distinguished of the
brave warriors among the Indo-Aryans, became a king and a Commander. In the
Vedic age, soldiers were rewarded with a share in the spoils of war. In the epic
age, with philosophical and religious achievements, emphasis came to be laid
upon the heavenly rewards, During as a martyr in the cause of "Dharma" was a
meritorious way to heaven. In the Mahabharata war, Lord Krishna had exhorted
Arjuna to fight since in the event of death in a battle one achieved heaven, and in
case of success, one would have all the worldly enjoyments as the gallants always
got royal treatment and honoured with jewels and other rewards.
The Arthshastra of Kautaliya is most elaborate on the point of gallantry
awards. He offered rewards of money and honour to his soldiers. During the
time of Harsha, Kings made grants of land to their successful generals.
Commanders and Officers who distinguished themselves on the battlefield were
rewarded with
54
titles and other marks of respect. The Mughals granted jewels, weapons with
jeweled hilts, pearls, palanquins, horses and elephants to their distinguished
officers and soldiers as reward and incentive for deeds of valour performed on
the battlefield. Maharaja Ranjit Singh used to go into action with several golden
bracelets and rewarded his officers and soldiers with a pair of them for any act of
personal courage on their part. He was perhaps the first Indian ruler to institute
medals and other decorations patterned on the European style. The earliest was
the ‘Order of Maharaja Ranjit Singh’ which shows the bust of the Maharaja while
on the obverse are given the names of the battles in which the recipient of the
medal took part. There was also the "Auspicious Star of Punjab", the highest
order of the Lahore Darbar.
In course of time, medals became the highest symbol of honor and bravery.
Queen Elizabeth introduced a medal particularly for military service to
commemorate the victory over the Spanish armada in 1538. In 1643, king Charles
I also introduced a badge of silver for meritorious services. These medals were,
however, given only to generals, knights, nobleman and men of high ranks. The
first award of a medal to a common soldier, was, however, introduced in the
United States of America on August 7,1782 by George Washington by the award
called the Badge of Military Merit. When Napoleon proposed the introduction of
the Legion of Honour, he was told "Cross and ribbons were the pillars of our
hereditary throne and they were unknown to the Romans who conquered the
world". In his reply to this objection he said, "For the soldier, as for all men in
active life you must have glory and distinction; recompense are the food which
nourish military virtue". "A soldier will fight long and hard for a bit of colour
ribbon," Napoleon said while originating the awarding of personal decorations.
Duke of Wellington introduced the campaign medals to all troops who fought at
Waterloo. Both Napoleon and Wellington realized that decorations and medals
not only expressed national gratitude to individuals but stimulated emulation and
spirit in battles to come.
The East India Company had granted gold medals to the British Officers
and silver to the Indian officers present in the campaign in Deccan in 1780-81,
the War of Mysore 1791-92; the Expedition to Ceylon 1795-96, the capture of
Seringapatnam; and Expedition to Egypt-1801 etc. After the issue of silver medals
to all Officers for the Battle of Waterloo, the East India Company issued medals
similar to that issued for Waterloo for their wars in Nepal 1814-16; the First
Burmese War 1824-26, the capture of Ghuznee 1839; the defence of Jelalabad
1841-42 etc. For the Gwalior Campaign a bronze five-pointed star was issued.
The first Sikh War of 1846 saw the last issue of a Medal by the East India Company.
Queen Victoria authorized the Medal for the Punjab Campaign of 1848.
At first the name of each important battle was inscribed on the reverse of
the medals itself, as in the case of the Candahar, Ghuznee and the Kabul Medals

55
of 1842, all given for the same war in Afghanistan. Inscribing medals on the
reverse was not found satisfactory as a casual inspection of the recipient’s
medal, worn obverse to the front, would not reveal for which particular battle he
had earned the medal.
All ribbons and medals are worn in certain sequence on the left breast, the
position of priority being the centre of chest and are from right to the left of the
wearer.
With the Independence in 1947, the Institution of British honours and
awards came to an end and the Indian awards came into being. The first batch
of decorations was introduced on January 26, 1950 and was made effective with
retrospective effect from August, 15, 1947. These included the Vir Chakra and
Ashok Chakra Series.
* Param Vir Chakra
* Ashok Chakra Class I (now Ashok Chakra)
* Maha Vir Chakra
* Ashok Chakra Class II (now Kirti Chakra)
* Vir Chakra
* Ashok Chakra Class II, (now Shaurya Chakra)
* General Service Medal, 1947
* India Independence Medal 1947
The second batch came in March 1953 and included the Meritorious Service
Medal, Long Service Medal and Good Conduct Medal, Territorial Army
Decoration and Territorial Army Medal.
The third batch came in 1954, which included the Country's highest award
- the Bharat Ratna and Padam Shri.
* Bharat Ratna
* Padma Vibhusan
* Padma Bhusan
* Padam Shri
On January 26, 1960 the Vishist Seva Medals Class I,II and III, Saiya Seva
Medal, Videsh Seva Medal, Sena, Nao Sena and Vayu Sena Medals were
instituted. As a result of the Indo Pakistan Conflict in 1965, the Raksha Medal,
Samanya Seva Medal and Samar Seva Medal were introduced and the 1971 war
led to the institution of Sangram Medal, poorvi Star and the Paschmi Star.
Generally anything, which is not a "Medal", is usually held to be a
'decoration', Medals fall into four distinct groups: medals for gallantry in action,

56
medals for war services, commemoration medals, and medals for long service
and good conduct. The medals for gallantry in action (Presidents police Medal,
Indian Police Medal for gallantry, and Cholera services are on right first. Actual
medals are only worn on ceremonial parades; functions and ribbons are worn on
the daily normal used uniform. Normally, neither medals nor ribbons are worn in
a battle or on an overcoat.
MEDAL RIBBONS - SIGNIFICANCE OF COLOR
It has not been possible to obtain the official version of the significance of
the various color on the ribbon of the medals issued. However, the interpretation
of the color of medals is :
The white is for purity and peace;
Saffron signifies dedication to duty;
Blue is symbolic of the unlimited expanse of the sky;
The green signifies relationship with the plant on which all other life depends,
firmness and faith;
Golden yellow signifies the brightness of the sun;
Red is the color of the army and of courage and strength.
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE OF MEDALS AND DECORATIONS
• Bharat Ratna (1954-77, 1980--)
• Param Vir Chakra (1952--)
• Ashoka Chakra (1952--)
• Padma Vibhushan (1954-77, 1980--)
• Padma Bhushan (1954-77, 1980--)
• Sarvotam Yudh Seva Medal (1980--)
• Param Vishisht Seva Medal (1960--)
• Maha Vir Chakra (1952--)
• Kirti Chakra (1952--)
• Padma Shri (1954-77, 1980--)
• Sarvottam Jeevan Raksha Padak (1961--)
• Uttam Yudh Seva Medal (1980--)
• Ati Vishisht Seva Medal (1960--)
• Vir Chakra (1952--)
• Shaurya Chakra (1952--)
• Yudh Seva Medal (1980--)
• President's Police and Fire Services Medal for Gallantry (1951--)
• President's Police Medal for Gallantry

57
• President's Fire Services Medal for Gallantry
• President's Home Guards and Civil Defence Medal for Gallantry
(1974-)
• Sena Medal (1961--)
• Nao Sena Medal (1960--)
• Vayu Sena Medal (1960--)
• Vishisht Seva Medal (1960--)
• Indian Police Medal for Gallantry (1948-51)
• Police Medal for Gallantry (1951--)
• Fire Services Medal for Gallantry
• Home Guards and Civil Defence Medal for Gallantry (1974--)
• Uttam Jeevan Raksha Padak (1961--)
• Wound Medal (1973--)
• General Service Medal 1947
• Samanya Seva Medal 1965
• Samar Seva Star (1965)
• Poorvi Star (1971)
• Paschimi Star (1971)
• Siachen Glacier Medal (1984--)
• Punjab Ribbon
• Special Service Medal (1986--)
• Raksha Medal 1965
• Sangram Medal (1971)
• Sainya Seva Medal (1960--)
• High Altitude Service Medal
• Police (Special Duty) Medal 1962
• Videsh Seva Medal (1960--)
• President's Police and Fire Services Medal for Distinguished Service
(1951--)
• President's Police Medal for Distinguished Service
• President's Fire Service Medal for Distinguished Service
• President's Home Guards and Civil Defence Medal for Distinguished
Service
• Meritorious Service Medal (1957--)
• Long Service and Good Conduct Medal (1957--)
• Coast Guard Medal for Meritorious Service
• Indian Police Medal for Meritorious Service

58
 • Police Medal for Meritorious Service (1951--)
• Fire Services Medal for Meritorious Service
• Home Guards and Civil Defence Medal for Meritorious Service
• Jeevan Raksha Padak (1961--)
• Territorial Army Decoration (1952--)
• Territorial Army Medal (1952--)
• Indian Independence Medal 1947
• Independence Medal 1950
• 50th Independence Anniversary Medal (1997)
• 25th Independence Anniversary Medal (1972)
• 30 Years Long Service Medal (1980--)
• 20 Years Long Service Medal (1971--)
• 9 Years Long Service Medal (1971--)
• Unnat Raksha Suraksha Corps Medal
• Raksha Suraksha Corps Medal
• National Cadet Corps Long Service Medal for 14 Years
• National Cadet Corps Long Service Medal for 7 Years
• Mention in Dispatches
• COAS/CNS/CAS/DGP Commendation Card
Description of Important Indian Medals
Bharat Ratna
The award is made for exceptional work in the advancement of art, literature
and science and in recognition of public service of the highest order.
The decoration is in the form of a peeped leaf. It is of toned bronze. On the
obverse is embossed a replica of the sun below which the words 'Bharat Ratna'
are embossed. On the reverse is the State Emblem and motto 'Satyameo Jaite'
(Truth Alone Triumphs). The emblem, the sun and the rim are of platinum. The
inscriptions are in burnished bronze.
This decoration is worn round the neck with a white ribbon.
Padma Vibhushan
The award is made for exceptional and distinguished service in any field
including service rendered by Government servants.
The decoration is of bronze and is circular in design with a geometrical
pattern superimposed on the circle. There is a lotus flower embossed on the
obverse, on the circular space. The word 'Padma' is embossed above and the
word 'Vibhushan' below the four-petal led lotus. On the reverse is the State Emblem

59
and motto 'Satyameo Jayte'. The inscription 'Padma Vibhushan' on the obverse,
the geometrical pattern on either side or the border around the periphery are
burnished bronze. All embossing on either side of the decoration is in white gold.
This decoration is worn on the left breast with an all salmon-pink ribbon.
Padma Bhushan
The award is made for distinguished s e r v i c e of a high order in any field
including service rendered by Government servants.
It has the same design as the Padma Vibhushan; on its obverse the word
'Padma' appears above and the word 'BHushan' below the lotus flower with three
petals. The inscription "Padma Bhushan' on the obverse, the geometrical pattern
on either side or the border around the periphery are in burnished bronze. All
the embossing on either side of the decoration is in standard gold.
The decoration is worn on the left breast with a salmon-pink silk ribbon
divided into two by white stripes.
Padma Shri
This award is made for distinguished service in any field, including service
rendered by Government servants.
It has the same design as the Padma Vibhushan. On its obverse the world
"Padma" above and the word 'Shri' below the lotus flower with five petals are
embossed. The inscription 'Padma Shri' on the obverse, the geometrical pattern
on either side and the border around the periphery are burnished bronze. All the
embossing on either side of the decoration is in stainless steel.
The decoration is worn on the left breast with a salmon pink silk ribbon, an
inch and an quarter wide, divided into three by two white stripes.
For Gallantry in the face of the Enemy
Param Vir Chakra
This is the highest decoration for valour awarded for “the most conspicuous
bravery or some daring or pre-eminent act of valour or self-sacrifice in the presence
of the enemy whether on land, at sea or in the air”.
The decoration is made of bronze and is circular in shape. It has, on the
obverse, four replicas of Indra's Vajra' embossed round the State emblem in the
centre. On the reverse, the words 'Param Vir Chakra' are embossed both in Hindi
and in English with the lotus flowers in the middle.
The decoration is worn on the left breast with a plain purple colour ribbon.
When only the ribbon is worn it has a miniature replica of the 'Vajra' worn on it.
It carries a monetary allowance of Rs. 100 per month and Rs. 40 per month
for each bar.

60
Maha Vir Chakra
This is the second highest decoration and is awarded for 'an act of
conspicuous gallantry in the presence of the enemy whether on land, at sea or in
the air'.
It is made of standard silver and is circular in shape. Embossed on the
obverse is a five-pointed star with a domed centrepiece bearing the gilded State
Emblem in a circle in the centre? On the reverse, the words 'Maha Vir Chakra' are
embossed both in Hindi and in English with two lotus flowers in the middle.
The decoration is worn on the left breast with a half white and half saffron
ribbon with the saffron nearer to the left shoulder.
It carries monetary allowances of Rs. 75 per month and Rs. 25 per month
for each bar.
Vir Chakra
This is the third in the order of awards and is given for 'an act of gallantry in
the presence of the enemy whether on land, at sea or in the air'.
The decoration is made of standard silver and is circular in shape. Embossed
on the obverse is a five-pointed star, which has an Ashoka Chakra in the centre.
Within this Chakra is a domed centrepiece bearing the gilded State Emblem. On
the reverse, the words 'Vir Chakra' are embossed in Hindi and English with two
lotus flowers in the middle.
The Vir Chakra is worn on the left breast with a half blue and half saffron
ribbon, the saffron bearing nearest to the left shoulder.
It carries monetary allowances of Rs. 50 per month and Rs, 50 per month
for each bar.
All members of the Armed Forces and civilian serving regularly or
temporarily under the direction or supervision of any of the Armed Forces are
eligible for any of the three awards.
If the recipient of a Chakra wins the same award again for a further act of
bravery, this is indicated by the addition of a bar to the ribbon by which the
decoration is suspended. When the ribbon alone is worn, each bar is represented
by a replica in metal of 'Indira's Vajra' in miniature, in the case of Param Vir
chakra and that of the respective Chakras in miniature, in case of Maha Vir and
Vir Chakras stitched on to the ribbon.
Ashoka Chakra
This decoration is awarded for the 'most conspicuous bravery or some daring
or preeminent act of valour or self sacrifice on land, at sea or in the air'.
The Chakra is made of gilt gold and is circular in shape. Embossed on the

61
obverse is a replica of Ashoka's chakra surrounded by a lotus wreath. Along the
edge is a pattern of lotus leaves, flowers and buds. On the reverse the words
'Ashoka Chakra' are embossed both in Hindi and English with lotus flowers in
the intervening space.
The Chakra is worn on the left breast with a green colored silk ribbon divided
into two equal parts by a saffron vertical line.
It carries monetary allowances of Rs. 90 per month and Rs. 35 per month
for each bar.
Kirti Chakra
This decoration is awarded for 'an act of conspicuous gallantry'
It is made of standard silver and is circular in shape. The obverse and reverse
are exactly the same as in the case of Ashoka Chakra. On the reverse are embossed
the words 'Kirti Chakra' both in Hindi and English.
The Chakra is worn on the left breast with a green colored silk ribbon and
dived into three equal parts by two saffron vertical lines.
It carries monetary allowances of Rs, 65 per month and Rs. 20 per month
for each bar.
Shaurya Chakra
This decoration is awarded for 'an act of gallantry'.
It is exactly like the other two Ashoka Chakras except that it is made of
bronze and words 'Shaurya Chakra' are embossed on the reverse.
The Chakra is worm on the left breast with a green colored ribbon, divided
into four equal parts by three saffron vertical lines.
All nationals of India are eligible for the award of the Ashoka Chakra, Kirti
Chakra and Shaurya Chakra.
A bar attached to the ribbon recognizes each further act of gallantry entitling
a recipient to the award of a Chakra of the same class as originally awarded to
him. When the ribbon alone is worn, the award of a bar is denoted by a replica of
decoration concerned in miniature, which is stitched to the ribbon.
It carries monetary allowances of Rs, 40 per month and Rs 16 per month
for each bar.
Presidents Police Medal and Police Medal for Gallantry
General
1. The recognition to good and selfless work and dedicated service during
operations or peace time is being given by grant of the following medals/
insignia:

62
 (a) Presidents Police Medal for gallantry
(b) Police Medal for gallantry
(c) Presidents Police Medal for distinguished service
(d) Prime Ministers Medal for life saving
(e) Director Generals Commendation roll
(f) Medal for Serving in difficult of specific areas on granted by the Govt.
2. In addition to above Army may consider grant of medals like PVC, MC, Vr
C, Kirti Chakra, Shaurya Chakra, PVSM, AVSM, VSM, Sena Medal etc
during operations or when any CPMF Unit is under Ops Control of Army.
3. Individuals can be considered for grant of other civilian awards.
4. Appreciation roll and commendation certificates can be granted by IsG,
DIsG and commandants.
Gallantry Awards
5. For any act of conspicuous gallantry exhibited in the course of performance
of duty, all ranks are entitled to the award of President's Police medal (or
Police Medal) for gallantry. A citation giving account of conspicuous
gallantry exhibited by the individual will be sent to the DGP's office who
will submit it to MHA for examination of the same and recommendation to
the Presidents of India for the award of Medal. In due course, Presidential
Notification is issued announcing the grant of the medal to the Individual
concerned.
Monetary Allowance for Gallantry Awards.
7. The recipients of awards will be given following monetary allowance on a
uniform rate, irrespective of their ranks:-
(a) Presidents Police Medal for gallantry Rs 100/- pm
(b) Police Medal for gallantry Rs 60/- pm
Presentation of Medal
8. The medals are normally presented during raising day/ investiture parades.
Wearing of Medals
9. The medals will be worn during ceremonial parades, raising day parades,
Police Commemoration Parade, visit of Head of the nation/ Government,
Ceremonial occasions or when ordered specifically by Head of the Office.
Service Condition
10. Individual must complete minimum 15 years service for grant of Police

63
 Medal for meritorious service and 6 years after grant of meritorious service
medal for consideration for Distinguished Service Medal.
Selection of individuals for nomination of awards
11. The Individuals must fulfil following criteria:-
(a) Minimum service prescribed.
(b) Age should preferably be round about 50 years.
(c) Cases of those who had fought in the 1971 war should be given
preference.
(d) The nominees should not have received any punishment.
(e) The personnel should have received maximum number of reward.
(f) Individuals should have contributed in his field of work/ specialization.
Prime Ministers Life Saving Medal
12. Citation of all individuals who have saved lives of any other individuals at
the risk of his own life be sent for grant of PM life saving medal.
Medals for grant of serving in difficult/ special areas
13. Medals for serving in difficult areas like Rajasthan, J&K, high altitude is
granted after completion of one year of service in that area.
Director General of Police's Commendation Roll
14. DGP's Commendation Roll is a prestigious reward and will be given to
those who perform outstanding work.
Eligibility Parameters
15. The following are normally the eligibility parameters will be followed for
grant of DGP's CR.
(a) For any conspicuous achievements during operations.
(b) Commendable work in natural calamities.
(c) Outstanding achievements in sports for the country at the national/
International level.
(d) Any innovation which may bring sufficient improvement in the
working of the Force.
(e) Clean and good record of service for 25 years.
(f) Accident free driving and good record for continuous period of 20
years.
(g) For being graded "AX" in courses of 12 weeks duration or more.
(h) Processing of difficult cases.

64
 (i) Any other conspicuous and outstanding work which may be considered
of a commendable nature.
Wearing of Insignia
16. All awardees of DGPs Commendation Roll will wear an insignia of silver
disc on the upper right hand side pocket above name plate, in the centre, on
the uniform. A silver disc shall be presented to the awardees of DGPs CR at
the time when he receives his first Commendation Roll. For the award of
additional Commendation Roll, no addition to the disc shall be made which
means that a particular individual will be given Silver Disc only once at the
time of receiving first CR in his service career though he may receive
subsequently number of DGPs CR.
Ribbons
17. Ribbons will form part of working dress and will be worn as and when
dress is being worn. Ribbons will not be worn while going out on exercises,
operations or on jersies.

65
 CHAPTER IX
BAND MUSIC
Music and the use of musical sounds to convey orders, messages and signals
to the soldiers have been used from the earliest time and martial music was a
regular feature of ancient Indian warfare. The soldiers marched into battle
accompanied by conches, drums and trumpets. According to the Rig Veda in
addition to the musical instruments which were intended for use only on sacrificial
or festive occasions, there were other like "dundubhi", a kettle-drum or the musical
instrument "bakura", with its varieties which were used only for war purposes. In
the course of an expedition against "Dasyas", the "Asvins" used "bakura" to help
their army against the enemies.
Originally made with conch, horn and the "dholak" these early sounds
developed through the years into the modern military airs whose stirring melodies
provoke pride and also the emotions of Servicemen and civilians alike. In peace
and in the war the military bands have done much to inspire many fine traditions
and they have added greatly to the pomp of ceremonials. Today no ceremony of
any significance is considered complete without the presence of a military band.
It is used on ceremonial parades, reception of high dignitaries with Guards of
Honour, band concerts in the hospitals, and certain national functions.
References to the Military Band or to musicians performing at military
functions can be found in records dating back to the pre-Christian era. The term
'band' was not used until the 19th century, and the 'Military Band' was first
introduced in England by Germany. Ancient musical tradition in India was confined
to the use of musical instruments such as conch shells, horns, bugles and drums
only to sound signals during battle. The concept of Military Band and Pipes and
Drums, as we know it today, is primarily of Western origin, understandably a
legacy of the British who introduced the tradition with their arrival in India. In
the pre-Independence era, the musicians in Military Bands were Indian and their
Bandmasters or Conductors generally British, who used to impart training in
Western music on established international pattern.
With the departure of the British in 1947, the need was felt to set up an
institution of military music in India on the lines of Kneller Hall, London. Since
the termination of British power from India the various bands of the Indian Army
had to be re-oriented to render them truly Indian. The task was not easy as with
the division of the country many bandsmen of various units opted for Pakistan.
Under the distinguished patronage of Gen. K.M Kariappa, OBE the then
Commander-In-Chief of the Indian Army, a Military School of Music was
established in Pachmarhi in 1950. Here the bandsmen of the bands of the various
defence forces are given training in playing the various instruments used in the
Military bands.The Military Music Wing at Pachmarhi has not only been prolific

66
with over 200 musical compositions to its credit, but has excelled in maintaining
the standard of military music in India through its diverse range of courses designed
to train recruit bandsmen, pipers or drummers.
Besides training the bands of all the three services, police and para military
forces, and musicians from friendly foreign countries, the Military Music Wing
runs 10 courses of which four are designed purely for the Military Band, the most
advanced of which is the Potential Band Master's Course, run over three years. It,
besides developing practical skills at all musical instruments of a Military Band,
imparts effective training in composing, arranging and conducting. The merit of
a musician is recognised with the award of Licentiate in Military Music. The
students are also taught Indian instruments and, by the end of the course, are
eligible for a diploma in Hindustani Sangeet.
The fusion of the Western and Indian musical traditions, although extremely
difficult to accomplish, has been quite successful at MILITARY MUSIC WING,
and instruments such as sitar, sarod, santoor and tabla are now an integral part of
the Concert Band at MILITARY MUSIC WING. Several popular Indian folk
tunes and ragas have also been successfully arranged by these composers and the
number of such tunes continues to grow.Another musical form fast gaining
popularity in military circles is group singing. Group rendering of such favourites
as watan ki rahon mein, kaisa sundar aur bahadur, deh shiva var moh ihe (Army
song), seldom fail to enthrall audience, civil or military. A recent addition to the
repertoire of patriotic songs has been vir sipahi composed by Maj Gen KN Bhatt.
It has been performed during the Beating the Retreat a few years back.
In the early years the Police bandsmen had to play western martial tunes as
suitable native material scores did not exist. Gradually over the years a small
group of composers sprang up who composed martial music appropriate for our
Bands, based on the folk-lore of the regions which contributed most to the strength
of the Indian Defence Forces. Thus the folk lores of Punjab, Rajasthan, Marwar,
Garhwal and Konkan coast have given inspiration to the Indian composers.
The brass bands give immense pleasure to all ranks when they are played in
unit lines; and they are played also on guest nights in the officers' messes, and
periodically in the afternoons on club and park lawns and in other public places.
But apart from the traditions they have inspired in others, military music
has much tradition of its own to which a good measure has been added by the
musicians of the three Services.
It has been appreciated that music and singing are aides to morale and are
therefore encouraged in the armed forces. Men of a unit who break into song at
easy provocation are far less likely than others to become disgruntled and unhappy.
Units which sing on a march find the task less tiring, especially towards the end
of a long march. The military band in a Police Unit or the Para Military Force
Battalions helps build up morale.

67
 MUSIC FOR MILITARY PARADES, DRILL AND MARCHES
In addition to the music of the various marches and musical calls, the
repertoire of ceremonial music included three other compositions of which two
were played in quick-time and one in slow. Each has a special place in the
ceremonial drill movements and is widely used thoughout the Services, Police
and the Para Military Forces:
The General Salute
The Advance in Review Order
The Point of War
The 'General Salute' is still played, on all occasions, when an officer of and
above the rank of DIG or equivalent in other Services takes the salute. The
arrangements of a general salute may have fragments of a quick-march in the
background, while the trumpets or bugles play the salute.
The 'Advance in Review Order' is part of a ceremonial parade, when after a
march-past the parade advances by the centre for 15 paces, the band and drums
playing a 5 pace roll. At the conclusion of the seven and a half bar of music the
band and drum cease playing and the whole parade automatically halts. The parade
is then ordered to salute in the same manner as when receiving the reviewing
officer after which it is ordered to order arms and await order for dispersal.
The 'Point of War' is a slow march played less frequently since it is reserved
exclusively for ceremonials in which colors and standards take part; it is, in fact,
a set-piece, played before the color or standard is marched on and off the parade
ground. It is an Army composition and the practice of playing it during the color
and standard ceremonies is an old Army tradition.
THE BAGPIPES
The bagpipes is one of the ancient musical instruments. It is mentioned in
many ancient writings, and there are in existence Hittite carvings that show its
use in thousand years B.C. It was used in the Roman Army and it reached Britain
by that agency.
The literature of all European countries testifies to the bagpipe's universality
from the Middle Ages onwards. It is mentioned by Dante in the 13th century; by
Chaucer, Froissart and Boccaccio in the 14th; by Rabelais, Ronsard, Cervantes,
Spencer and Shakespeare in the 16th; by Drayton, Milton, Butler and Pepys in
the 17th; by Beaumarchis and a host of others in the 18th; in the 19th by George
Sand in one of her novels; and Victor Hugo in his The Toilers of the Sea, wishing
to display his knowledge of the English language, speaks of it as the 'bug-pipe'.
Most countries have bagpipes in one form or another.
This instrument has received little attention from those known as 'the great

68
composers', but it has played a large part in the social life of court and camps in
all of which its practitioners are still active.
The Highland Pipe or Scottish Pipe - first mention of them in Scottish military
history occurs in 1594 -used by the Scottish people, in their Army and the Indian
Army, is the one known almost the world over.
The music of a Bagpipe has a unique scale with the 4th and the 7th note
slightly out of tune. The tone of both chanter and drones is penetrating and is at
first baffling to those not accustomed to it, not only from the unusual interval of
the scale and the forceful tone, but also from the lavish use of 'grace notes' (very
quick notes played before each melody note) which, until they are recognized as
decorations, tend to disguise the main tune.
The technique of this instrument is certainly more difficult to acquire in
perfection than that of any other instrument of so small a range of notes. Another
difficulty is the fact that the pipers have to memorise every tune they learn from
the printed music.
It is not known when the pipes came into the Indian Army, after which it
came in to the Police.
Bugle Calls
Bugles have been a very important musical instrument for the Military,
during war and peace. The Police and the Para Military Forces make use of the
buglers for various calls, some of which are given below:
• Reveille: The bugle call which marks the beginning of a day. The
Regimental Flag is raised at the Quarter Guard.
• Fall-In: The bugle call ordering the men to get on Parade.
• General Salute: The bugle call for the General Salute. General Salute
is authorised for the ranks above a Brigadier. The bugle call is used
when the band is not in attendance.
• Retreat: The bugle call which marks the end of a day. Called during
sun set, the Regimental Flag is brought down.
• Last Post: The bugle call ordering the soldiers to put of all lights and
go to sleep. The same call is also called during military funerals. Last
Post during funerals, is called as the last bugle call which a soldier
will hear before he is put to rest.
Band Tunes
The Songs of the Nation
The National Anthem The National Anthem (Jana Gana Mana) The National
Anthem of India, Jana Gana Mana. Composed and
written by Rabindranath Tagore.

69
Vande Mataram The National Song Vande Mataram song was
(I bow to thee.. written by Bankim Chandra Chatterjee.
my Motherland)
Sare Jahan Se Achcha The Quick March of the Indian Armed Forces. The
(Best in the world) words of this composition was written by the noted Urdu
poet, Mohammad Iqbal. It was arranged for Military
Band, by Prof. A. Lobo. In this version, the combined
band of the Three Services is playing the march.
Marches
Some of the commonly used band tunes in the Police and the Para Military
Forces are given below:
• Amar Senani (The Immortal Soldier): Quick march. There is no fixed
occasion for this tune to be played.
• Dhwaj Ka Rakshak (Defenders of the Flag): Slow march. This is a
tune for the compound march. The band platoon does a slow march
and forms up in various formations on the parade ground.
• Gulmarg: Quick march. There is no fixed occasion for this tune to be
played. Gulmarg is a very beautiful garden in Jammu & Kashmir.
• Benihaal: Quick march of the Indian Army. Benihaal is the name of a
Pass, in the Himalayas.
• Uttari Seemaye (The Northern Frontiers): Quick march of the Indian
Army.
• Suvruth (The Holy Oath): Quick march of the Indian Army.
• Vijayi Bharath (India, the Victorious): Quick march of the Indian
Defence Forces.
• Hind Maha Sagar (The mighty Indian Ocean): Quick march of the
Indian Navy.
• Naval Ensign: Quick march of the Indian Navy. Composed by
Commander S.A. Anchees, Director of Music, Indian Navy.
• Sea Lord: Slow March of the Indian Navy. This is a tune for the
compound march. The band platoon does a slow march and forms up
in various formations on the parade ground. This march might
originally be from the Royal Navy.
• Vayu Sena Nishaan (The Air Force emblem): This tune is not a quick
march, but played on other official ceremonies. The band does not
march, when this tune is played.

70
 • Nabh Rakshak (Defenders of the Air): Quick march of the Indian Air
Force.
• Antariksh Baan (Arrow in the Air): Quick march of the Indian Air
Force.
• Dhwani Avrodh (Sound Barrier): Quick march of the Indian Air Force.
• Nirmaljit: Quick march of the Indian Air Force. In memory of Fg.
Off. Nirmal Jit Singh Sekhon, PVC.
• Siki Amole (Precious Coins): A prayer or hymn, played to remember
the fallen soldiers. The band does not march when this tune is played.
• Voice of the Gun: Quick march. There is no fixed occasion for this
tune to be played. Originally an English one, but is played by the
Indian Army as well. The tune was composed by Kenneth Alford, the
composer who composed the ever-green classic "Colonel Bogey".
• Sare Jahan Se Acha (Best in the World): The official march of India's
Armed Forces (Para-Military and NCC forces generally play the
Kadam Kadam Bhadaye Jaa). In this recording, this tune is played by
all the three bands (Army, Navy and Air Force). This march is always
played during the end of military parade, or any official function where
the band is in attendance.
• Deshon Ka Sartaj, Bharath (India, Crown of the World): Quick March
of the Indian Armed Forces. In this recording, the tune is sung by the
Band and Choir of the Indian Navy. This is also the regimental march
of the 13th, 16th and 19th Kumaon Battalions and also of the Mahar
Regiment.
• Have the NCC Spirit in You: Quick march of the National Cadet
Corps. Played by the Marching Band of San Thome High School.
The General Salute: The General Salute tune played by the Police and Para
Military Force Band. General Salute is authorised for a Brigadier and above.
Swagatam: This tune is not a march, but played during other ceremonial
occassions. It is based on the lyrics of Narindar Sharma, and is composed by L.B
Gurung.
Channa Bilawari: Slow march composed by Subedar Ram Pal, Band Master of
the Kumaon Regiment. This tune has been adapted from a popular folk song of
Kumaon hills. The song is sung by a girl requesting her father that she should not
be got married to a boy of the village "Channa Bilauri" which is very hot and
humid. Used to the luxury of cold climate, the girl narrates how it will be difficult
for her to get adjusted with the heat waves in Channa Bilauri. This is generally
played during inspection of Parades.

71
Almore March: This is a quick march composed by Subedar Major Ganesh
Gurung, the band Master of the Kumaon Regiment. It is based on a Kumaoni folk
tune.
Gangotri: This stunning quick march was judged as the best quick march during
the Army Band Competition held in the year 1976 and received the "Lawrence D'
Mello Shield". It was composed by Subedar Major Bachan Singh Negi, the band
master of Garhwal Rifles Regimental Centre. Gangotri is also the name of a
glacier in the Himalayas.
Sam Bahadur: Quick march composed by L.B.Gurung. This tune is named after
Field Marshal S.H.F.J Manekshaw, the hero of the 1971 war. Manekshaw had
commanded a few Gorkha units, and was affectionately called Sam Bahadur.
Hai Kancha: Quick march played by the pipe band. Composed by L.B. Gurung.
Kancha in Gorkhali, means a young boy. It is an affectionate term used in the
Indian Army, when referring to Gorkha soldiers.
Kadam Baraye Ja : A stunning Quick march composed by Jemadar Sete. This is
also the regimental quick march of the Para Regiments.
Samman Guard: Slow march composed by L.B Gurung. This tune may be used
during the inspection of a Guard of Honour.
Rajasthan: Slow march composed by F.H. Reid.
Beating the Retreat
Beating Retreat or Beating the Retreat is a military ceremony dating back
to the 16th century and was originally used in order to recall nearby patrolling
units to their castle. Originally it was known as watch setting and was initiated at
sunset by the firing of a single round from the evening gun.
An order from the army of James II of England dated to 18 June 1690 had
his drums beating an order for his troops to retreat and a later order, from William
III in 1694 read "The Drum Major and Drummers of the Regiment which gives a
Captain of the Main Guard are to beat the Retreat through the large street, or as
may be ordered. They are to be answered by all the Drummers of the guards, and
by four Drummers of each Regiment in their respective Quarters". However,
either or both orders may refer to the ceremonial tattoo.
In India it officially denotes the end of Republic Day festivities. It is
conducted on the evening of January 29, the third day after the Republic Day. It
is performed by the bands of the three wings of the military, the Indian Army,
Indian Navy and Indian Air Force. The venue is Raisina Hills and an adjacent
square, flanked by the north and south block of the Indian Parliament.
The Chief Guest of the function is the President of India who arrives escorted
by the 'President's Body Guards'(PBG), a cavalry unit.

72
Ceremony
The ceremony starts by the massed bands of the three services marching in
unison, playing popular marching tunes like Colonel Bogey and Sons of the Brave.
The Fanfare then is followed by the bands marching forward in quick time, then
breaking into slow time, then by the 'compound march' involving movements to
form intricate and beautiful patterns. The band, again, breaks into quick time and
goes back to the farthest end of Raisina Hills. Then the Pipes and Drums of the
Indian Army play traditional Scottish tunes and Indian tunes like "Gurkha Brigade"
and “Chaandni”. This band also does a compound march. The last bands to perform
are the combined bands of the Navy and the Air Force. This part of the ceremony
ends with their compound march.
The three band contingents march forward and take position close to the
President's seat. The drummers give a solo performance (known as the Drummer's
Call). A regular feature of this pageant is the last tune played before the Retreat.
It is the famous Christian Hymn composed by William H Monk, Abide with Me.
The chimes made by the tubular bells, placed quite at a distance, create a
mesmerising ambience.
This is followed by the bugle call for Retreat, and all the flags are slowly
brought down. The band master then marches to the President and requests
permission to take the bands away, and informs that the closing ceremony is now
complete. The bands march back playing a popular martial tune Saare Jahan Se
Achcha. As soon as the bands cross Raisina Hills a spectacular illumination display
is set up on the North and South Blocks of the Parliament building.

73
 CHAPTER X
FLAG CODE OF INDIA

The Indian National Flag represents the hopes and aspirations of the people
of India. It is the symbol of our national pride. Over the last five decades, several
people including members of armed forces have ungrudgingly laid down their
lives to keep the tricolor flying in its full glory.
The significance of the colors and the chakra in the National Flag was amply
described by Dr. S. Radhakrishnan in the Constituent Assembly which
unanimously adopted the National Flag. Dr. S. Radhakrishnan explained-"Bhagwa
or the saffron color denotes renunciation of disinterestedness. Our leaders must
be indifferent to material gains and dedicate themselves to their work. The white
in the centre is light, the path of truth to guide our conduct. The green shows our
relation to soil, our relation to the plant life here on which all other life depends.
The Ashoka Wheel in the centre of the white is the wheel of the law of dharma.
Truth or satya, dharma or virtue ought to be the controlling principles of those
who work under this flag. Again, the wheel denotes motion. There is death in
stagnation. There is life in movement. India should no more resist change, it
must move and go forward. The wheel represents the dynamism of a peaceful
change."
There is universal affection and respect for, and loyalty to, the National
Flag. Yet, a perceptible lack of awareness is often noticed, not only amongst
people but also in the organisations/agencies of the government, in regard to
laws, practices and conventions that apply to the display of the National Flag.
Apart from non-statutory instructions issued by the Government from time to
time, display of the National Flag is governed by the provisions of the Emblems
and Names (Prevention of Improper Use) Act, 1950 (No.12 of 1950) and the
Prevention of Insults to National Honour Act, 1971 (No. 69 of 1971). Flag Code
of India, 2002 is an attempt to bring together all such laws, conventions, practices
and instructions for the guidance and benefit of all concerned.
For the sake of convenience, Flag Code of India, 2002, has been divided
into three parts. Part I of the Code contains general description of the National
Flag. Part II of the Code is devoted to the display of the National Flag by members
of public, private organizations, educational institutions, etc. Part III of the Code
relates to display of the National Flag by Central and State governments and their
organisations and agencies.
Flag Code of India, 2002, takes effect from January 26, 2002 and supersedes
the 'Flag Code - India' as it existed.

74
 PART I
GENERAL
1.1 The National Flag shall be a tri-colour panel made up of three
rectangular panels or sub-panels of equal widths. The colour of the top
panel shall be India saffron (Kesari) and that of the bottom panel shall be
India green. The middle panel shall be white, bearing at its centre the
design of Ashoka Chakra in navy blue colour with 24 equally spaced
spokes. The Ashoka Chakra shall preferably be screen printed or
otherwise printed or stencilled or suitably embroidered and shall be
completely visible on both sides of the Flag in the centre of the white
panel.
1.2 The National Flag of India shall be made of hand spun and hand woven
wool/cotton/silk k h a d i bunting.
1.3 The National Flag shall be rectangular in shape. The ratio of the length to
the height (width) of the Flag shall be 3:2.
1.4 The standard sizes of the National Flag shall be as follows:-
Flag Size No. Dimensions in mm
1 6300 X 4200
2 3600 X 2400
3 2700 X 1800
4 1800 X 1200
5 1350 X 900
6 900 X 600
7 450 X 300
8 225 X 150
9 150 X 100
1.5 An appropriate size should be chosen for display. The flags of 450X300
mm size are intended for aircrafts on VVIP flights, 225X150 mm size for
motor-cars and 150X100 mm size for table flags.
PART II
HOISTING/DISPLAY/USE OF NATIONAL FLAG BY MEMBERS OF
PUBLIC, P R I V A T E ORGANISATIONS, EDUCATIONAL
INSTITUTIONS, ETC.
Section 1
2.1 There shall be no restriction on the display of the National Flag by
members of general public, private organizations, educational institutions,
etc., except to the extent provided in the Emblems and Names (Prevention
of Improper Use) Act, 1950* and
*The Emblems and Names (Prevention of Improper Use) Act, 1950.

75
 Section 2
In this Act, unless the context otherwise requires:-
"emblem" means any emblem, seal, flag, insignia, coat-of-arms or
pictorial representation specified in the Schedule.
Section 3
Notwithstanding anything contained in any law for the time being in
force, no person shall, except in such cases and under such conditions as may be
prescribed by the Central Government, use, or continue to use, for the purpose of
any trade, business, calling or profession, or in the title of any patent, or in any
trade mark of design, any name or emblem specified in the Schedule or any
colorable imitation thereof without the previous permission of the Central
Government or of such officer of Government as may be authorised in this behalf
by the Central Government.
NOTE : The Indian National Flag has been specified as an emblem in the
Schedule to the Act.
The Prevention of Insults to National Honour Act, 1971** and any other
law enacted on the subject. Keeping in view the provisions of the aforementioned
Acts -
(i) The Flag shall not be used for commercial purposes in violation of the
Emblem and Names (Prevention of Improper Use) Act, 1950;
(ii) The Flag shall not be dipped in salute to any person or thing;
**THE PREVENTION OF INSULTS TO NATIONAL HONOUR ACT, 1971
(Amended by the Prevention of Insults to National Honour (Amendment) Act, 2003)
Whoever in any public place or in any other place within public view burns,
mutilates, defaces, defiles, disfigures, destroys, tramples upon or otherwise shows
disrespect to or brings into contempt (whether by words, either spoken or written,
or by acts) the Indian National Flag………. or any part thereof, shall be punished
with imprisonment for a term which may extend to three years, or with fine, or
with both.
Explanation 1. - Comments expressing disapprobation or criticism of the Indian
National Flag or an alteration of the Indian National Flag by lawful means do not
constitute an offence under this section.
Explanation 2. - The expression, "Indian National Flag" includes any picture,
painting, drawing or photograph, or other visible representation of the Indian
National Flag, or of any part or parts thereof, made of any substance or represented
on any substance.
Explanation 3. - The expression "Public place" means any place intended for use

76
by, or accessible to, the public and includes any public conveyance.
Explanation 4. - The disrespect to the Indian National Flag means and includes-
(a) a gross affront or indignity offered to the Indian National Flag; or
(b) dipping the Indian National Flag in salute to any person or thing; or
(c) flying the Indian National Flag at half-mast except on occasions on
which the Flag is flown at half-mast on public buildings in accordance
with the instructions issued by the Government; or
(d) using the Indian National Flag as a drapery in any form whatsoever
except in state funerals or armed forces or other para-military forces
funerals; or
(e) using the Indian National Flag as a portion of costume or uniform of
any description or embroidering or printing it on cushions,
handkerchiefs, napkins or any dress material; or
(f) putting any kind of inscription upon the Indian National Flag; or
(g) using the Indian National Flag as a receptacle for receiving, delivering
or carrying anything except flower petals before the Indian National
Flag is unfurled as part of celebrations on special occasions including
the Republic Day or the Independences Day; or
(h) using the Indian National Flag as covering for a statue or a monument
or a speaker's desk or a speaker's platform; or
(i) allowing the Indian National Flag to touch the ground or the floor or
trail in water intentionally; or
(j) draping the Indian National Flag over the hood, top, and sides or back
or on a vehicle, train, boat or an aircraft or any other similar object; or
(k) using the Indian National Flag as a covering for a building; or
(l) intentionally displaying the Indian National Flag with the "saffron"
down.
3A. MINIMUM PENALTY ON SECOND OR SUBSEQUENT OFFENCE
Whoever having already been convicted of an offence under section 2 is again convicted
of any such offence shall be punishable for the second and for every subsequent offence,
with imprisonment for a term, which shall not be less than one year.
(iii) the Flag shall not be flown at half-mast except on occasions on which
the Flag is flown at half-mast on public buildings in accordance with
the instructions issued by the Government;
(iv) the Flag shall not be used as a drapery in any form whatsoever,
including private funerals;
77
 (v) the Flag shall not be used as a portion of costume or uniform of any
description nor shall it be embroidered or printed upon cushions,
handkerchiefs, napkins or any dress material;
(vi) lettering of any kind shall not be put upon the Flag;
(vii) the Flag shall not be used as a receptacle for receiving, delivering,
holding or carrying anything; provided that there shall be no objection
to keeping flower petals inside the Flag before it is unfurled as part of
celebrations on special occasions and on National Days like the
Republic Day and the Independence Day;
(viii) when used on occasions like unveiling of a statue, the Flag shall be
displayed distinctly and separately and it shall not be used as a covering
for the statue or monument;
(ix) the Flag shall not be used to cover a speaker's desk nor shall it be
draped over a speaker's platform;
(x) the Flag shall not be intentionally allowed to touch the ground or the
floor or trail in water;
(xi) the Flag shall not be draped over the hood, top, sides or back of a
vehicle, train, boat or an aircraft;
(xii) the Flag shall not be used as a covering for a building; and
(xiii) the Flag shall not be intentionally displayed with the "saffron" down.
2.2 A member of public, a private organization or an educational institution
may hoist/display the National Flag on all days and occasions, ceremonial
or otherwise. Consistent with the dignity and honour of the National Flag-
(i) whenever the National Flag is displayed, it should occupy the position
of honour and should be distinctly placed;
(ii) a damaged or dishevelled Flag should not be displayed;
(iii) the Flag should not be flown from a single masthead simultaneously
with any other flag or flags;
(iv) the Flag should not be flown on any vehicle except in accordance
with the provisions contained in Section IX of Part III of this Code;
(v) when the Flag is displayed on a speaker's platform, it should be flown
on the speaker's right as he faces the audience or flat against the wall,
above and behind the speaker;
(vi) when the Flag is displayed flat and horizontal on a wall, the saffron
band should be upper most and when displayed vertically, the saffron
band shall be on the right with reference to the Flag (i.e. left to the

78
 person facing the Flag);
(vii) to the extent possible, the Flag should conform to the specifications
prescribed in Part I of this Code.
(viii) no other flag or bunting should be placed higher than or above or side
by side with the National Flag; nor should any object including flowers
or garlands or emblem be placed on or above the Flag-mast from
which the Flag is flown;
(ix) the Flag should not be used as a festoon, rosette or bunting or in any
other manner for decoration;
(x) the Flag made of paper may be waved by public on occasions of
important national, cultural and sports events. However, such paper
Flags should not be discarded or thrown on the ground after the event.
As far as possible, it should be disposed of in private consistent with
the dignity of the Flag;
(xi) where the Flag is displayed in open, it should, as far as possible, be
flown from sunrise to sunset, irrespective of weather conditions;
(xii) the Flag should not be displayed or fastened in any manner as may
damage it; and
(xiii) when the Flag is in a damaged or soiled condition, it shall be destroyed
as a whole in private, preferably by burning or by any other method
consistent with the dignity of the Flag.
2.3 The National Flag may be hoisted in educational institutions (schools,
colleges, sports camps, scout camps, etc.) to inspire respect for the Flag. A
model set of instructions for guidance is given below -
(i) The School will assemble in open square formation with pupils forming
the three sides and the Flag-staff at the centre of the fourth side. The
Headmaster, the pupil leader and the person unfurling the Flag (if other
than the Headmaster) will stand three paces behind the Flag-staff.
(ii) The pupils will fall according to classes and in squads of ten (or other
number according to strength). These squads will be arranged one
behind the other. The pupil leader of the class will stand to the right of
the first row of his class and the form master will stand three paces
behind the last row of his class, towards the middle. The classes will
be arranged along the square in the order of seniority with the
seniormost class at the right end.
(iii) The distance between each row should be at least one pace (30 inches);
and the space between Form and Form should be the same.
(iv) When each Form or Class is ready, the Class leader will step forward
79
 and salute the selected school pupil leader. As soon as all the Forms
are ready, the school pupil leader will step up to the Headmaster and
salute him. The Headmaster will return the salute. Then, the Flag will
be unfurled. The School pupil leader may assist.
(v) The School pupil leader in charge of the parade (or assembly) will
call the parade to attention, just before the unfurling, and he will call
them to the salute when the Flag flies out. The parade will keep at the
salute for a brief interval, and then on the command "order", the parade
will come to the attention position.
(vi) The Flag Salutation will be followed by the National Anthem. The
parade will be kept at the attention during this part of the function.
(vii) On all occasions when the pledge is taken, the pledge will follow the
National Anthem. When taking the pledge the Assembly will stand to
attention and the Headmaster will administer the pledge ceremoniously
and the Assembly will repeat it after him.
(viii) In pledging allegiance to the National Flag, the practice to be adopted
in Schools is as follows:-
Standing with folded hands, all repeat together the following pledge:
"I pledge allegiance to the National Flag and to the Sovereign Socialist
Secular Democratic Republic for which it stands."
PART III
HOISTING/DISPLAY OF THE NATIONAL FLAG BY THE CENTRAL AND
STATE GOVERNMENTS AND THEIR ORGANISATIONS AND AGENCIES
Section 1
DEFENCE INSTALLATIONS/HEADS OF MISSIONS/POSTS
3.1 The provisions of this Part shall not apply to Defence Installations that
have their own rule for display of the National Flag.
3.2 The National Flag may also be flown on the Headquarters and the residences
of the Heads of Missions/Posts abroad in the countries where it is customary
for diplomatic and consular representatives to fly their National Flags on
the Headquarters and their official residences.
Section 1I
OFFICIAL DISPLAY
3.3 Subject to the provisions contained in Section I above, it shall be mandatory
for all Governments and their organisations/agencies to follow the provisions
contained in this Part.

80
3.4 On all occasions for official display, only the Flag conforming to
specifications laid down by the Bureau of Indian Standards and bearing
their standard mark shall be used. On other occasions also, it is desirable
that only such Flags of appropriate size are flown.
Section 1II
CORRECT DISPLAY
3.5 Wherever the Flag is flown, it should occupy the position of honour and be
distinctly placed.
3.6 Where the practice is to fly the Flag on any public building, it shall be
flown on that building on all days including Sundays and holidays and,
except as provided in this Code, it shall be flown from sun-rise to sun-set
irrespective of weather conditions. The Flag may be flown on such a building
at night also but this should be only on very special occasions.
3.7 The Flag shall always be hoisted briskly and lowered slowly and
ceremoniously. When the hoisting and the lowering of the Flag is
accompanied by appropriate bugle calls, the hoisting and lowering should
be simultaneous with the bugle calls.
3.8 When the Flag is displayed from a staff projecting horizontally or at an
angle from a windowsill, balcony, or front of a building, the saffron band
shall be at the farther end of the staff.
3.9 When the Flag is displayed flat and horizontal on a wall, the saffron band
shall be upper most and when displayed vertically, the saffron band shall be
to the right with reference to the Flag, i.e., it may be to the left of a person
facing it.
3.10 When the Flag is displayed on a speaker's platform, it shall be flown on a
staff on the speaker's right as he faces the audience or flat against the wall
above and behind the speaker.
3.11 When used on occasions like the unveiling of a statue, the Flag shall be
displayed distinctly and separately.
3.12 When the Flag is displayed alone on a motor car, it shall be flown from a
staff, which should be affixed firmly either on the middle front of the bonnet
or to the front right side of the car.
3.13 When the Flag is carried in a procession or a parade, it shall be either on the
marching right, i.e. the Flag's own right, or if there is a line of other flags, in
front of the centre of the line.

81
 Section 1V
INCORRECT DISPLAY
3.14 A damaged or disheveled Flag shall not be displayed.
3.15 The Flag shall not be dipped in salute to any person or thing.
3.16 No other flag or bunting shall be placed higher than or above or, except as
hereinafter provided, side by side with the National Flag; nor shall any
object including flowers or garlands or emblem be placed on or above the
Flag-mast from which the Flag is flown.
3.17 The Flag shall not be used as a festoon, rosette or bunting or in any other
manner for decoration.
3.18 The Flag shall not be used to cover a speaker's desk nor shall it be draped
over a speaker's platform.
3.19 The Flag shall not be displayed with the "saffron" down.
3.20 The Flag shall not be allowed to touch the ground or the floor or trail in
water.
3.21 The Flag shall not be displayed or fastened in any manner as may damage it.
Section V
MISUSE
3.22 The Flag shall not be used as a drapery in any form whatsoever except in
State/Military/Central Para Military Forces funerals hereinafter provided.
3.23 The Flag shall not be draped over the hood, top, sides or back of a vehicle,
train or boat.
3.24 The Flag shall not be used or stored in such a manner as may damage or soil
it.
3.25 When the Flag is in a damaged or soiled condition, it shall not be cast aside
or disrespectfully disposed of but shall be destroyed as a whole in private,
preferably by burning or by any other method consistent with the dignity of
the Flag.
3.26 The Flag shall not be used as a covering for a building.
3.27 The Flag shall not be used as a portion of a costume or uniform of any
description. It shall not be embroidered or printed upon cushions,
handkerchiefs, napkins or boxes.
3.28 Lettering of any kind shall not be put upon the Flag.
3.29 The Flag shall not be used in any form of advertisement nor shall an
advertising sign be fastened to the pole from which the Flag is flown.
82
3.30 The Flag shall not be used as a receptacle for receiving, delivering, holding
or carrying anything.
Provided that there shall be no objection to keeping flower petals inside the Flag
before it is unfurled, as part of celebrations on special occasions and on National
Days like the Republic Day and the Independence Day.
Section V1
SALUTE
3.31 During the ceremony of hoisting or lowering the Flag or when the Flag is
passing in a parade or in a review, all persons present should face the Flag
and stand at attention. Those present in uniform should render the appropriate
salute. When the Flag is in a moving column, persons present will stand at
attention or salute as the Flag passes them. A dignitary may take the salute
without a head dress.

Section VI1
DISPLAY WITH FLAGS OF OTHER NATIONS AND OF UNITED
NATIONS
3.32 When displayed in a straight line with flags of other countries, the National
Flag shall be on the extreme right; i.e. if an observer were to stand in the
centre of the row of the flags facing the audience, the National Flag should
be to his extreme right. The position is illustrated in the diagram below:-
3.33 Flags of foreign countries shall proceed as from the National Flag in
alphabetical order on the basis of English versions of the names of the
countries concerned. It would be permissible in such a case to begin and

83
 also to end the row of flags with the National Flag and also to include
National Flag in the normal countrywise alphabetical order. The National
Flag shall be hoisted first and lowered last.
3.34 In case flags are to be flown in an open circle i.e., in an arc or a semi-circle,
the same procedure shall be adopted as is indicated in the preceding clause
of this Section. In case flags are to be flown in a closed, i.e., complete
circle, the National Flag shall mark the beginning of the circle and the flags
of other countries should proceed in a clockwise manner until the last flag
is placed next to the National Flag. It is not necessary to use separate
National Flags to mark the beginning and the end of the circle of flags. The
National Flag shall also be included in its alphabetical order in such a closed
circle.
3.35 When the National Flag is displayed against a wall with another flag from
crossed staffs, the National Flag shall be on the right i.e. the Flag's own
right, and its staff shall be in front of the staff of the other flag. The position
is illustrated in the diagram below:-
3.36 When the United Nation's Flag is flown along with the National Flag, it can
be displayed on either side of the National Flag. The general practice is to
fly the National Flag on the extreme right with reference to the direction
which it is facing (i.e. extreme left of an observer facing the masts flying
the Flags). The position is illustrated in the diagram below:-
3.37 When the National Flag is flown with flags of other countries, the flag
masts shall be of equal size. International usage forbids the display of the
flag of one nation above that of another nation in time of peace.
3.38 The National Flag shall not be flown from a single mast-head simultaneously
with any other flag or flags. There shall be separate mast-heads for different
flags.

84
 Section VII1
DISPLAY OVER PUBLIC BUILDINGS / OFFICIAL RESIDENCES
3.39 Normally the National Flag should be flown only on important public
buildings such as High Courts, Secretariats, Commissioners' Offices,
Collectorates, Jails and offices of the District Boards, Municipalities and

Zilla Parishads and Departmental/Public Sector Undertakings.

3.40 In frontier areas, the National Flag may be flown on the border customs
posts, check posts, out posts and at other special places where flying of the
Flag has special significance. In addition, it may be flown on the camp
sites of border patrols.
3.41 The National Flag should be flown on the official residences of the President,
Vice-President, Governors and Lieutenant Governors when they are at
Headquarters and on the building in which they stay during their visits to
places outside the Headquarters. The Flag flown on the official residence
should, however, be brought down as soon as the dignitary leaves the
Headquarters and it should be re-hoisted on that building as he enters the
main gate of the building on return to the Headquarters. When the dignitary
is on a visit to a place outside the Headquarters, the Flag should be hoisted
on the building in which he stays as he enters the main gate of that building
and it should be brought down as soon as he leaves that place. However, the
Flag should be flown from sun-rise to sun-set on such official residences,
irrespective of whether the dignitary is at Headquarters or not on the - Republic
Day, Independence Day, Mahatama Gandhi's Birthday, National Week (6th
to 13th April, in the memory of martyrs of Jalianwala Bagh), any other
particular day of national rejoicing as may be specified by the Government of
India or, in the case of a State, on the anniversary of formation of that State.

85
3.42 When the President, the Vice-President or the Prime Minister visits an
institution, the National Flag may be flown by the institution as a mark of
respect.
3.43 On the occasions of the visit to India by foreign dignitaries, namely,
President, Vice-President, Emperor / King or Heir Prince and the Prime
Minister, the National Flag may be flown along with the Flag of the foreign
country concerned in accordance with the rules contained in Section VII by
such private institutions as are according reception to the visiting foreign
dignitaries and on such public buildings as the foreign dignitaries intend to
visit on the day of visit to the institution.
Section 1X
DISPLAY ON MOTOR CARS
3.44 The privilege of flying the National Flag on motor cars is limited to the:-
(1) President;
(2) Vice-President;
(3) Governors and Lieutenant Governors;
(4) Heads of Indian Missions/Posts abroad in the countries to which they
are accredited;
(5) Prime Minister and other Cabinet Ministers; Ministers of State and
Deputy Ministers of the Union; Chief Minister and other Cabinet
Ministers of a State or Union Territory; Ministers of State and Deputy
Ministers of a State or Union Territory;
(6) Speaker of the Lok Sabha; Deputy Chairman of the Rajya Sabha;
Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha; Chairmen of Legislative Councils
in States Speakers of Legislative Assemblies in States and Union
territories. Deputy Chairmen of Legislative Councils in States; Deputy
Speakers of Legislative Assemblies in States and Union territories;
(7) Chief Justice of India; Judges of Supreme Court; Chief Justice of
High Courts; Judges of High Courts.
3.45 The dignitaries mentioned in Clauses (5 ) to (7) of paragraph 3.44 may fly
the National Flag on their cars, whenever they consider it necessary or
advisable.
3.46 When a foreign dignitary travels in a car provided by Government, the
National Flag will be flown on the right side of the car and the Flag of the
foreign countries will be flown on the left side of the car.

86
 Section X
DISPLAY ON TRAINS / AIRCRAFTS
3.47 When the President travels by special train within the country, the National
Flag should be flown from the driver's cab on the side facing the platform
of the station from where the train departs. The Flag should be flown only
when the special train is stationary or when coming into the station where it
is going to halt.
3.48 The National Flag will be flown on the aircraft carrying the President, the
Vice-President or the Prime Minister on a visit to a foreign country.
Alongside the National Flag, the Flag of the country visited should also be
flown but, when the aircraft lands in countries enroute, the National Flags
of the countries touched would be flown instead, as a gesture of courtesy
and goodwill.
3.49 When the President goes on tour within India, the National Flag will be
displayed on the side by which the President will embark the aircraft or
disembark from it.
SECTION XI
HALF-MASTING
3.50 In the event of the death of the following dignitaries, the National Flag
shall be half-masted at the places indicated against each on the day of the
death of the dignitary:-
Dignitary Place or places
President
Vice-President Throughout India
Prime Minister
Speaker of the Lok Sabha Delhi
Chief Justice of India
Union Cabinet Minister Delhi and State Capitals
Minister of State or Deputy Delhi
Minister of the Union
Governor
Lt. Governor
Chief Minister of a State Throughout the State or Union
Chief Minister of a Union Territory Territory concerned.
Cabinet Minister in a State Capital of the State concerned

87
3.51 If the intimation of the death of any dignitary is received in the afternoon,
the Flag shall be half-masted on the following day also at the place or places
indicated above, provided the funeral has not taken place before sun-rise
on that day.
3.52 On the day of the funeral of a dignitary mentioned above, the Flag shall be
half-masted at the place where the funeral takes place.
3.53 If State mourning is to be observed on the death of any dignitary, the Flag
shall be half-masted throughout the period of the mourning throughout India
in the case of the Union dignitaries and throughout the State or Union
territory concerned in the case of a State or Union territory dignitary.
3.54 Half-masting of the Flag and, where necessary, observance of State mourning
on the death of foreign dignitaries will be governed by special instructions
which will issue from the Ministry of Home Affairs in individual cases.
3.55 Notwithstanding the above provisions, in the event of a half-mast day
coinciding with the Republic Day, Independence Day, Mahatama Gandhi's
Birthday, National Week (6th to 13th April, in the memory of martyrs of
Jalianwala Bagh), any other particular day of national rejoicing as may be
specified by the Government of India or, in the case of a State, on the
anniversary of formation of that State, the Flags shall not be flown at half-
mast except over the building where the body of the deceased is lying until
such time it has been removed and that Flag shall be raised to the full-mast
position after the body has been removed.
3.56 If mourning were to be observed in a parade or procession where a Flag is
carried, two streamers of black crepe shall be attached to the spear head,
allowing the streamers to fall naturally. The use of black crepe in such a
manner shall be only by an order of the Government.
3.57 When flown at half-mast, the Flag shall be hoisted to the peak for an instant,
then lowered to the half-mast position, but before lowering the Flag for the
day, it shall be raised again to the peak.
Note : By half-mast is meant hauling down the Flag to one half the distance
betweenthe top and the guy-line and in the absence of the guy-line, half of
the staff.
3.58 On occasions of State/Military/Central Para-Military Forces funerals, the
Flag shall be draped over the bier or coffin with the saffron towards the
head of the bier or coffin. The Flag shall not be lowered into the grave or
burnt in the pyre.

88
3.59 In the event of death of either the Head of the State or Head of the
Government of a foreign country, the Indian Mission accredited to that
country may fly the National Flag at half-mast even if that event falls on
Republic Day, Independence Day, Mahatama Gandhi's Birthday, National
Week (6th to 13th April, in the memory of martyrs of Jalianwala Bagh) or
any other particular day of national rejoicing as may be specified by the
Government of India. In the event of death of any other dignitary of that
country, the National Flag should not be flown at half-mast by the Missions
except when the local practice or protocol (which should be ascertained
from the Dean of the Diplomatic Corps, where necessary) require that the
National Flag of a Foreign Mission in that country should also be flown at
half-mast.

89
 CHAPTER XI
DRILL WITH 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE
RD-16 5.56 MM INSAS RIFLE PRESENT ARM FROM ORDER ARM
AND ORDER ARM FROM PRESENT ARM.
OBJECTIVE :
1. During this period one more lesson on Arms Drill will be covered, that is
Present Arm from Order Arm and Order Arm from Present Arm. Firstly,
Present Arm from Order Arm. Now, the demonstration of the movement.
NECESSITY:
2. Present arm is considered to be a drill by which a person pays respect to a
senior. In ceremonial parades VIP is presented with present arm. All officers
above the rank of Dy.Commandant/Major has to be presented with present
arms.
PARTS:
3. The lesson will be completed in two parts.
PART-I PRESENT ARM FROM THE ORDER ARM DEMONSTRATION:
4. Word of command (for me i.e. the instructor), Arm drill, Present Arm (Salami
Shastra) by number, one-two-three-one (ek-do-tin-ek), two-three-one (do-
tin-ek), two-three-one (do-tin-ek) two-three-one (do-tin-ek). As you were
(jaise the). Now watch this movement by number.
DEMONSTRATION BY NUMBER :
5. Word of command for me, Arm Drill, Present Arm by number one-one (ek-
ek), Squad two-two (do-do), and Squad three-three (tin-tin), Squad four-
four (char-char). As you were. Now watch this movement by number and
with explanation.
DEMONSTRATION BY NUMBER AND EXPLANATION:
6. When you are in Order Arm and receive word of command, Arm Drill,
Present Arm by number one (ek), catch the forehand guard from left hand
and shout one (ek). Watch this movement.
7. Word of Command for me Arm drill, Present Arm by number one-one (ek-
ek). In this position point to note: -
z Catch the forehand guard by the left hand, all four fingers from out
and thumb from inside.
z Wrist to elbow of left hand in the line of waist belt.
z Body position at rest, as earlier.

90
As you were. Now practice this motion by number on my Word of Command.
PRACTICE :
8. On Instructor's word of command squad will practices stage number 1 by
number.
9. On Instructor's Word of Command squad practices first motion on their
own.
DEMONSTRATION :
10. Instructor resumes the class with rifle in number 1 position. When you receive
Word of command Squad two (do), strike right hand on the butt. Shouting
two (do). Check the movement till this position. Squad two-two (do-do). In
this position point to note: -
z Right hand on the small of the butt.
z All four fingers from out and thumb from inside pointing towards the
ground.
As you were. Now practice of this motion by number on my word of command.
PRACTICE :
11. On Instructor's word of command squad will practice stage number 2 by
numbers.
12. On Instructor's word of command squad practices second motion on their
own.
DEMONSTRATION:
13. Instructor resume class from rifle in number 2 position. When you receive
Word of command Squad three (tin). Raise the rifle with both hand in front
and centre of the body, at the same time place left hand on the left side of
rifle. Shouting three (tin). Check movements till this position. Squad three-
three (tin-tin). In this position point to note: -
z Rifle in front and centre of the body and errect at 90 degree.
z Magazine in front of the face.
z Wrist to elbow of left hand touching the rifle.
z All four fingers and thumb together and extended and thumb touching
the lower corner of forehand guard.
z Hold small of the butt with right hand. All four fingers from out and
thumb from inside. Rest position in attention.
As you were. Practice this motion on my word of command.

91
PRACTICE :
14. On Instructor's word of command squad will practice stage number 3 by
number.
15. On Instructor's word of command squad practices first motion on their own
DEMONSTRATION :
16. Instructor resumes the class with rifle in number 3 position. When you receive
Word of command squad four (char). Pull down the rifle by right hand.
Catch the fore hand guard of the rifle by left hand at the same time place
right foot with left foot in marching position. Shout four (char). Check
movement till this position. Squad four-four (char-char). In this position
point to note:-
z Left hand on the forehand guard, thumb pointing towards the barrel.
z Right hand on the small of the butt, all four fingers from out and
thumb from inside, right and left foot in marching position.
As you were. On my word of command squad will practice of this movement.
17. On Instructor's word of command squad will practices by number.
18. On Instructor's word of command squad will practice on their own.
19. On Instructor's word of command squad practices counting the time.
20. On Instructor's word of command squad practices estimating the time
themselves.
PART- II ORDER ARM FROM PRESENT ARM
21. Now Order Arm from Present Arm.
DEMONSTRATION :
22. Word of command (for me i.e. for instructor), Order Arm one-two-three-
one (ek-do-tin-ek), two-three-one (do-tin-ek), two- three-one, (do-tin-ek).
As you were. Now watch this movement by number.
DEMONSTRATION BY NUMBER :
23 Word of command for me, Arm drill, Order Arm by number one-one (ek-
ek), squad two-two (do-do), Squad three-three (tin-tin). As you were. Now
watch this movement by number and explanation.
DEMONSTRATION BY NUMBER AND EXPLANATION :
24. When you get word of command Order Arm by number one (ek), and you
are in Present Arm, place right hand on pistol grip at the same time put the
right foot up in line with the left as in attention position. Shouting one (ek).
(Check movement till this position).

92
25. Word of command for me, Arm drill, Order Arm by number one-one (ek-
ek). In this position point to note:-
z Catch pistol grip by right hand, all four fingers from lower and thumb
from upper side of pistol grip.
z Right foot in attention position.
z Remaining position remains same.
When you get word of command squad two (do), bring rifle on right side of body
with both hands. Shouting two (do). (Check movement till this position). Squad
two-two (do-do). In this position point to note:-
z Wrist to elbow of left hand parallel to belt.
z Catch fore hand guard , fingers from out and thumb from inside.
z Rifle in right side of body.
z Right hand on pistol grip.
Word of command received squad three (tin), place left hands in attention
position. Shouting three (tin). (Check movement till this position). Squad three-
three (tin- tin). In this position point to note:-
z Rifle in right side on 90 degree angle.
z Catch pistol grip by right hand.
z Position as in Order Arm or Attention position.
As you were. Squad will practice of same movement on my word of command.
PRACTICE :
26. On Instructor's word of command squad will practices by number.
27. On Instructor's word of command squad will practice on their own
28. On Instructor's word of command squad practices counting the time.
29. On Instructor's word of command squad practices estimating the time
themselves.
NOTE: 5.56 INSAS rifle is different from 7.62 mm SLR in its size and weight so
there is some differences in Arms drill of 5.56 INSAS. Drill with this rifle will be
as under-
z 5.56 mm INSAS rifle will always remain on left side as in side arm in
SLR This position will be called Order Arm in INSAS.
z Attention and stand at ease with 5.56 rifle will be always in Order
arm position. On word of command stand easy, Rifle will be in front
and centre of the body, catch fore hand guard by left hand. On word

93
 of command Parade, Squad or as you were, Rifle will again be in
Order Arm position.
z The drill in INSAS is different from SLR and there is no motion /
word of command of Side arm and Order arm in INSAS is not similar
to Order arm in SLR.
z If at the same parade, both, 7.62mm SLR and 5.56 mm INSAS is
included for drill, on word of command of Present Arm troops with
SLR will stop in Number 2 motion to match drill movements of four
motion of 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle. No. 2 and No. 3 motion of SLR will
be No.3 and No. 4 motion of 5.56 mm INSAS Rifle.

94
 CHAPTER XII
SQUAD DRILL AT THE HALT
Section 1
Formation Of Squads With Interval
A few men will be placed in single rank at arm’s length apart; while so
formed, they will be termed a squad with intervals.
Instruction can best be imparted to a squad in single rank but, if want of
space makes it necessary, the squad may consist of two ranks, in which case the
men of the rear rank will cover the intervals between the men in the front rank so
that in marching they may take their points, as directed in Chapter IV, Section 2.
When recruits have learned to dress as described in Section 5 they will be
taught to fall in, and to dress and correct the intervals immediately without any
further order.
Care must be taken that the positions of recruits in the ranks are changed
frequently, as they must be taught to dress correctly in any position in the squad.
Section 2
Attention
“Squad—Attention” (Squad—Savdhan).
Spring up to the following position: — Heels together and in line. Feet
turned out at an angle of about 30 degrees. Knees straight. Body erect and carried
evenly over the thighs with the shoulders (which should be level and square to
the front) down and moderately back—this should bring the chest to the natural
forward position without any straining or stiffening. Arms hanging from the
shoulders as straight as the natural bend of the arms will allow. Wrists straight,
hands closed and slightly clenched, backs of the fingers slightly touching the
thigh, thumbs to the front and close to the forefinger, thumb immediately behind
the seam of the trousers / shorts. Neck erect. Head balanced evenly on the neck
and not poked forward, eyes looking their own height and straight to the front.
The weight of the body should be balanced evenly on both feet and evenly
distributed between the forepart of the feet and the heels.
The breathing must not in any way be restricted and no part of the body
should be either drawn in or pushed out.
The position is one of readiness in expectation of the word of command
and is also adopted when speaking to or being addressed by a superior officer.
Common faults:
(i) A strained and exaggerated position , causing breathing to be restricted;

95
 (ii) Unsteadiness and movement of the eyes;
(iii) Feet and body not square to the front, heels not closed, one foot more
extended then the other;
(iv) Arms slightly bent and creeping forward;
(v) Backs of the hands to the front, thereby opening the shoulder blades
and constricting the chest.
Section 3
Standing At Ease
Stand –at –Ease ( Vishram )
Carry the left foot about 12 inches to the left so that the weight of the body
rests equally on both feet. At the same time carry the hands behind the back and
place the back of the right hand in the palm of the left, grasping it lightly with the
finger and thumb, and allowing the arms to hand at their full extent.
When a recruit falls in, he will stand at ease after he has got his dressing.
Common faults:
(1) Failure to carry the foot off 12 inches;
(2) Movement of the right foot with consequent loss of dressing;
(3) Bending at the waist when picking the foot up.
Section 4
Standing Easy
Stand-Easy (Aram-Se)
The limbs head, and body may be moved but the man will not move his
feet. So that on coming to attention there will be no loss of dressing. Slouching
attitydes are not to be permitted. If either foot is moved men are inclined to lose
their dressing.
On the caution “Squad” etc., the correct position of Stand–At –Ease will be
Assumed.
Common faults:
(i) Moving the feet, there by losing dressing.
(ii) Slouching and talking.
Section 5
Dressing A Squad With Intervals
Dressing in single rank
“Right or Left—Dress” (Dahine/Baen—Saj)
96
 Each man, except the man on the named flank, will take a short sharp pace
(IS inches) forward, pause, turn his head and eyes to the right/left (for right dress
to the right and for left dress to the left) and at the same time extend his right arm,
(left if carrying a rifle in Order Arm—Baju Sastra position) with fist clenched,
knuckles touching the shoulder of the man on his right (left if carrying a rifle).
He will then take up his dressing in line by moving with short quick steps, till he
is just able to distinguish the lower part of the face of the third man beyond him.
Care must be taken to carry the body backward or forward with the feet, the
shoulders being kept perfectly square in their original position. When the squad
is correctly dressed, the instructor will give the command—
‘Eyes—front” (Samne-Dekh)
The head and eyes will be turned smartly to the front, the arm cut away to
the side, and the position of attention resumed.
Common faults:
(i) Jumping forward with both feet off the ground at once,
(ii) Feet and shoulders not held square to the front; leaning forward when
taking up the dressing.
(iii) Bending at the waist when moving the feet.
(iv) Incorrect distance, interval and covering off.
Section 6
Turning And Inclining By Numbers
1. Turning to the Right by numbers—One (Ginti Se Dahine Murna—Dahine
Mur—Ek)
Keeping both knees straight and the body erect, turn to the right (90°) on
the right heel and left toe, raising the left heel and right toe in doing so.
On the completion of this preliminary movement, the right foot must be flat
on the ground and the left heel raised; both knees straight, and the weight
of the body, which must be erect, on the right foot.
Two (Do)—Bring the left foot smartly up to the right, lifting it clear six
inches from the ground in doing so.
2. Turning to the Left by numbers—One (Ginti Se Baen murna—Baen Mur—
Ek).
As for above, except for right read left and vice versa.
Two (Do)—Bring the right foot smartly up to the left.
3. “Inclining by numbers right incline—One” (Ginti Se Adha Murna—Adha
Dahine Mur—Ek). As above but turn through 45 degrees.
97
 “Squad—Two” (Squad—Do)—As above.
NOTE : Point out at once the different aspects of dressing and covering. Each
man’s right shoulder must be in the centre of the next man’s back and
in the case of centre and rear ranks the left shoulder must point to the
centre of the back of the man originally covered off.
4. “Turning About” (by numbers)
“Turning About by Numbers, Squad — One “ (Ginti Se Piche Murna—Squad
Piche Mur — Ek)
Keeping both knees straight and the body erect, turn by the right completely
about by 180" pivoting on the right heel and the left toe, raising the right toe and
the left heel in doing so but keeping the right held firm on the ground. On the
completion of this movement the right foot must be flat on the ground and the left
heel raised, both knees straight and the weight of the body (which must be erect)
on the right foot. During the first movement of the turn, the hands must be held
close to the side and not allowed to wave about.
NOTE: (i) It is a great help to take hole of very lightly in between the thumbs
and forefingers a small piece of each trouser leg, along the seam. This
will prevent the hands from waving about. This practice must cease
after the Squad has been sufficiently practised.
(ii) It will also be great help to keep both the thighs pressed against
each other after completion of this motion, because it will help in
keeping the balance of the body.
“Squad—two” (Squad—Do)
Bring the left foot smartly up to the right lifting it clear of the ground in
doing so.
Throughout all turns the arms must be kept close to the sides as in the
position of attention.
In turning “Judging the time” commands are Right (or Left) or About-Turn,
Right (or Left) incline; the movements described above will be carried out on the
command turn or incline, observing the two distinct motions.
Common faults:
(i) The weight being put on the rear foot; allowing the heel of the forward foot
to move over the ground instead of simply pivoting.
(ii) Moving the arms, particularly when bring in the rear foot.
(iii) Bending at the waist when bringing in the foot.
(iv) Not making a square turn with the body and shoulder in the first motion.

98
MARCHING
 CHAPTER XIII
MARCHING
Section 1
Length Of Pace And Time In Marching
1. In slow and in quick time the length of pace is 30 inches; in stepping out 33
inches; in double time 40 inches; in stepping short 21 inches and in the side
pace 12 inches.
2. In slow time, 70 paces are taken in one minute. In quick time, 120 paces
equal to 100 yards in a minute are taken.
3. During the first few weeks of recruits training, however, recruits when not
in marching order, will take 130 paces a minute in quick time.
4. In double time 180 paces, equal to 200 yards a minute are taken.
5. The time for the side pace is the same as for quick time.
6. No recruit or squad of recruit should, unless unavoidable, be taught to march
without the constant use of the drum and pace stick.
The drum will first be at the time in which the men are to march, when the
squad is halted; then, from time to time, when it is in motion. While the drum is
beating at the halt, the men will give their attention to the time; when it ceases,
the instructor will put the squad in motion.
The length of the pace in marching will be corrected with the pace stick, the
accuracy of which should occasionally be tested by measurement.
7. Distances of 100 yards and 200 yards will be marked on the drill ground,
and men will be practised in keeping correct time and length of pace.
Section 2
Position In Marching
1. In marching, the recruit will maintain the position of the head and body as
directed in Chap. III Sec. 2. He must be well balanced. In slow time his
arms and hand must be kept steady by his sides. In quick time the arms,
which should be as straight as their natural bend will allow, should swing
naturally from the shoulder, hands reaching as high as the waist belt in
front and rear. Hands should be kept closed but not clenched, thumbs always
to the front.
2. It will be found difficult initially when teaching drill to recruits to obtain
correct swinging of the arms. It is, therefore, of value when instructing
recruits slightly to accentuate the height to which the arms should swing in
marching. As training progresses, this tendency slightly to exaggerate the

99
 swinging of the arms should be corrected, until the hands reach only as
high as the waist belt in front and rear. It will be found that if emphasis is
placed in instruction on swinging the arms correctly and straight to the rear,
the swing to the front develops automatically in the correct manner.
3. The legs should be swung forward freely and naturally from the hip joints,
each leg as it swings forward being bent sufficiently at the knee to enable
the foot to clear the ground. The foot should be carried straight to the front,
and, without being drawn back, placed upon the ground with the knee
straight, but so as not to jerk the body. Any tendency to turn the toes outwards
or inwards or both will be checked.
4. Although several recruits may be drilled together in a squad with intervals,
they must act independently, precisely as if they were being instructed singly.
They will thus learn to march in dressing and to take a correct pace, both as
regards length and time, without reference to the other men of the squad.
5. Before the squad is put in motion the instructor will take care that each man
is square to the front and in dressing with the remainder. The recruit will be
taught to take a point straight to his front, by fixing his eyes upon some
distant object, and when observing some nearer point in the same, straight
line. The same procedure will be followed by the men on the named flank.
Section 3
Marching In Quick And Slow Time
1. The Slow March
Slow time is used to teach movement on the march before demanding them
in quick time. It is taught by means of “balancing step” as follows:
Slow March—by number—One (Dhire chal Gintise—Ek)
Shoot the left foot forward 15 inches toe turned over very slightly and
pointing towards the ground but just clear of it; upper part of the body erect; arms
still to the sides; weight of the body on the right leg.
Squad—two: (Squad Do)
Complete the pace of thirty inches, the toes touching the ground first, bring
the weight of the body on left leg, the right leg being to the rear and very slightly
bent so as to bring the toes just clear of the ground.
Squad—Forward: (Squad Agebarh)
Complete the pace with the right foot as described for the left foot, swinging
the leg forward smoothly, and without checking when the leg is straightened out
in front of the body. This movement may be continued until the squad has got its
balance; and until instead of “Forward” the command “Squad-Halt” is given.

100
 During recruit training squad drill should be frequently practised in slow
time only. The executive words of command will be Slow-March. The men will
step off and march as described for Quick-March, but in slow time, and keeping
the arms and hands steady at the sides, thumbs to the front. Each leg will be
brought forward in one even motion and will be straightened as it comes to the
front with the toes pointed downwards and placed on the ground before the heel.
It is difficult to over-estimate the training value to the policeman, especially
the recruit, of well executed drill in Slow Time, since it ensures a correct grounding
in drill and prevents the development of basic errors and faults which often go
unchecked in quick time. Over and above its value in ensuring a correct foundation-
for drill, drill in Slow Time teaches the policeman balance and control of his
body and is of great value in developing correct bearing and carriage. The recruit
should not be allowed to drill in quick time until he has perfected the various
movements in slow time—only then can the instructors be certain that he is building
on a firm foundation.
Slow March in judging time
Squad Age Badhega Dahinese—Dhire-Chal
Shoot the left foot forward by 15 inches and maintaining the correct pause
complete the pace of 30 inches and touch the ground. The moment left foot touches
the ground shoot the right foot forward by 15 inches. Repeat these motions
alternatively keeping the required paused after taking the left / right foot 15 inches
forward.
Halt: (Tham): While practicing slow march by number the command for
halt will be given after the motions of “Squad-two” is over i.e. instead of “Squad-
One” the command “Squad-Halt (Squad-Tham)” is given.
While practicing slow march by judging the time the command “Squad-
Halt (Squad-Tham)” will be given when the left foot is coming to the ground and
is level with the right. On this command, complete the pace of 30 inches by the
left foot taking the correct pause and then the moment left foot touches the ground,
shoot the right foot forward and bring it on the ground in line with the left in
double time, so as to assume the position of attention.
2. The Quick March
Quick March-by number-one (Tez chal-Gintise—ek)
Shoot the left foot forward 30 inches; toe turned upward, heel touching
firmly on the ground; upper part of the body erect; weight of the body equally on
both the legs, heel of the right leg raised but the toe touching the ground; position
of the hand as described in section 2 above (i.e., right hand forward and left hand
backward).
Squad-two: (Squad—Do)

101
 Push the body forward and simultaneously take the right foot forward by
slightly bending the right knee and a full pace of 30 inches; right heel touching
the ground and toe ratted: left heel raised and toe touching the ground; weight of
the body on both legs While doing thi s motion the hands should also be
interchanged simultaneously (i.e. left hand taken forward and the right hand
brought backward).
NOTE : To continue these motions by numbers, the words of command will
be “Squad One (Squad-Ek)” and “Squad Two (Squad-Do)” to bring
the left foot and right foot forward respectively. These movements
may be continued until the word of command
“Squad-Halt (Squad-Tham)” is given
“Quick March Judging time”
“Squad will advance by the right-Quick March (Squad Age Badhega
Dahinese TezChai)”
The Squad will step off together with the left foot, taking it 30 inches forward
in one simple motion and then touching the ground by the heel. After this, the
same movement may be done for the right foot and then alternatively the left and
right. Simultaneously the hand should be swung forward and backward as
described in para 18-2 above.
3. The Halt : —The word of command “Squad-Halt (Squad-Tham)” will be
given when the right foot touches the ground. After that, a pace of 30 inches is
completed with the left foot and then the right foot brought up in line with the
left. At the same time the right and left hands will be cut smartly to the sides.
Common faults
(a) Marching in Slow time:
(i) Heels touching the ground first,
(ii) Elbows away from the sides,
(iii) Hands gripped to the leg and therefore moving at each pace,
(iv) Not keeping the weight of the body on the rear foot, thereby
loosing balance;
(v) Not shooting the rear foot to a distance of 15 inches forward
very smartly the moment the front foot touches the ground.
(b) Marching in Quick time:
(i) Not marching on the heels,
(ii) At all times unequal arm swinging, loss of the rhythm, lack of
dressing and covering, stiffening the legs too much and scraping
the ground when feet move forward,

102
 (iii) Bending the arms at the elbow.
(c) Halting (Both slow and quick time):
(i) Bending the front foot from the knee or and bending from the
waist,
(ii) Bending the arms,
(iii) Looking down,
(iv) Swaying about immediately after the halt.
4. Stepping Out
Step—Out (Lamba Qadam)
The moving foot will complete its pace, and the man will lengthen the pace
by three inches, leaning forward a little, but without altering the time.
This step is used when a slight increase of speed without an alteration of
time is required. On the command Quick (or Slow) March the normal length of
pace will be resumed.
5. Stepping Short
Step—Short (Chhota Qadam)
The foot advancing will complete its pace, after which the pace will be
shortened by nine inches until the command Quick (or Slow) March is given,
when the normal length of pace will be resumed.
6. Marking Time Mark—Time (Qadam Tal)
The foot then advancing will complete its pace, after which the time will be
continued, without advancing, by raising each foot alternately about six inches
keeping the foot almost parallel with the ground (this can be achieved by pressing
the toe downward), the knee raised to the front, the arms steady at the sides, and
the body steady. On the command “Forward’*, the quick pace at which the men
were moving will be resumed.
In slow time the feet should be raised twelve inches when marking time,
the ball of the foot being immediately below the point of the knee, toes pointing
downwards.
Common faults :-
(i) Not remaining stationary on the same ground with consequent loss of
dressing or interval.
(ii) Movement of the body shoulders or arms.
(iii) Looking down.
(iv) Increasing the time above that of marching.

103
 (v) A tendency to lean forward.
(vi) Raising the foot so that it is too far back instead of with the toe under
the point of the knee.
Section 4
Paces Forward and To the Rear
.... Paces Forward/Step back March (Qadam Age/Pichhe chal)
Forward / Step Back the named number of paces of 30 inches straight to the
front/rear commencing with the left foot and keeping the arms still by the sides.
The maximum number of paces that the man will be ordered to step forward
or to the rear will be four.
Common faults:
(i) Hurrying the movement so that an incorrect length of pace is taken.
(ii) Bending the leg that is taking the step forward, and “hopping”, with
both feet off the ground.
(iii) Bending at the waist.
Section 5
Changing Step In Slow And Quick Time
NOTE :- This should be taught by numbers, starting with Slow Time.
“ Changing step by numbers, Left foot leading”
1. “Change step—One” (Qadam-Badal-Ek) [given as the right foot
reaches die ground]. Complete the pace with the left foot so that the
left foot is flat on the ground and 30 .inches in front of the right foot.
2. “Squad—Two” (Squad-Do) Bring the right foot forward so that the
foot is placed flat on the ground with the hollow in the heel of the left
foot.
3. “Squad— Three” (Squad-Teen) Shoot the left foot forward placing
the foot flat on the ground 30 inches in front of the right foot.
4. Changing step with the right foot leading can be taught in a smaller
manner. except that for “left” read “right” in each case.
5. Having taught the movements by numbers the squad carry on without
interruption. The first and third movements are done at the rate of
matching. The second movement is done in double that time. The
word of command is given on alternate and successive feet.
6. Changing step in quick time is taught by numbers in a similar way
and the words of command and movements are identical.

104
 7. Changing step marking time — the word of command is given on
alternate and successive feet. If “Change” is given on the left foot,
and “Step” on the right foot, two beats will be made with the left foot
in the same time as the marching, after which normal marking time
will be resumed. If given on the opposite foot, two beats will be made
with the right foot.
The movements are the same in slow and quick time.
Common faults
(a) When marching
(i) Swinging the shoulders.
(ii) Not taking a full pace for the third movement
(b) When marking time
(i) Body rolling.
(ii) Increasing the rate of marching.
Section 6
Marching In Double Time
1. The Double March
Squad will Advance, Double March (Squad Age Barhega-Daur Ke-chal)
Step off with the left foot and double on the toes with easy swinging strides,
inclining the body slightly forward. But maintaining its correct carriage. The feet
must be picked up cleanly from the ground at each pace, and the thigh, knee and
ankle joints must all work freely and without stiffness. The whole body should be
carried forward by a thrust from the rear foot without unnecessary effort. The
heels must not be raised towards the seat, but the tout carried straight to the front
and the toes placed lightly on the ground. The arms should swing easily from the
shoulders and should be bent at the elbow, the forearm forming an angle of about
135 degrees with the upper arm (i.e. midway between a straight arm and a right
angle at the elbow), fists slightly clenched, backs of the hands outwards, and the
arms swung sufficiently clear of the body to allow full freedom for the chest. The
shoulders should be kept steady and square to the front and the head erect.The
length of pace will be 40 inches and the rate of marching 180 paces in a minute.
Common faults:
(i) Swinging the shoulders.
(ii) Looking down.
(iii) Stepping too long at the head of the squad thus causing straggling in
rear.

105
 (iv) Running on the heels and loss of dressing, distance and interval.
(v) Hurrying the rate of marching.
2. Marking Time
As for quick time, except that the ball of the foot only is put to the ground
and the arms are kept to the side in the bent position. The rate of double marching
is maintained.
3. Halting
As for quick rime, at the same time cutting the anus to the side. The word of
command “Halt” (Tham) is given in both cases, as the right foot touches the
ground, after which three more paces are taken starting from the left foot and halt
is achieved on the found pace on the right foot. These three paces are required to
check the more rapid movement of the body before gaining the position of
attention. It is, however, normal to break into quick time before ordering “Halt”
from double time.
Common faults:
(i) Hoping with both feet off the ground at once,
(ii) Loss of precision in halting.
Section 7
Breaking Into Slow, Quick And Double Time
1. Breaking into quick time from slow time.
“Break into quick tune quick march”, (Tej Chal Men Aa, Tej Chal). The
executive words of command are given on successive paces, “Quick” as the left
foot reaches the ground. “March” as the right foot reaches the ground. Swing the
left leg and right arm forward, and the left arm to the rear in the correct rate of
marching; continue marching in quick time.
Common faults :
(i) Making the first pace too hurriedly thereby failing to gain correct
rhythm at the start
(ii) Stamping the left foot on the ground in the first pace, thereby losing
height.
(iii) Failing to swing the left arm to the rear,
(iv) Left foot not taking 30 inches forward.
2. Breaking into slow time from quick time
The words of command will be “Break into slow time, slow march”, (Dhire
Chal Men Aa, Dhire Chal). The change into slow time will be done without

106
pause. The executive word of command “March” is given as the left foot is level
with and passing the right. On this command the right foot is taken to the front
fully 30 inches in the usual speed. This movement will act as a check pace after
which the left foot is taken to the front 15 inches and then another 15 inches as
per slow march (Dhire chal). Also when the right foot (check pace) come to the
ground both the hands are cut sharply to the sides.
Common faults :
(i) Swinging the right shoulder to the rear,
(ii) Allowing the body to lean backwards.
(iii) Failure to cut the arms into the side sharply enough.
3. Breaking into double time from quick time
“Break into double time, double March” (Daur Chaal Men Aa, Daur Ke
Chal). The executive word of command ‘March’ (Chal) is given as the left foot
reaches the ground. After this a full pace of 30 inches is taken by the right foot
and then break into double time swinging the leg forward at the correct rate of
marching, i.e. 180 paces to the minute; at the same time bend the arms.
Common faults :
(i) Immediate relaxation of control and loss of rhythm.
(ii) Allowing the head to roll forward.
4. Breaking into quick time from double time
“Break into quick time, quick—march”. (Tej Chaal Men Aa, Tej Chal). The
executing words of command— “Quick March” are given on successive paces,
“Quick” as the left foot reaches the ground and “March” as the right foot reaches
the ground.
Complete two more paces in double time, checking the pace to 30 inches
and then break automatically into quick time.
Common faults:
Failure to march correctly at once.
Section 8
The Side Pace
1. The side pace (12 inches) is used to move the squad up to twelve paces to a
flank—(If greater than twelve paces the squad should be “turned” and
moved).
The exact number of paces, up to four, can be specified, when the squad
will halt automatically; or the squad will continue moving until halted.

107
 It is usual to teach the side pace to the left first as a direct “follow on” from
the stand at ease.
2. “……….....paces left close — march “ ( Qadam Baen Baju — Chal ) Carry
the left foot off 12 inches to the left (as for the stand at ease), instantly
closing the right foot to it in a similar manner and in double time, thus
completing the pace. Continue the movement until the specified number of
paces has been completed. Except for the movement of the feet the correct
position of attention will be maintained.
3. “Left close — march “ ( Baen Baju — Chal ), Number of paces not being
specified, continue the movement until halted or eight paces completed.
4. “Squad—halt” (Squad—Tham) The word of command will be given as the
heels are together. The squad will complete one more pace and remain steady.
Common faults:
(i) Uneven pace, loss of covering and dressing,
(ii) Failure to close the heels at each pace,
(iii) A tendency to “hop” instead of bringing the right foot in sharply as
the left foot touches the ground.
Section 9
Turning When On The March
1. Turnings on the march are first taught in slow time. They are taught
by numbers.
2. Throughout all turnings on the march, the correct position of marching
must be maintained. The turn must be made squarely to the new
direction and covering, dressing, distance, and interval must be
corrected by each individual member of the squad immediately after
turning.
3 — 104 BPR & D / 74
(a) Right (or Left)—Turn. [Dahine (ya Baen)—Mur]
On the command Right (or Left)—Turn, the left (or right) foot will be
brought forward until it is just in front of the right (or left) foot, and each man
will then turn smartly in the required direction, using his left (or right) foot as a
pivot, and advance a full pace of 30 inches in the new direction with the right (or
left) foot.
The turn to the right must be made off the left foot and to the left off the
right foot.
(b) About-Turn. (Pichhe Mur)

108
 Complete the pace with the right foot, and then commence the turn with the
left foot, the turn being completed in three beats of the time in which the squad
is marching. Having completed the turn about, the squad will at once move
forward, the fourth pace being a full one and taken with the right foot. While in
quick march, after getting the orders About-Turn. (Pichhe Mur) when the right
foot comes to the ground both the arms should be cut sharply to the sides and
kept there until the fourth pace i.e. the right foot comes forward on which the left
hand should come smartly forward and the right hand backward.
In the case of a Squad with a blank file marching in line, the blank file will
mark time two paces on the word “About”, thus gaining his position in the new
front rank before the turn is completed. Guides should set in a similar manner,
(c) Right (or Left) Incline. [Adha Dahine (ya Baen) Mur]
On the command “incline”, take a half turn in the required direction in the
same way as described in sub para (a) above.
(d) Turnings and changes on the march should always be preceded by a
cautionary word of command, e.g. Move to the right (Dhaine chalega)—The
Squad will advance (Squad Age Badhega) Break into slow time (Dhire Chal men
Aa) Diagonal march, (Adha Murega) etc.
Common faults:
(i) Not making a full and square turn with head and shoulders.
(ii) Allowing the hands and arms to swing away from the position of
attention.

109
 CHAPTER XIV
SALUTING WITHOUT ARMS
Instructors will impress upon recruits the importance of Salute. It is a method
of greeting a superior, not a servile act. It is an outward sign of the inward spirit
of discipline and respect for superiors. The general tone and feeling in a Force is
indicated as much by the manner in which the men salute and the officers return
the salute as by any other action.
A salute is, in fact, the normal greeting between comrades in arms. That a
salute is given when a subordinate meets an officer is a basic matter of discipline.
That the salute is properly and smartly given is a matter of training. Failure to
salute shows disrespect, idleness and a low standard of discipline. Failure by an
officer in uniform to insist on being saluted is a breach of discipline.
Section 1
Saluting At The Halt
1. This is a basic lesson but most often be reverted to with trained men, to
correct any bad habits which have been picked up. To permit free movement,
this is best practised with the squad in open order and inclined diagonally.
2. Saluting to the Front
(i) By Numbers.
“Salute to the Front by Number—One”, (Ginti Se Samane Siloot—Ek).
The Right arm is kept straight and raised sideways until it is horizontal, palm of
the hand to front, fingers extended, thumb close to the forefinger.
‘Two (Do) Keeping the upper arm still and the hand and wrist straight bend
the elbow until the forefinger tip of right hand is one inch above the right eye.
Points to note are:
(a) Upper arm horizontal and at right angles to the side; forearm,
wrist and fingers all in one straight line.
(b) Palm of the hand vertical and wrist not bending. “Squad—
Three” (Squad Teen) To return to the position of attention hand is
cut the shortest way to the side by dropping the elbow towards front. The fingers
are curled up on the way down.
(ii) Judging the time.
When judging the time, the right hand will be brought smartly with a motion
to the head, as taught by Numbers. The hand will remain at the position of the
salute for a regulation pause. The words of command will be: “Salute to the
Front—Salute” Samne siloot—Siloot).

110
Common faults
In coming up to the salute:
(i) Leaning to the left, straining the muscles and leaning backwards,
(ii) Elbow forward; forearm, wrist and fingers not in a straight line,
(iii) Hand too high or too far over towards the centre of the forehead;
hand tilted forward; fingers not together; moving of the left arm;
pushing the head forward.
In cutting the hand away:
(iv) Dropping the hand before the elbow,
(v) Not straightening the arm and therefore not resuming a proper position
of attention; moving the left hand when cutting the right arm away.
In general the most common fault in saluting to the front is that the movement
is started before the man has halted, stopped speaking, etc., and that he
starts speaking before the movement has been properly completed.
3. Salute to the flank
“Salute to the Right—Salute” (Dahine Siloot—Siloot) This is best taught
from the correct position of the salute to the front. Get the recruit to turn his head
and eyes square off to the right and, without upsetting the position of the right
arm, wrist or hand, to shift the hand so that the right eye can just look along the
palm of the hand. The recruit should look along his own height or into the eyes of
the officer he is saluting. This must be practised until the movements of the head,
eyes and hands become simultaneous.
Common faults:
(i) Leaning forward, looking along the back of the hand or not looking
the officer squarely in the face,
(ii) Hand too high,
(iii) Left shoulder allowed coming forward,
(iv) Right elbow allowed coming forward and dropping or falling to
the rear. (v) Not looking square off to the flank,
(vi) Raising the wrist.
4. Salute to the Left—Salute”, (Baen Siloot—Siloot) Taught as above head
and eyes turned smartly to the left, the right hand, wrist and arm being pushed
further over to the left to the correct position above the right eye.
Common faults:
(i) Turning the shoulder to the left and allowing the right elbow to drop
forward.

111
 (ii) Not allowing the right hand to move over to its correct position,
(iii) Dropping the wrist.
Section 2
Saluting on the March
1. Saluting on the march may be to a flank or to the front and may be done in
quick or slow time.
2. “Salute to the right (left)—Salute” (Dahine/’Baen ko Siloot—Squad Siloot)
Given as the left foot comes to the ground. Come up to the salute the next
time the left foot touches the ground and cut the hand down after the sixth
pace counted from the first right foot after the salute.
3. When passing an officer
When a subordinate passes an officer, he will salute on the third pace before
reaching him, and lower the hand on the third pace after passing him. During
the salute the man will look the officer full in the face.
NOTE: (i) Recruits will be practised in marching two or three together, sa-
luting “points” being placed on either side. When several men
are together, the man nearest the “point” will give the time.
(ii) They should be practised in saluting “points” on the move as
well as fixed saluting “points”.
Common faults:
“In addition to the faults already mentioned, there is a tendency to swing
the shoulders and to stray from the direction of marching in the direction of the
salute. This latter fault is corrected in instruction by getting an instructor to act as
a guide to the squad.
4. Salute to the Front
“Salute to the front—Salute”, (Samne Siloot—Siloot) The word of command
is given as for the “Halt” i.e. when the left-foot comes to the ground in slow
march and the right foot comes to the ground in quick march: The squad will halt,
salute to the front, wait for a regulation pause, salute to the front again, pause,
turn about, pause and lead off in quick or slow-time as the case may be.
NOTE: (i) This is the drill movement to teach how to approach an officer.
(ii) Instructors will insist on the correct counting of the regulation
pause.
(iii) During initial training saluting to the front may be practised in
slow time but when actually reporting to a superior officer it
must be done in quick march.

112
5. Salute to the Front with a message
“Salute to the front with a message—Squad Salute” (Sandesh Ke sath
Samneko Siloot—Squad—Siloot) The words of command will be given exactly
as to para 4 above. The action will also done as described in Para 4 above except
that after the first salute the person reporting should take one step forward,
handover the message and then take one step back walk, before saluting for the
second time
Section 3
Dismissing without Arms
“Line Tor” when the squad is to be given a short break after which they are
required to re-form, the word of command ‘Line Tor’ is given.
1. On the word of command Line Tor’, the squad will turn to the right and
after a pause equal to two beats in quick time they will break ranks and
leave the place. No salute is required to be given for this movement.
2. “Swasthan” - This word of command is given when the squad has to be
dismissed from a hall or a classroom.
On the word of command ‘Swasthan’ the class will sit steady with both,
their hands in a straight position on their knees. Thereafter they will stand
and leave the place. No salute is required to be given.
3. “Visarjan (Dismiss)” - This word of command is given when the squad is to
be dismissed and they are not required to reform.
On the word of command ‘Visarjan’ The squad will turn to the right, salute
(the head and eyes will be turned towards the officer) and after a pause equal to
two beats in quick time - break rank - and leave the parade ground in quick time.
Common faults:
There is a tendency to regard ‘Dismiss’ as the “last of a bad business”. This is a
wrong attitude and will be checked at once.The ‘Dismiss’ is a complement to the
senior rank on parade and will be made as such. Squad Instructors will at all
times watch for a good turn and check the salute whether after a drill or any other
parade.

113
 CHAPTER XV
CANE DRILL
Introduction
The Baton/Cane is a part of uniform which is normally used on special
occasions by other ranks and can be carried by officers of the rank of Sub Inspectors
and above in the normal curse of duties.
In the case of NCOs and Constable, Cane can be carried when they are
deployed for regimental duties like RP duties, Cane Orderlies and Stick Orderlies.
Section 1
Difference between Baton and Cane
The Baton is of 60 cms length and circumference of approximately 6 cms
with two silverplated metal caps of length of 4 cms. at both ends with insignia of
the organization at the top end welded to the metal cap.
The Cane has a circular knob on the top part with the insignia embossed on
it. There is a metal cap at the bottom of the Cane. The Cane may be of the following
types:
(a) Whip Cane -This is normally of length between 24" to 27". This Cane does
not have a metal knob but a leather handle at the top with 2 flaps at the bottom of
the Cane. This is used by the Equitation Wing only.
(b) Normal Cane - This Cane varies in length from 27" to 30" having circular
knob on the top end with the insignia of the organization embossed on it and a
metal cap at the bottom of the cane.
(c) Regimental Cane - This is normally of length between 30" and 33" having
a metal circular knob at the top and a metal cap at the bottom. This is thicker than
the normal cane and is decorated with silver chains etc. This is normally used by
Stick Orderlies for regimental duties or for piloting VIPs during ceremonial
parades.
The following should be avoided by a person carrying a Cane:
(1) Swinging the Cane in the hand.
(2) Hitting the Cane-on the side of the pads.
(3) Pointing at some one with the Cane.
(4) Using the Cane for drawing sketches, etc. on the ground.
Section 2
Position of Cane
1. Position of cane when at attention
The cane will be held firmly in the right hand in a perpendicular position

114
 close to the right side of the body, first joint of the forefinger of the right
hand underneath knob of cane and pointing towards the thigh; thumb across
the front of the cane, the remaining three fingers grasping the cane.
2. Position of cane when standing at ease
The back of the right hand will be in the palm of the left, the cane to be held
between the right arm and the body, ferrule pointing obliquely upwards and
to the right front.
3. Position of cane when on the march
On the command “QUICK MARCH”, step off as explained in quick march
without cane. As the left foot comes to the ground for the first time, both
hands will be brought smartly to the centre of the cane (one movement), the
cane being kept perpendicular to the right side. As the left foot comes to the
ground the second time, the left hand will be cut smartly away to the side,
the cane will be carried smartly to the right side and parallel with the ground,
balanced between the thumb and first two fingers of the right hand, ferrule
to the front. The arms to be swung as in marching without cane; the cane
being kept parallel to the ground throughout the swing.
The cane is now in the position of the trail. If the squad is moving in file,
the cane will be carried as for the position of attention.
4. Halting
On receiving the command “HALT’ canes will be kept at the trail. After a
slight pause, canes will then be brought to the position of attention in two
movements, viz.:—
(a) The cane will be seized with the left hand at the centre and brought to a
perpendicular position at the right side. Simultaneously, the right hand
will be moved to the knob of the cane as in the position of attention.
(b) The left hand will then be cut away smartly to the left side.
5. Turning About
When halted, the cane is kept in the position of attention when the squad is
turned about.
On the march, on the first movement of the about turn (Left foot), the cane
will be brought smartly to a perpendicular position in front of the right
shoulder, upper part of the cane close to the side, fore-arm horizontal, hand
in line with the waist belt. On the First pace after the turn (Right foot), the
cane will be brought to the trail.
Section 3
Saluting With Cane
1. Saluting the Front with the Cane
This procedure is adopted when delivering messages, written or verbal or
addressing an officer.

115
2. “Salute to the Front Squad—Salute” (Sumne Ko Siloot-Squad Siloot)
The Command “SALUTE” will be given as the right foot comes to the
ground (as for halt). The squad will halt, judge a pause equal to two paces
in quick time, place the cane smartly under the left arm ferrule to the rear,
cut the right hand smartly to side, salute; take one step forward, transfer the
written message, if any, to the right hand and deliver to the officer, take one
step back, salute again, turn about keeping cane under left arm, and march
off in quick time (If there is no message or anything, to be transferred and
only verbal communication is to be made it is not necessary to take one step
forward after the first salute) Pause equal to two beats in quick time should
be observed between each separate movement. As the left foot comes to the
ground for the first time, seize the cane with the right hand as near the
centre as possible with the back of the hand uppermost, thumb underneath.
On the left coming to the ground again, bring the cane smartly to the trail .
3. Saluting to the Right (or Left) with the cane on the move
“SALUTE TO THE RIGHT (or LEFT) SQUAD-SALUTE” [Dahine (Ya
Baen) Ko Siloot—Squad Siloot]
The Command “SALUTE” is given as the left foot is coming to the ground.
As the left foot comes to the ground the first time after the word “SALUTE”
place the cane smartly under the left arm, ferrule to the rear. Next time the
left foot comes to the ground (4th pace) cut the right hand smartly away to
the side and commence the salute on the 6th pace, turning the head in the
direction given. On the 12th pace (left foot) cut the right hand smartly away
to the side, turning the head to the front. On left foot coming to the ground
(14th pace) seize the cane with the right hand as near the centre as possible,
back of the hand upper-most, thumb underneath. On the left foot coming to
the ground (16th pace) bring the cane smartly to the right side at the trail.
“the left arm is not to be swung during the salute. All cane movements are
carried out on the beat of the left foot.”
Section 4
Dismissing With The Cane
“SQUAD, DISMISS” (Squad Visarjan)
The squad will turn to the right, place the cane under the left arm, ferrule to
the rear, the right hand to the side, salute (Without turning the head or eyes) and
break off in quick time. Moments will be carried out at the same pace as in quick
time, the hand being cut away to the side on the fourth pace. If there is no officer
present on the parade the squad will not salute (While turning to the right the
cane should be kept in the position of attention) .
NOTE :— If an officer carrying a cane has to keep the cane underneath the

116
 left arm during inspection or conversation with other officers, he
would hold the cane wi th the left hand fingers together and on
the left, extending the slanting upwards, thumb straight on right.
The cane would thus rest on the outside of the hand between the
thumb and the forefinger.
Section 5
Drill Movements with Marching with the Baton/Cane
(a) Bagai Cane from Buzu Cane
From the Savdhan position the Cane/Baton is to be taken to underneath the
armpit with the right hand. The right hand will be cut sharply and brought to the
side and simultaneously the left hand will be taken up toe hold the head of the
Cane fingers together and on the left extending and slanting upwards, thumb
straight and on right . The Cane would then rest on the outside of the hand between
the thumb and the forefinger.
(b) Saluting with the Cane in Bagal Cant; position
In this position while saluting, the left hand will come down as the right
hand toes up for the salute. As soon as the salute is complete and the right hand is
brought down sharply, the left hand will take up it original position on the Cane/
Baton.
(c) Bazu Cane from Bagal Cane
The right hand will move up sharply to take up the position where the Cane
was being held by the left brought down sharply to the side.
With the help of the right hand the Cane is to be pulled out from under the
left arm and brought to Bagal Cane.
(d) Bagal Cane from To I Cane
From the word of command Bagal Cane the right hand will be brought
sharply to underneath left hand keeping the knuckles upwards.
The right hand is brought down sharply to the side and simultaneously the
left hand will hold the Cane with fingers together and on the left extending and
slanting upwards, thumbs straight and on right. The Cane would then rests on the
outside of the hand between the thumb and forefinger.
(e) Tol Cane from Bagal Cane
The right hand is brought sharply to hold the Cane from the centre with the
knuckles facing upwards and the elbow kept straight across the chest.
The right hand is brought down sharply to Tol Cane position.

117
 CHAPTER XVI
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS ON SALUTING
Section 1
Saluting When Without Head-dress And When Wearing Plain Clothes Etc.
This Section covers the case of an individual policeman (including upper
subordinates in reference to gazetted police officer) who passes an officer, is
spoken to by an officer, or who is passed by an officer when the individual either
has no head-dress, or is dressed in plain clothes. As part of a recruit’s training, the
movements will be explained, demonstrated and practised on the square.
1. Without head-dress
At all times when without head-dress
(a) When passing an officer, will cut his hands to his sides and turn his
head and eyes to the flank on the left foot and so remain for six paces,
after which he will turn his head to the front.
(b) When spoken to by an officer, will stand to attention.
(c) When passed by an officer, will stand to attention.
2. When in plain clothes
A policeman, if wearing a western head-dress will remove his head dress
well, clear off the head and look the officer in the eye. In the case of Indian head-
dress he would not remove it, but would smartly turn his head in the direction of
the officer after cutting his arms to the sides. He will come to attention if speaking
to or spoken to by the officer.
3. When sitting
A policeman, if sitting when an officer approaches will stand to facing the
officer and salute with the hand. If two or more men are or standing about, the
senior officer, N.C.O. or oldest policemen face the officer, call the whole to
attention, and alone will salute.
4. When addressing or delivering a message to an officer
A policeman will march smartly towards the officer in quick time, halt two
paces from him, salute, address the officer or deliver his message (by going a
step forward and again stepping back after delivering the message), salute again,
turn about and march off in quick time
Common faults:
(i) Failure to pay the necessary compliment,
(ii) Saluting with no hat or head dress on.

118
 Section 2
Miscellaneous
NATIONAL ANTHEM
1. The “National Salute” will be given to:—
(a) President of the Republic of India;
(b) Governors within their own States.
2. Other dignitaries entitled to Salute on ceremonial occasions will be given
the “General Salute”.
3. The National Anthem (JANA GANA MANA) will be played for the
following:
(a) President of the Republic of India;
(b) Governors within their own States;
(c) Ceremonials, functions, parades-whether any of the personages
mentioned in l(a) and l(b) above is present or not—on the 15th August
and 26th January.
4. The ‘National Anthem’ can also be played for the Prime Minister of India
on special occasions with the prior approval of the State Government.
5. (a) Whenever the ‘National Anthem’ is played, all ranks in uniform will
stand at attention; officers, both gazetted and non-gazetted including
Under Officers, saluting.
(b) When ‘National Anthem’ is played on a ceremonial parade, all ranks
in uniform, not under the order of the O.C. Parade, will stand at
attention; as in 5(a), all officers and under officers saluting Officers
in attendance on the chief dignitary taking the salute at the ceremonial
parade will only come to attention and will not salute when the
“National Anthem” is played
(c) If in plain clothes all ranks will stand to attention and persons wearing
western head dress will take off their head-dress. All officers or under
officers commanding a party on the move will halt the party which
will remain at the slope or attention; the officer or under officer will
salute. If carrying a drawn sword, the officer will remain at the carry.
Sentries will slope arms.
6. Acknowledging salutes
Officers will receive and return a salute with the courtesy it deserves. When
two or more officers are together, the senior will return the salute.
7. Left Hand salute
Where through physical incapacity, a salute with the right hand is impossible,

119
the salute will be given with the left hand.
8. Police and Military Funerals
Officers and men passing a Police or military funeral will salute the bier by
giving eyes right or left. The senior in charge of the party will salute.
9. When riding a horse
An officer riding without arms will salute with the right hand. A policeman
mounted without arms will salute as follows:
(a) When riding with both hands on the reins, will give an eye right or
left without moving his hands.
(b) When holding the reins in one hand only, will drop the right hand to
the full extent of the arm behind the right thigh, fingers half closed,
back of the hand to the right, and give an eye right or left.
10. When Driving a Mechanical Vehicle (including bicycle)
The rider of a bicycle (pedal or motor) or driver of a mechanical vehicle
will not salute when the vehicle is in motion, owing to the danger of taking the
eyes off the road.
When the vehicle is stationary, he will salute by giving an eye right or left
but will not remove his hands from the handlebar or steering wheel.
When seated on or in a horsed or mechanical vehicle as a passenger, Officers
will pay compliments by saluting with the right hand, if possible. Otherwise they
will follow the instructions laid down for dismounted men. 4 driver will sit to
attention and, if facing the direction in which the Vehicle is moving, will salute
by giving an eye right or left. If seated facing to any other direction, he will look
straight to his own front.

120
 CHAPTER XVII
DRILL IN THREE RANKS AT THE HALT
The following chapter deals with the drilling of a platoon in Three Ranks.
The instructions are equally of use for any smaller body of men. In practice,
however, with a squad of recruits, it is best to have the men in a single rank, so
that they can all see the Instructor clearly till they have mastered the elements.
They can then drill in two ranks, and finally in three ranks.
Section 1
Falling In A Squad/Platoon
1. The correct way to “fall in” a squad or a platoon is for the instructor to call
“Right marker”. The “Right Marker” (Right hand man of the front rank—
or any man detailed) marches up to the instructor, and faces him standing to
attention (or at the slope if armed). The instructor then orders the man to
stand at ease and gives the command.
2. Squad/Platoon fall in (Squad/Platoon Line Ban)
The men then march smartly to the left of the marker and fall in, in three
ranks and stand at ease.

Diagram 1
3. The lateral interval between each man is the length of his outstretched arm
with the fist closed; the distance between ranks, one pace (30 inches). The
men must pick up their dressing from the right as they fall in and cover off
from front to rear.
NOTE: Position of Section Commanders. In an organized platoon each of the
three ranks forms a section, and the section commander falls in on the
right of his section. Where sections are organized into subsections,
the sub-section commanders are in the ranks on the right of their sub-
sections.
Section 2
Blank File (Khali File)
1. If the total number of men is not divisible by three there will be a “blank

121
file” (an incomplete file of three). The blank file will occur in the last place but
one from the left in the middle rank.

Diagram 2.
2. If two men are missing there will be a second blank file in the rear rank as
shown in diagram 3.

Diagram 3.
3. There must never be a blank file an empty space) in the rank at the front.
(Consequently, when the platoon hown in Diagram 3 is turned about, the
s odd man must step forward tothe empty space in the rear rank which is
fill in the front.
Section 3
Dressing
1. Right Dress (Dahine Saj)
Each man, except the right hand man, will take a short sharp pace (15 inches)
forward, pause, turn his head and eyes smartly to the right and at the same time
extend his right arm (left arm if carrying a rifle in order arms) with fist closed,
knuckles touching the shoulder of the man on his right. He will then take up his
dressing in line by moving with short quick steps, till he is just able to distinguish
the lower part of the face of the second man beyond him. Care must be taken to
carry the body backward or forward with the feet, the shoulders being kept perfectly
square in their original position and the body kept erect.
2. Eyes Front (Samne Dekh)
The head and eyes will be turned smartly to the front, the arm cut away to
the side, and the position of attention resumed.

122
3. General Note on Dressing
Men on parade are expected to keep their dressing when marching and to
“pick it up” automatically when halted. This means that the moment a platoon is
halted, each man glances to his right/left and corrects his dressing and covers off
and at once turns his head back to his front and remains at attention. This is
always done without an order; the hand is not raised for this purpose—it is only
raised when the formal command “Right/Left Dress” is given.
NOTE: During the initial training the men may be allowed to raise their hands
to get an idea of the correct interval. Care must be taken to see that
the dressing is done within three or four seconds only.
Section 4
Drill On The Move
1. General note on Marching and the Fixed Front
For purposes of parade ground drill, a platoon is regarded as having a “Fixed
front”. The “Right Guide” (right hand man in the front rank, normally No. 1
Section Commander) is the Key man. When the platoon is in line with the Right
Guide in position on the right, the platoon is “facing its front” or “advancing”.
When turned about (with the Right Guide on the left flank of the rear rank) the
platoon is “facing its rear” or “retiring”. These terms are used with reference to
the position of the “Right Guide” and t he original front rank, not with reference
to any particular side of the drill groun d.
Advance Position

Diagram 4.
Retire Position

Diagram 5.

123
 Section 5
Platoon In Line And In Threes
There are two drill ground formations for a platoon.
(a) In Line (of three ranks) facing to its front, or its rear, as in
Diagrams 4 and 5.
(b) In Threes—which is a line turned to the right or the left.

Diagrams 6

Diagrams 7
Section 6
Dressing On The March
1. When the order is given to march, the “directing flank” is usually given,
and the end man of the leading rank on the flank mentioned is responsible for the
direction and the step. He is called the Guide and should look straight to his
front, and the rest of the platoon must keep their dressing by him and cover off
correctly.
2. Directing Flank
Unless there is very good reason to the contrary, a platoon in line marches
by the Right when advancing (i.e. the Right Guide); by the Left when retiring
(still by the original Right flank). When moving to the Right in Threes, it marches
by the left (again by the Right Guide) and when moving to the Left in Threes, by
the Right.
3. When moving off for the first time from the Halt, the directing flank is
usually mentioned in the command, but when a platoon is being drilled on the

124
move, the directing flank is assumed to be known as already indicated, and a well
drilled platoon will not need to be constantly reminded.
Section 7
Marching In Line
1. By the Right Quick March (Dahine Se Tej Chal) [The cautionary word of
command ‘Platoon Will Advance’ (Platoon Age Barhega) may precede the Order]
The Platoon steps off with the left foot, dressing by the Right.
N.B. Marching: The first step should be sharp, the pace 30 inches, 120 paces to
the minute, heads held erect, eyes looking to the front, the arms
as straight as the natural bend will allow, swinging naturally from
the shoulder and hands slightly clasped. The arms should swing
to the front and not across the body. The rhythm of good march-
ing depends on the men being accustomed to the correct pace
and time, and the steady swinging of the arms acts as metro-
nome.
2. Platoon will Retire, About Turn (Platoon Pichhe Lautega—Pichhe Mur)
The platoon turns about by the right and steps off with the right foot, dressing by
the left. The correct way to turn about is as follows. The order is heard while the
left foot is coming to the ground; a complete pace is then taken with the right, and
the men mark time three paces (L.R.L.) turning round while doing so and then
step off with the right foot.
3. Giving the Order on the Correct Foot
(a) To ensure smartness, the command must be given on the correct foot.
This needs some practice. It means that the men should hear the
executive order as the left foot is passing the right foot, i.e. coming to
the ground. It follows that if the Instructor is far away from his platoon
the command must be given rather earlier than when he is near to the
men. A little practice will soon enable the command to be given on
the correct foot and the men to turn together smartly.
(b) Blank File The command is given with a distinct pause between the
caution about and the executive turn. When there are two blank files,
the front rank man marks time two paces on the word about, and turns
on turn. When properly done this means that the rear rank will have
overtaken him by the time the executive word of command is given,
and when he turns he will be in position in the leading rank.
4. Platoon will Advance, About Turn (Platoon Age Barhega, Pichhe Mur)
The men turn about in the usual way. This command brings the platoon
back into its original position. Note the caution. Care should always be taken

125
when bringing a body of men up to a given position, or handing them over to an
officer to ensure that the platoon is facing its front (right guide on the right flank).
It is very easy to make a mistake and get the rear rank in front.
4—104 BPR & D/74
Section 8
A Line Changing Direction to A Flank
1. This movement is used to change the alignment of a body of men; it is
generally employed so as to face to the right or the left (i.e. a turn through
an angle of 90 degrees).

Diagram 8
It can, however, be used to turn the line half right, or half left i.e. through an
angle of 45 degrees). In such a case the usual caution is preceded by the
word “Halt”.
2. It can be done either when halted or when marching. It is best to practice
from the half first.
(a) A Line Changing Direction from the Halt. Change Direction Right,
Right Form. (Dahine Disha Badal, Dahine Ban)
(i) The Right Guide turns full right, the rest of the front rank half
right. Remainder stand fast. Quick March. (Tez Chal)
(ii) The Right Guide marches forward three paces and then marks
time. The rest of the front rank march round into position, picking
up their dressing from the right. Ranks 2 and 3 march round into
position behind their front rank men. The whole platoon continues
marking time until a new order is given. See Diagram 9.
N.B. (1) At the Halt (Thorn Kar). If this caution precedes the order Right
Form, it means that the men halt as they come into position.
(2) Change Direction Left, Left Form, Quick March (Baen Disha Badal,
Baen ban, Tez Chal). This order is used when the line has to be formed
to the left. The general movements are the same. The left hand man
turns full left , etc. The men dress by the left on coming into position.

126
 (b) A Line Changing Direction when on the Move
The commands are the same though the executive ‘Quick March’ is not
required since the men are on the move, and the movements similar. If it is desired
that the line shall halt on completing the movement, the caution ‘At the Halt’
precedes ‘Right Form.’

Dia
3. Change Direction Right, Right Fgram 9
Here ‘Form’ is the final executiorm (Dahine Disha Badal—Dahine Ban)
continues marching for three paces (tove. The Right Guide turns to his right,
c lear his rear rank men) and marks time,
the second and third rank men follow h im round. The rest of the front rank turn
half right and come up into line with the Right Guide, picking up their dressing,
the other two ranks follow round and d ress by the right.
N.B. (1) The correct foot on which to give the command is as the right foot is
passing the left. The turn is t hen made to the right in the usual way.
(2) A similar movement can, of course, be done to the left-dressing by
the left.
4. Platoon Forward (Platoon Age Barh)
This order is necessary to get the m en, who are marking time on the move,
forward again. The platoon will now be advancing in line towards the new
direction, which was originally the right flank.
Section 9
Marching in Threes
1. Threes’ is the name given on the parade ground to a platoon turned in threes
to a flank.

127
 Move to the Right in Threes, Right Turn, (Tinon tin Men Dahine Chalega,
Dahine Mur) The platoon turns to the Right in the usual way. By the left Quick
March (Baen Se Tez Chal) The platoon steps off with the left foot. The left-hand
leading man (Right Guide) sets the pace and direction.
N.B.— It is of course equally possible to move to the left in Threes, in which
case the dressing is by the right.
2. Move to the left in threes—About Turn (Tinon Tin Men Baen chalega—
Pichhe Mur)
The platoon turns about in the usual way, continuing to march in the opposite
direction and now dressing by the right (original flank).
Section 10
Turning From Threes Into Line On The Move
1. When a platoon is in Threes on the march it is moving to a flank as far as its
‘fixed front’ is concerned. Orders, therefore, to turn right or left (which of
course will bring the platoon into line) must be prefaced by the correct
caution as follows:
(a) Assuming the Squad/Platoon is moving to the Right.

Diagram 10
The platoon will advance, Left turn (Platoon Age Barhega, Baen Mur).
This brings them into line facing their front (dressing by the right because
the right guide of the platoon is on the right).
or
The platoon will Retire, Right turn (Platoon Pichhe Lautega. Dahine Mur)
This brings them into line, facing their rear (dressing by the left),
(b) Assuming the Squad/Platoon is moving to the left.

128
 Diagram 11
The platoon will Advance, Right Turn (Platoon Age Barhega— Dahine Mur).
This brings the platoon into line facing the front (dressing by the right)
or
The Platoon Will Retire, Left Turn (Platoon Pichhe Lautega, Baen Mur) This will
bring the platoon into line facing the rear (dressing by the Left).
Section 11
Turning From Line Into Threes On The Move
1. These movements are similar to those described in the previous section, but
since they are done on the move , the executive ‘Quick March’ is not required.
The movement can, of course, be carried out whether a platoon is advancing
in line or retiring but the cautions will vary in accordance with the principle
of the fixed front.
(a) When a Platoon is Advanci ng—
Move to the Right in Threes, Right Turn. (Tinon Tin Men Dahine
Chalega, Dahine Mur) Move to the Left in Threes, Left Turn. (Tinon
Tin Men Baen Chalega, Baen Mur)
(b) When a Platoon is Retiring, the caution will be the same.

Diagram 12
Move to the Left in Threes, Right Turn (Tinon Tin Men Baen Chalega, Dahine
Mur) will be given for turning the platoon to the original Left Flank, and
Move to the Right in Threes, Left Turn (Tinon Tin Men Dahine Chalega,
Baen Mur), will be given for turning the platoon to the original Right Flank.

129
 Section 12
Wheeling In Threes
Change Direction Left (or Right), Left (or Right) Wheel (Baen/Dahine
Disha Badal, Baen/Dahine Ghoom)
The inner man of the leading section of threes will move round a quarter of
the circumference of a circle having a radius of four feet, stepping short to enable
the outer men of the file who would step out during the wheeling to keep the
dressing with him. The inner man of each file will turn his head and eyes towards
the outer man of his file, the remainder of the file will turn their heads and eyes
towards the inner man. When the quarter circle is completed the file will turn
their heads and eyes to the front and move on in the new direction. The other files
succession will follow in the footsteps of the leading file without increasing or
diminishing their distances from each other altering the time.
N.B. (1) In a good wheel each section will come round at the same point and
dressing and covering will be retained. If the movement is done in a
slovenly way, the column is apt to be pushed out towards the right/left.
(2) If the Instructor wishes to wheel through less than a right angle he
gives the command “Forward” (Age Barh) when he wishes.
Section 13
Forming Line From Threes Facing The Same Direction
1. A very useful movement for parade purposes is to form the Threes into Line
facing the same direction in which it is marching. If the platoon is moving to
its right in Threes or advancing in Threes, the command should be as follows:
On the Left, Form Squad/Platoon. (Baen ko Squad/Platoon Bana)

Diagram 13

130
2. The left hand man (Right Guide) leads forward three paces and then marks
time, his right hand men (the other section commanders) follow round behind
him, covering off at the correct interval. The rest of the Squad/Platoon turn
half left and march up into position in three ranks covering off and dressing
by the right. The whole Squad/Platoon continues to mark time, making
sure that the dressing is correct and awaits the next order.
N.B.— If it is desired to halt the men on the completion of the movement, the
caution “At The Halt” precedes the order. The left hand man (Right
Guide) then halts when he has completed his three paces, and the
other men halt as they come up.
3. On the Right, Form Squad/Platoon (Dahine ko Squad/Platoon Bana)
This would bring the third rank (Rear Rank) in front. It should only be used
if it is desired to form the platoon in line in the opposite direction to that in which
it is marching. The order will then be followed by the command “About Turn”
which of course brings the front rank into its correct position.
N.B. (1) If the Squad/Platoon were marching in Threes to the Left, these orders
would be reversed, e.g. “On the Right Form Squad/ Platoon” would
bring the front rank forward.
(2) Dressing will always be picked up from the flank on which the platoon
pivots, unless a contrary order is given.
(3) It is desirable to teach this movement first at the halt and then on the
march. When doing at the halt (Right guide leading) as soon as the
words of command (to form Squad in the left) is received, all except
the left hand man of the leading file of three (i.e. the original right
guide of the Squad/Platoon) turn half left and then remain standing.
After this, the words of command ‘Quick March’ (Tez chal) will be
given. On this command the guide (who has not turned) will march
three paces and then mark time, the rest of the front rank march round
into position on the left of the guide, picking up their dressing from
the right. Ranks 2 and 3 (i.e. Middle and Rear ranks) march round
into position behind their front rank men. The whole platoon/squad
continue marking time, until a new order is given (Similarly when the
formation is done on the right, the right guide of the leading file i.e.
the original right guide of the rear rank will move three paces forward.
The rear rank will come to the front).
(4) While doing this formation on the march/halt it is necessary that each file
of three comes to the new position together and also start mark time/halt
together.

131
 CHAPTER XVIII
FORMING TWO RANKS
It is often necessary to form two ranks for the purpose of Street lining and
Riot Drill. To effect this the only rank to move is the centre rank. Before forming
two ranks the Squad will be dressed and numbered.
SECTION 1
To Form Two Ranks From Three Ranks
1. “Form—two Ranks” (Do line Bana)
First : The centre rank carry the left foot, a side pace of 24 inches to the
Movement left.
Second : Odd numbers bring the right foot forward a full pace of 30 inches.
Movement Even numbers bring the right foot to the rear a full Pace of 30 inches.
Third : The centre rank resume the position of attention—odd numbers in
Movement the intervals of the front rank, even numbers in the intervals of the
rear rank.
2. If there is a blank file in the centre rank, the left hand man of that rank will
carry out the reverse of the above i.e. if an odd number, he will act as an even
number, and vice versa, except that in the case of a squad with an even number of
men in the front and no centre or rear rank man the blank file the left hand man of
the centre rank will act in accordance with the detail for his even number.
Common faults:
(i) Centre rank not knowing their correct numbers.
(ii) Incorrect interval in three ranks thereby not leaving room for the centre
rank men to move into. This can be overcome by giving “Right—
Dress” before forming two deep.
(iii) Not carrying the left foot far enough to the left in the first movement,
thereby causing collisions and uneven covering.
(iv) Not reaching out far enough in the second movement, thereby failing
to reach the correct new alignment.
3. “In Two Ranks, Right—Dress” (Do Line Main, Dahine Saj).—The normal
drill movements are carried out except that dressing is without arms interval,
each man being allowed 24 inches in the ranks, the rear rank remains two paces
of 30 inches in rear of the front rank.

132
 SECTION 2
To Form Three Ranks From Two Ranks
1. “Form—Three Ranks” (Tin Line Bana).—The original centre rank men
take up their original position as follows:—
First Movement :
If in the front rank they bring the left foot to the rear a full pace of 30
inches. If in the rear they bring the left foot a full pace of 30 inches forward..
Second Movement:
All concerned will carry the right foot a side pace of 24 inches.
Third Movement:
Centre rank men resume the position of Attention.
2. “In Three Ranks, Right—Dress” (Tin Line Main Dahine Saj): — Dressing
will be carried out as normal at arms length.
Common faults:
“Not carrying the right foot off far enough in the second movement thereby
failing to cover off.

133
 CHAPTER XIX MARCHING OFF
IN SINGLE FILE
It is often necessary for a squad in three ranks to form single file, e.g. when
marching into a building or through a narrow opening.
Section 1
A Squad Facing Its Right Flank In Three With The Front Rank On The
Left, Marching Off In Single File
1. When Halted
“Form Single File from the Left—Quick March”. (Baen se EK File Bana—
Tej Chal)
At the command “Quick March” the front rank march off and the remaining
two sections will mark time. When the last man of the front rank passes the
man in front of the centre rank, the centre rank will follow on behind the
front rank. Similar action will be taken by the rear rank.
2. On the March
“Form single file, from the Left” (Baen se EK File Bana)
At the command “Left” the section on the left (Front rank) will continue
marching and remaining two (Centre and Rear ranks) will mark time. When
the 1st man of the rank passes the Guides of the sections, the remaining two
ranks will follow.
Forming Threes
3. When Halted
“At the Halt on the Right, form Threes—Quick March” (Dahine Thamkar
Tinon Tin Bana—Tej Chal)
At the command “Threes” the front rank will remain stationary and the
other two ranks will make a right incline.
At the command “Quick March” the middle and the rear ranks will form up
on the right of the front rank in Threes.
4. On the March
“On the Right, form Threes” (Dahine Par Tinon Tin Bana)
At this command the front rank will mark time and the remaining two ranks
will form up on the right of the front rank in Threes and mark time.
Section 2
A Squad In Three Ranks (Line) In The Advance Position, Marching Off In
Single File.
1. When Halted
“Advance in Single File from the Right—Quick March” (Dahine Se EK
File men age barh—Tej Chal.)

134
 At the command “Right” the right guides of the three ranks remain stationary
and the remaining men of the Squad incline to the right.
2. At the command “Quick March”, the Right Guide of the front rank advances
forward and the remaining men of the front rank follow him. The other two
ranks (middle and rear rank) mark time. When the last man of the front rank
is passing the Right Guide of the middle rank, the middle rank will advance
with its right guide leading and follow the front rank. Similar action will be
taken by the rear rank.
3. On the March
“Form Single File, from the Right” (Dahine Se Ek File Bana)
At this command the whole squad will mark time and incline to the right
except for the guides of the section. At the same time the front rank will advance
with its right guide leading. When the last man of the front rank is passing the
Right Guide of the middle rank, the middle rank will advance forward and follow
the front rank. Similarly the rear rank will follow the middle rank.
NOTE : While forming single file the ranks will wheel from the point from
where their respective guides moved.
Forming Three Ranks (Line)
4. When Halted
“At the Halt on the Left Form Line—Quick March” (Baen Thamkar Line
Bana—Tej Chal)
At the command “Line” the right Guide of the three ranks will remain
stationary and the remaining men of the squad will incline to the left.
At the command “Quick March” the Right Guide of the front rank will
remain stationary and the remaining men of the front rank will march off and
form line on the left of the right guide.
Similar action will be taken by the middle and rear rank. They will advance
forward and form line behind the front rank. Interval and distance between the
ranks will be the same as for a squad in Three Ranks.
5. On the March
“On the Left, Form Line” (Baen Par Line Bana)
At this command the Right Guide of the front rank will mark time and the
remaining men of the front rank will form line on his left. The other two sections
who will be marking time will advance forward and form line behind the front
rank and correct their interval and distance.
NOTE: IF “At the Halt” it preceded before the command, men will halt when
they reach their correct positions.

135
 CHAPTER XX

PASSING OUT PARADE (DEEKSHANT PARADE)

Introduction

1. Passing Out Parade, is held in Police Academies, Police Training

Colleges, Recruits Training Schools and other Police Training establish-
ments to mark the conclusion of training of personnel (cadets and recruits)
in that establishment.

2. The Passing Out Parade is a ceremonial occasion. Therefore, the units

should make careful preparation as this will- reflect the standard of
training imparted, before a number of invitees and general public.

3. The Passing Out Parade involves ‘Oath Taking’ by the trainees and their
induction to a professional life. Thus this is a solemn occasion to which the
trainees look forward and take pride. The trainees should be motivated to
give their best in the Parade.

4. To achieve these objectives, adequate number of rehearsals should be done

under proper supervision at all levels.

5. This chapter deals with the standard procedure to be followed during

this parade. However, officers are expected to interpret these instruc-
tions reasonably and intelligently bearing in mind that slight alternations
can always be made to suit the strength of the trainees.

Section 1

General Instructions

The Passing Out Parade being a ceremonial occasion, the instructions

regarding General Arrangements, Inspection ground, Unit organisation,
Sizing of units, Parade formation, Receiving the Inspecting Officer
(including VVIps), Inspection Post of officers, March Past in various
formations, and Advancing in Review Order as contained in Chapter XVI
of this Manual, will be followed. Also the officers will follow special
instructions as contained in the same chapter. Diagram of the Inspection
ground is given ‘below for ready reference (Figure 1)

136
 The Inspection or Review Parade Ground.

(Figure 1, For details please see Section 2 of Chapter XVI)

Section 2

Formation of Parade

(i) Thirty minutes before the scheduled commencement of the

programme, the “Deekshant Parade” will form up behind the Fort
Wall, platoon-wise, rifles in “Bazu Shastr” (Order Arms) position
with bayonets fixed. Halof the number of platoons will take
position on the right side of the ‘Fort Gate’, platoon number 1
being near to the gate and other platoons to its right in the ascending
order of their serial numbers. The remaining half will stand on the
left of the gate, the serially last platoon being near the gate and the
others to its left in the descending order of their serial number.
Thus, if there are six platoons participating in the parade, platoon
numbers 1,2,3 will stand on the right of the ‘Fort Gate” and
platoon numbers 6, 5,4 to its left, in that order (Figure 2 given
below). With five platoons in the Parade, platoon numbers 1,2,3
will stand on the right of the gate and platoon numbers 5,4 on its
left. The parade commander will take position in front. The swords of
the parade commander and platoon commanders will be in “Carry”
position. The Riding Section, if available, will be behind the parade
followed by the Band at the rear, in the center. Buglers and Lancers
will also position behind the fort wall.

137
(ii) Fort-gate is opened by two gate-keepers 20 minutes before the
commencement of the Parade. Two bugler enter the parade ground
from the sides of the center wall and march up to the inspection line
(For description of inspection line, passing line, etc., please see Section
2 of Chapter XVI) and will sound Markers Call. The buglers turn and
March back to the rear of the fort wall. The Markers will take their
positions on the inspection line. The buglers and lancers also take up
their respective positions on the top of the fort wall and on the sides
of the parade ground.

(iii) The buglers sound fall in Call (Advance Call) 3 minutes after the
Markers Call. There upon the parade commander will bring the
parade to “Savdhan” and “Kandhe Shastr” positions, and march it
to the inspect ion line, giving the command “Parade Dahine Baen Se
Tej Chal”. On crossing the Gate, the right side Platoons (Nos. 1, 2, 3)
will proceed towards the right of the wall; the left side ones (Nos. 6, 5,
4) Marching towards the left of the wall. On reaching the markers, the
platoons will mark time. On a drum beat, given after all the platoons
have reached their respective positions on the inspection line, the
parade will halt. The parade commander will give the following
commands in succession: -

“Parade, Dahine Baen Mur”,

“Parade, Bazu Shastra”,

138
 “Parade Khuli Line Chal “,
“Parade Madhye Saj”.
The Riding Section will form up on the left. The Band will form up 8
paces behind the inspection line in the Center.

(iv) The parade is now • in ready position (See Figure-3 given below)

Parade Commander will order parade to be in Kandhe Shastra (slope arms).

If the institution is having its own “colour”, then “colour” will be com-
manded to be on parade.

The “Nishan parade par”

(The Nishan (colour) party commander (Insp) / Asstt. Comdt / Dy.S.P.)

with protection party / guards will enter parade ground with Nishan (colours).

The Nishan toli (Colour party will march towards inspection line at this
instant parade commander will order parade to pay respect to colour.

“Parade Nishan ko samman denge,

Parade General Salute Salami Shastra

The band will play the tune of General Salute and guests / spectators will
stand up at their places and uniformed personnel will salute.

The Nishan party will halt at the middle of parade at pre-marked place. The
guards / protection of colour will perform “Salami Shastra” in honour of
Nishan. The Nishan Party Commander will command –

139
 Nishan rakshak,

Nishan ko Samman Denge

General Salute,

Salami Shastra

The “baazu shastra” will be ordered by parade commander, upon this

command the Nishan rakshak and parade will come into ‘Baazu Shastra’
Position.

N.B. :

1. It is seen that big institutions have permanent forts especially made for the
passing out parades. These forts have ramparts. The buglers should be
stationed on the ramparts or any other convenient places, if the wall has
no ramparts.

2. If the institution does not have the permanent fort, it is desirable that a
Temporary Fort’ of canvass cloth is made. This will lend color and pageant
to the ceremony.

3. Mounted squad and lancers will be included in the Parade depending

upon the availability.

Section-3

Presenting Compliments To The Head of The Organisation /

Institution

(i) The Head of the Institution / Organisation will arrive 10 minutes

before the commencement of the program. The moment his
arrival is sighted, the parade commander will bring the parade to
“Savdhan” and “Kandhe Shastr” positions. Immediately after the
head of the institution has taken position at the Saluting Base, the pa-
rade commander will give the command “Parade, General Salute,
Salami Shastr”. The Band will play the tune “General Salute”, at
the conclusion of which the parade commander will give the
following commands successively:

“Parade Kandhe Shastra”,

“Parade Bazu Shastra”,

140
 “Parade Vishram”.

(ii) After taking salut e, the head of the institution will proceed to the
alighting point to receive the VIP invited to review the “Deekshant
Parade” and walk for his arrival.

Section 4

Arrival of the VIP/VVIP

As soon as the VIP/WIP is sighted, the buglers will sound “Fanfare”. The
Parade commander will immediately give the Command; “Deekshant Parade,
Savdhan”, followed by “Parade kandhe Shastr”.

As soon as the VIP, escorted by the head of the institution, t akes up his
position on the Saluting Base, the parade will present arms to him, the parade com-
mander giving the following words of command:

“Parade, General Salute, Salami Shastr”

The Band will play the tune “General Salute” and the parade will stay
n that position till the tune is over. (If the VIP is the President of India or
a Governor, the “Rashtriya Salute” will be given and the Band will play
National Anthem) The parade commander will, thereafter, bring the parade to
“Kandhe Shastr” and “Bazu Shastr” positions.

N.B. Regarding ‘Salute’ and playing of National Anthem instructions contained

in Section 7 and Section 8 of Chapter XVIII (Chapter on Guard of Honor)
will be followed.

Section-5

Review of the Parade by the VIP

The moment the parade conies to “Bazu Shastr” position, the commander
will march towards Saluting Book, halt, pay compliments to VIP and report –

“Shriman, (“Mahodayaa”, if the VIP is a lady), Deekshant Parade Aapke

Nirikshan Ke Liye Hazir Hai”

Meanwhile, the i n s p e c t i o n jeep ( if o n e i s p l a n n e d t o b e

u s e d ), stationed close at hand, will reach the Saluting Base. The VIP will stand in
the front portion of the jeep, and the head of the institution and the parade
commander in the rear portion, with the former on the right and the latter on his left
side. The jeep will then proceed to the right of the parade and pass through the
front rank of the

141
parade from right to left (in case a jeep is not intended to be used, the VIP will
be escorted on foot to the inspection line with the head of the institution on his
right and the parade commander on the left, both moving one step behind the
VIP).

As soon as the VIP (whether on the inspection jeep or on foot)

passes the right guide of the first platoon, the Band will start playing one of the
slow march tunes and will continue to play the same till the review of the parade by
the VIP is over. (If the VIP is on foot, the parade commander and the head of the
institution will move in slow march during the review).

Parade commander and head of the institution will Salute to left if the Nishan
(Colour) is on parade.

Section 6

Oath Taking

(i) After the VIP’s return to the Saluting Base, the parade commander will
salute him and seek permission for oath taking in the following words:

“Shriman” (“Mahodayaa” for a lady VIP), Shapath Grahan Karne Ki

Agyaa Pardan Karen”

The Parade Commander will once again salute the VIP, turn about and
return to his original position near the inspection line.

(ii) Parade commander will, thereafter, bring the parade to “Kandhe

Shastr” position and call the Rashtriya Dwaj party (consisting of
bearers of the National Flag and that of the institution /unit, and the
escorts), using the word of command, (Rashtriya Dwaj Party
Parade Par”

Thereupon the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ with National Flag and Unit Flag,
will march towards (and in front of) of inspection line and reach up to 14 paces
beyond the right guide of the first platoon. As soon as the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Pary’
starts marching, the parade will present arms to the national Flag on the command
of the parade commander:

“Parade Rashtriya Salute, Salami Shastr”

The band will play the full version of the National Anthem. During the
“Rashtriya Salute”, all the guests, invitees and others present at the parade
ground will stand up and officers in uniform, among them will salute. Suitable

142
announcements will be made beforehand in this regard. If Nishan is on parade then
Nishan Vahak (colour party) will bow the Nishaan at the time of Rashtriya Salute.

Upon ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ reaching its designated position on the

right hand side of the parade, the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ Commander will give the
command, ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Rakshak’, Salami Shastr”, on which the ‘Rashtriya
Dwaj Rakshak’ will also present arm s. The institution / unit flag will be dipped. All
this while, the parade will remain in “Salami Shastr” position.

The parade commander will now bring the parade and the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj
Rakshak’to “Kandhe Shastr” and “Bazu Shastr” positions. All the invitees and others
will resume their seats.

(iii) The parade commander will, thereafter, give the following

commands to the Platoon commanders:

“Commanders Wapas Kirch”

“Commanders Jagah Lo”

On the first command, the platoon commanders will return their swords.
On the second command, they will take a right turn and wait for a drum beat on
which they will march to the right of their respective platoons and halt. On a second
drum beat, they will turn about.

(iv) The parade commander will then give the command ‘Rashtriya Dwaj
Party’ “Jagah Lo”, upon which the two flag bearers will march
forward and take position 7 paces before the right guide of the First
Platoon, the national flag being in front and the institution unit
flag behind it. Simultaneously, the parade participants will move
their left hands and take hold of their rifles with it (a drum beat will
be given for this). On the next from beat, t hey will raise their right
hands to an angle of 45° to the horizontal.

(v) On the parade commander’s command, ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’,

Karyavahi Shuru Kar”, the two flag bearers will start moving in
slow march in front of the parade, the national flag leading. The
Band will play one of the slow march tunes. When the flag bearers
cross the left guide of the last platoon, the middle rank will hold
their rifles with left hand and raise their right hand on drum
beats. Simultaneously the front flank will cut their hands to “Savdhan”
positi on. Likewise, after passing completely through the rear flank,
the flag bearers will start quick march and come to the centre of the
parade and halt, facing towards the parade.

143
(vi) For the Oath-taking, a drum beat will again be given upon which the
cadets will raise their right hands to 45° to the horizontal, holding
their rifles with left hands, as before.

(vii) The Head of the Institution Organisation will now read out the
prescribed oath (breaking its text in convenient parts) in the
language spoken and understood by the cadets who will repeat
every part of it as soon as read out by the former. Once the text of
the oath is completed, the cadets will, on a drum beat, swiftly
cut their right hands and on the second beat, they will take the
rifle in their right hands and resume the “Savdhan” position.

(viii) The parade commander will now give the command,

“Commanders Jagah Lo”, upon which the platoon commanders
will take their positions in front of their respective platoons; the
‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ will simultaneously turn to the left and join its
escorts.

(ix) The parade will, thereafter, give the command “Commanders Nikal
Kirch”, upon which the platoon commanders will fake out their
swords. The parade will be brought to “Kandhe Shastr” position.

(x) The parade commander will now order the ‘’Rashtriya Dwaj Party’
to move out with the command, Rashtriya Dwaj Party, Kooch Kar”,
upon which the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ will march off, passing in
front of the parade. The parade commander will immediately give
the command, “Parade, Rashtriya Salute, Salami Shastr”, upon which
the parade will present arms to the national flag. The Band will play
full version of the National Anthem. All the invitees, guests and other
present at the parade ground will once again stand up and
officers in uniform, among them, will salute. Nishan will bow to
pay respect. Suitable announcements will once again be made be-
forehand in this regard.

(xi) The spectators will assume their seats once the National Anthem is
over and the ‘Rashtriya Dwaj’ Party” is seen off the parade com-
mander will give the commands, “Parade, Kandhe Shastr” and
“Parade, Bazu Shastr”.

Section-7

Ceremonial March Past

(i) Once he ‘Rashtriya Dwaj Party’ has marched off and the parade has

144
 come to “Bazu Shastr” position, the parade commander will give the
following commands to commence the March Past: —

“Parade, Nikat Line Chal”

“Parade, Kandhe Shastr”

“Parade, Tin-o-Tin Column men Dahine Chalega, Dahine Mur”

The moment parade turns Right (Dahine mur) Nishan toli commander
will command –

Nishan toli dahine disha badal, dahine ban

(The Band will start playing one of the quick march tunes)

“Baen Disha Badal, Baen Ghoom”.

Formation into Close Column

(ii) As the parade approaches the march past line in front and the
left of the Saluting Base. (Point ‘A’) the parade commander will
give the word of command, “Parade, tham Kar, Baen Disha
Platoon Ke Nikat Column Banaa”.

Individual platoon commanders will then bring their respective pla-

toons to halt and make them turn to the left, in succession. When the last
platoon has thus formed up, the parade commander will give the command,
“Parade, Bazu Shastr”, and immediately thereafter order the dressing of the
platoons with the words of Command “Parade Dahine Saj”.

On this command, the right guides of all the platoons will turn to their
right, march out 5 paces, halt, turn about and take up the dressing of the front
line, one after the other, the right guides of all the platoons, in succession, giving
the command “Hilo Mat”. Immediately after the right guide of the last platoon has
finished his command to the first line, all the fight guides will together take a left
turn, move a step forward, take right turn and respect the action for dressing
of the second line. All these movements will once again be repeated for the third line
of each platoon in the same sequence. Immediately after the right guide of the last
platoon has given the command “Hilo Mat” to t he last line of his platoon, all the
right guides will together take a turn to the right, move two steps forward, take
a left turn to their original positions in alignment with the first line of their
respective platoons. The guides will take care to coordinate all their movements with
each other throughout.

145
 After dressing of the platoons is over, the parade commander will give the
word of command ‘Samne Dekh’ on which the entire parade will simultaneously
come to the ‘eyes front’ position, and platoon commanders and the parade com-
mander will turn about. All the right guides will step out together, march 5 paces,
halt and turn to their right. The parade is now ready for the March Past.

March Past:

(iii) The Parade Commander will now give the Commands: “Parade,
Kandhe Shastr” ‘Parade, Platoon Ke Column Men Manch Se Guzregi-
Number One Platoon Aage”.

Immediately after this command, the platoon commander of the 1st

platoon will give the command, “Number EK Platoon, Aage Barhega,
Dahine, and Se Dhire Chal”. The first platoon will, on this
command, start slow march. The Band will play slow march” tune.
The remaining platoons will follow in succession at the column
distance, each platoon commander giving the command
independently to his own platoon to start marching. The parade
commander will start marching as soon as Number 1 platoon
commences its march.

(iv) When the Platoon No. 1 is approaching Point ‘B’. Parade

Commander will give the command ‘Parade Bari-Bari Khuli line Chal”.

Thereupon, each platoon commander will give the following

commands independently to his own platoon on reaching the Marked
Flag Points.

(i) No........ Platoon Khuli Line (At point B) (Platoons will one order &
continue marching)

(ii) No ........ Platoon Dahine Dekh (At Point C)

(iii) No.........Platoon Samne Dekh (At point D)

At the command Platoon Dahine Dekh the entire platoon except the right
guide will turn ‘Eyes right’. The Platoon Commander will simultaneously salute the
VIP. The parade commander salutes independently.

When Nishan will be passing through the dias the Nishan toli commander
will do “dahine dekh”. Nishan Rakshak and Nishan will march straight. It the Chief
Guest is President or Governor, then command will be “Jhukao Nishan” and “Uthao
Nishan”. If Chief Guest is other than the President or the Governor, then the Nishan

146
toli commander will Command – “Lahrao Nishan” and “Pakro Nishan”.

(v) When all platoons have cleared saluting base and between point
‘D’ & ‘E’, the parade commander will give the command for
close order ‘Parade Bari –Bari Nikat Line Chal.

There upon each platoon commander will give the command independently
to his own platoon, on reaching the marked flag point. The word of command for
platoon commander is ‘Platoon No...Nikat Line’.

On reaching the corner flag (Point F) parade commander gives the

word of command “Parade, Tham Kar, No. 1. Platoon par, Platoono-ka-Nikat
Column Banaa”. On this parade will be formed again in the close column of platoon
No. 1. For this each platoon commander will give the command “No.....Platoon
Tham’ independently on raching at close column distance—after No. 1 platoon
halts near corner point.

After this, the parade commander gives word of command

“Parade Dahine Se Bari Bari, Tinon-tin ke Column Mein Aage Barh, Parade
Dahine Mur”.

(vi) As soon as the parade is turned to its right, No. 1. Platoon

Commander will advance his platoon by giving word of command
“No. 1 Platoon, Baen Se Tej Chal, Baen Ghoom” and thereafter
all platoon commanders will advance their respective platoons
and march along with inspection line. The Parade has to pass
through the saluting base again in quick march, in platoons and
such on reaching near passing line again the parade will be advanced
in the platoons columns.

On reaching near the passing line (Point ‘A’) the parade commander will
give the world of command “Parade baen Disha Platoon-ke-column Mein Aage
Barb”.

There upon, each platoon commander will advance the platoon by

giving the following word of command:

“NO:......Platoon Aage Barhega baen Mur—Dahine Se”

Similarly, platoon commanders will give following words of command

while passing in front of saluting base:

“No......Platoon Dahine Dekh” (Point C)

147
 “No......Platoon Samne Dekh” (Point D)

Nishan toli will do the same action as it did during slow march.

On reaching the corner flag Parade Commander will give the word of
command:

“Parade, Dahine Se Bari Bari Tinon Tin Ke Column Mein Age Barn,”

There upon on reaching near the corner, the parade will again advance in
column of threes for forming up on Inspection Line. For this, each platoon
commander gives the following words of command:

“No......Platoon Tinon tin Men Dahine Chalega—Dahine Mur”

On this, each platoon will right turn on the marked place and Platoons
wheel twice and again near the inspection line on commands “Baen Ghoom”.

Nishan toli will also change direction (Disha badlege)

(vii) Once the parade reaches the original position i.e. on inspection
line, Parade commander will give word of command “Parade
Tham”, on which the parade will come to halt. The Parade
Commander will, thereafter, give the following further commands:

“Parade Agage Barhega, Baen Mur” “Parade Khuli Line Chal”

The parade, on these commands, will turn to the left and move to open
order position. On a drum beat, the platoons on the right side of the Fort Wall Gate
will turn their heads to the left and those on the right flank will look towards right and
dress themselves up. At the next drum beat, all will come to ‘eyes front’ position.

N.B.:

1. The procedure described in Section-7 involves two times March Past by

the parade before the saluting base. First in slow time in Platoons
column (Please see Section 17 pf Chapter XVI of the manual) and
secondly in quick time in platoon column (Please see section 16 of
Chapter XVI. This procedure should be adopted for the passing out parade
for officer—cadets.

2. In the passing out parade of recruit-constables, when the number of

trainees very, large, march past, in slow time way be omitted.

3. While marching past in slow time, the procedure involves a ‘Halt’ on pass-

148
ing line at the right corner (Near Point ‘T’ after all the platoons have marched
past the saluting base in slow march) for formation of parade in close
column. This can be done in continuous marching (i.e. without halt) also as
outlined in section 17 of chapter XVI.

Section- 8

Advance in Review Order, Report by the Head of the Institution,

Prize Distribution and VIP’s Address.

(i) “Once the dressing is over, the parade Commander will advance the
parade in review order, by giving the command “Parade, Sameeksha
Kram Mein madhye Se Tej Chal” Upon this command, the
parade will march 15 paces forward and automatically come to
halt (on further word of command will be given for halt). As
soon as the parade halts, it will present General Salute on the
following commands of the Parade Commander: —

“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”

“Parade, General Salute, Salami Shastra”

“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”

“Parade, Bazu Shastra”

“Parade, Vishram”

The Head of the Institution will now present his report.

(II) Once this is over, the parade commander will take the prize
winners forward for receiving their prizes and trophies. The se-
quence of commands will be as follows: —

“Parade, Savdhan”

“Commanders Waapas Kirch” (on this parade Commander and

Platoon Commanders will return their swords.)”

“Parade, Vishram”

“Puraskar Vijeta, Savdhan”

“Puraskar vijeta, Line Ban”

149
 A drum beat will be given on the command “Puraskar vijeta Line Ban”,
upon which each prize winner will pass his rifle into the left hand of the person
standing next to him. On a second beat, all prize winners will march to form
a line on both sides of the parade Commander, facing the Saluting Base, and
dress up on the parade Commander’s word of command, “Vijeta, Saj Ja”.

On his next command, “Vijeta, Madhye Se Tej Chal” all prize winners
(including the parade Commander himself) will advance. On reaching the
marked line in front of the Saluting Base, and dress up on the Parade Commander
will bring them to halt and give the following further commands: —

“Vijeta, Saj Ja”

“Puraskar Vijeta, Salute”

“Vijeta, Vishram”

The names of the prize winners will then be called out, upon which each
of them will take a step forward and proceed to the Saluting Base, salute the
VIP, receive the prize/trophy, again salute, turn to the left, march up a few paces to
the side of the Saluting Base, hand over the prize/trophy to the official detailed for
the purpose, and return to his original place in the line of prize winners.

Once all the prizes have been distributed, the Parade Commander will
take the prize winners back, giving the following words of command:—

“Puraskar Vijeta, Savdhan”

“Vijeta, Salute”

“Vijeta, Piche Mur”

“Vijeta, Madhye Se Tej Chal”

On their reaching near the parade and in line with t he original position
of the Parade Commander, the Parade commander will give them the word of
command, “Vijeta, Tham” on which they will come to halt. On the word of com-
mand, “Puraskar vijeta, Jagah Lo”, all the prize winners would move forward to
their respective places’ in the Parade, the Parade Commander staying behind. A
drum beat will then be sounded, on which all of them will take back their rifles. One-
third-drum beat; they will come to stand-at-ease position.

(iii) The VIP will now deliver his address.

150
 Section 9

Peeling Off

(i) Once the VIP’s address is over, the Parade commander will give the
following words of command.

‘Parade, Savdhan” “Commanders, Nikal Kirch”

(ii) After the Parade has come to attention and the platoon commanders
have drawn their swords, the Parade commander will advance to
the Saluting Base and seek permission of the VIP for peeling
off in the following words:

“Shriman, (‘Mahodayaa’ in the case of a lady VIP),

Deekshant Parade Ko Nishkraman Karne Kee Agyaa Pradann
Karen”

(iii) The Parade commander, after obtaining permission for peeling

off, will return to his position in front of the parade and give the
words of command:

“Deekshant Parade, Kandhe Shastr”

“Nishan toli kooch kar”

Nishan toli commander will start march off with Nishan.

Parade Commander will command General Salute and band will play tune in
honour of Nishan. The spectators and invitee will stand up at their place and
uniformed personnel will salute.

“Parade, Dahine Baen Mur”

“Parade Nishkraman Ke liye, Dahine Baen Se Dhire Chal”

Upon these commands, the parade turns inside and the cadets start
stepping out in columns of threes, from platoon on left as will as right side
of the parade, abreast with each other, towards and no either side of the Saluting
Base, in slow march. Every nest, six cadets will follow the previous six at a distance
of 8 paces.

The Parade and platoon Commanders and the right guides will step out in
slow march along with the files and form up in the center waiting for their turn for
peeling off.

151
 As each row of six cadets reaches the mark point near the Saluting base,
they will split into two rows of three each one moving towards the right and
the other towards the left of the Saluting base. On approaching the VIP, they will
pay compliments by offering the butt salute. After moving 8 paces, they will cut
own the salute and after crossing the marked line they will break into quick
march and proceed to the armory to deposit their riffles.

The right guides and the platoon commanders followed by the Parade Com-
mander will start marching after the last row of cadets. As soon as t he Parade
Commander has crossed the VIP, the riding sect ion and the band will march off
through the fort wall gate. The gate will then be shut.

Section 10

Special Notes

(i) The procedure described in the chapter requires formation of parade

in platoon. In case, the number of trainers is very large and it is
desired, that the formation of parade should be in companies, March
past will be done by the procedure given us section-14 of Chapter
XVI.

(ii) The passing out Parade is an occasion marking culmination of the

training of the trainees. So the Parade has a little role for t he Unit
Adjutant and Unit SM Similarly there is little role for parade 2/IC.
However, where it is desired, that they should be taken into
parade according to the traditions of the unit/organisation/institution,
permission of the concerned Director General of Police should
be taken. Then their position in t he parade will be as in Appendix
‘A’ of Chapter XVI.

(iii) The Words of commands regarding Arms Drill pertain to Arms Drill
with .303 Rifles. In the units where trainees have only SLRs the
commands regarding “Kandhe Shastr” will be omitted and march
past will be in “Bagal Shastr”.

(iv) If cheers are to be given to the VVIP/VIP at the parade, the procedure
contained in Section 3 of Chapter XIX. will be followed.

*****

152
SWORD DRILL
 CHAPTER XXI
SWORD DRILL
The sword is a traditional badge of rank and honor. This drill is used for
ceremonial purposes only. The main qualities that must be sought are accuracy
and swift but graceful movement.
A sword is divided into two constituent portions, i.e. Hilt and Blade.
The Blade has three divisions:
(i) Fore. The portion near the hilt.
(ii) Middle. The central portion of the blade.
(iii) Feeble. The lowest portion of the blade.
The Hilt is composed of three distinct parts:
(i) Pommel. The knob on the handle.
(ii) Handle. The portion from where the sword is taken into grip.
(iii) Hilt. The Part in front of the handle, which protects the finger.
The sword must always be worn with a sword knot made of approved pattern.
Section 1
Sword Drill Movements
1. Position of Attention Hold the scabbard with the left hand,
left arm straight (Left arm bent outside
the hilt when the sword is not drawn),
back of the hand to the left, thumb
round the front forefinger pointing
down the scabbard, other fingers
curled round the back. This position
of the left hand is maintained
throughout drill except when standing
at ease with sword not drawn.
2. Draw Sword By Numbers, In one movement carry the right hand
Squad One (Gintise Nikal across the body, grasp the handle and
Kirch, Squad—Ek) draw out the blade until the forearm
is horizontal and in line with the
shoulder. The back of the hand is to
the rear, fingers and thumb round the
handle.
Squad—Two (Squad—Do) Draw the sword sharply forward and
upward allowing the shoe of the

153
 scabbard to move slightly to the rear.
Resume the position of attention with
left hand.
Recover Position. (Khada Kirch) As soon as the point of the sword
leaves the mouth of the scabbard,
bring it sharply to the position of the
recover, i.e. with the blade
perpendicular, edge to the left, upper
part of the hilt in line with and
opposite the mouth, thumb towards
the mouth on the side of the handle.
Squad—Three (Squad Teen) Force the right arm to the side, elbow
Position of the Carry— close in forearm horizontal and to the
(Samne Kirch) front. Blade perpendicular, edge to the
front, the grip held lightly, other
fingers together and slightly curled,
hilt resting on the upper part of the
hand.
3. Slope Swords (Kandhe Kirch) Drop the point of the sword to the rear
so that the back of the blade rests
midway between the neck and the
point of the shoulder. Keep the
forearm and hand still but release the
grip with the last three fingers and put
the little finger behind the handle.
4. Return Sword By Numbers, Force the hilt over to the hollow of
Squad One (Gintise Wapas the left shoulder, blade perpendicular,
Kirch, Squad—Ek) edge to the left, right forearm
horizontal and elbow in line with the
shoulder, back of the hand to the front.
At the same time push the shoe of the
scabbard a little to the rear. Grip the
mouth of the scabbard with the left
hand and immediately force the point
of the sword downwards outside the
left shoulder with a quick turn of the
right wrist and put it in the scabbard
guiding the blade home with the
forefinger. Force the blade home to
assume the position of the first motion
of Draw Swords. Keep the shoulders

154
 square to the front.
Squad—Two (Squad—Do) Force the sword home in the scabbard
and resume the position of Attention
with the left hand and the scabbard.
The right hand remains on top of the
hilt, back of the hand upwards, fingers
and thumb close together and straight,
forearm horizontal and close to the
body.
Squad—Three (Squad—Teen) Cut the Right hand to the side.
5. Squad Stand at Ease (i) With the sword in the scabbard.
(Squad Vishram) Carry the left foot and the
scabbard about 12 inches to the
left, so that the weight of the body
rests equally on both feet. At the
same time, carry the hand behind
the back and place the back of the
right hand in the palm of the left,
grasping it lightly with the fingers
and thumb, and allow the arms to
extend easily to their full extent.
(ii) With the sword drawn from the
Slope.
Carry the left foot about 12 inches
to the left, the sword brought to
Slope (Kandhe Kirch) position on
the right shoulder. The left hand
grasping the scabbard as in the
position of Attention.
6. Attention from Stand at Ease, Bring the sword to the carry and come
Squad— Attention (Vishram se to attention.
Savdhan’s Squad Savdhan)
7. Quick—March (Tez Chal) The sword or empty scabbard is kept
steady at the side by the left hand. If
the sword is drawn the position of the
same will be as described in General
Notes given below.
8. Squad—Halt (Squad Tham) Assume the position of attention.

155
 Section—2
Saluting With The Sword
1. Saluting at the Halt
(Tham kar Siloot Karna)
Salute to the Front by Numbers —
Bring the Squad one (Gintise Samne Siloot, Squad—Ek)
sword up to the recover.
Squad—Two (Squad—Do) Lower the sword until the point is 12
inches from the ground and directed
to the right at an angle of 45 degree
from the front, edge to the left, right
arm and sword in one straight line,
thumb flat on the handle of the sword.
Squad—Three (Squad Teen) Bring the sword to the recover.
Squad –Four(Squad Char) Return, to the position of carry.
NOTE: (i) When the sword is not
drawn, the normal salute
with the hand is given.
(ii) When on parade with
troops armed with the
rifle and the Present is
ordered, officers with
swords will work on the
first and third motions of
the Present. On the order
‘Slope Arms’ they will
work with the men.
(iii) When the order ‘Fall out
the Officers’ is given,
they will salute with the
sword, form up in rear of
the senior officer and
will return swords before
standing at case.
2. Saluting On the Move In both slow and quick time the salute
will be performed in two motions, the
first and second motions being done,
respectively, when the right and left
feet come to the ground continuously

156
 one after the other, immediately after
the word of command which are given
when the left foot comes to the
ground.
The motions are to be done as
follows:—
(a) While Saluting:
(i) First Motion: The words of
command are given when the left
foot comes to the ground. When
the next right foot comes to the
ground, bring the sword to
recover face kept straight.
(ii) Second Motion: When the left
foot comes to the ground next,
turn the head towards the
reviewing officer and dip the
sword as described in Para 9.
(b) While Coming to Eyes Front
After the Salute is Over.
(i) First Motion: The words of
command to come to Eyes Front
are given when the left foot comes
to the ground. When the next right
foot comes to the ground, come
to the Recover position, head
turned to the front.
(ii) Second Motion: When the left
foot comes to the ground next,
bring the sword to Carry position.
Section—3
General Notes
(i) At the halt, the sword is normally
at the Carry when the men are at
attention or with arms sloped.
(ii) On the more the sword is sloped
on stepping off and brought to the
Carry on halting except on the

157
 following occasions when the
sword will always be at the Carry.
(a) On turning or wheeling on to or
reaching the saluting base.
(b) When falling in or falling out the
officers.
(c) When advancing in Review
Order.
(d) When Guard Mounting.
(e) Swords, if drawn, will be at the
Carry throughout, except when
the men are standing at ease and
when marching to and from a
parade ground (but clear of it)
when they will be at the slope,
(iii) When the men march at case
without slinging, the sword will
be sloped.
(iv) When the men march at ease with
rifles slung, the sword will be
returned. On marching to
attention, swords will be drawn
again, working on the left foot.

158
 CHAPTER XXII
EXTENDED ORDER DRILL
Section 1
Introduction

Control of a force in field, particularly when extended or deployed can be

exercised far better by signals, than by verbal or written messages. When a force
has actually to be committed to a definite form of action against dacoits, full
instructions should be given by the Commander whenever possible. But during
the march and at all times when quickness of movement is the first and main
essential, control by signals should be used, provided the conditions are suitable.

The rifle will normally be carried at the trail when moving in Extended
order in line. Correct dressing and keeping steps are not required, but an
approximate line should be kept. Otherwise, when extended, men might come in
the line of fire of other members of their party. Commanders should place
themselves where they can best supervise their commands. It should be explained
that as extensions are usually made in order to develop fire or avoid loss of life
they are normally carried out at the double. An extended line is closed only when
under cover or when not under fire. Closing is, therefore, carried out in quick
time, unless it is desired to close on the move. Unless otherwise ordered men
extend and close from or to the centre file which should be named.

Before deploying a squad or platoon for field drill, it should be dressed,

numbered and the centre file proved by giving the following caution:

“No.......Centre File and File of Direction, the Objective is............”

(Number.... .Madhya File aur Disha Ki File—Udheshya Hai)

At this command the men of the given file will prove by raising the
disengaged arm. If it is required to march by a flank the front rank man of the file
on that flank will move.

When deploying the squad or platoon by signal, a short blast of the whistle
(i.e., the cautionary blast) will be blown whenever possible before the signal is
made, in order to attract the attention of the men. When the commander is satisfied
that his signals are understood, the commander will drop his hand to his side on
which the units under him will act as ordered.

159
Figures given below refer to Chapter XIII Pages 00 - 90
FIELD SIGNALS—EXTENDED ORDER DRILL

chp ls [kksyuk nkfgus dks [kksyuk

ck;sa dks [kksyuk vkxs pyuk

1 60
1 61
1 62
1 63
 The signals mentioned in Sections 3 and 4 will also be made use of during
Field Exercises.
The following words of command and signals by hand will be used for
deploying a squad from the front, centre, and rear.
Section 2
Words Of Command
(a) Deploying
To the right extend (Dahine Phail): At this command the left guide of the
rear rank will remain stationary and the remaining men of the middle, front and
rear ranks will extend to the right into single rank as follows:—
All except the left guide of the rear rank will turn to the right. The front
rank men will move first followed by the centre and rear ranks to an interval of
two paces between each person. All will then turn to the left and come to Stand-
at-Ease (Vishram) position.
To the left extend (Baen Phail): Same as for above except that in this case
the right guide of the front rank will remain stationary and the remaining men of
the middle, rear and front ranks will extend to the left.
From the centre extend (Madhye Se Phail): At this command the centre
man of the middle rank will remain stationary and the remaining men of the
front, rear and middle ranks will extend to the right and left respectively.
NOTE: If the number of paces is not indicated, men will extend to two paces.
(b) Closing
On the right close (Dahine Simatt): At this command the right guide of the
front rank will remain stationary and the remaining men of the front rank, and
middle and rear ranks will close up to the right in their original order.
On the left close (Baen Simatt): At this command the left guide of the rear
rank will remain stationary and the remaining men of the rear middle and front
ranks will close up to the left in their original order.
On the centre close (Madhye Par Simatt): At this command the middle
ranks will close on the centre man who will remain stationary and the front and
rear ranks will left turn and right turn and close in their original order.
Section 3
Signals With The Hand
Extending to the right: The right arm extended to the full extent over the
head and waived slowly from side to side, the hand to be open and to come down
as low as the hips on both sides of the body three times and then pointed to the
right. See fig. 2.
164
 Action by platoon: As described in section 2 above.
Extending to the left: Same as for ‘Extending to the Right’. Instead of right
arm, left arm will be used for signaling. See fig. 3.
Action by Platoon: As described in section 2 above.
Extending from the centre: Same as for ‘Extending to the Right’ except that
after the third swing of the hand, the hand will be dropped straight down to the
position of Attention. See fig. 1.
Action by Platoon: As described in section 2 above.
NOTE: In the above movements it should be remembered that the front
rank will always be on the right side.
Close: The hand placed on top of the head, the elbow to be square to the
right or left according to which hand is used. The above signal denotes ‘Close on
the Centre’. See fig. 11.
If it is required to close on a flank (right or left) the commander will point
to the required flank before dropping his hand. See figs. 12 and 13.
If when on the march, it is required to halt as well as close, the commander
will give the halt signal before dropping the hand.
Advance : The arm swung from rear to front below the shoulder. See fig. 4.
Halt : The arm raised to the full extent above the head.. See fig. 5.
Retire : The arm circled above the head, three times. See fig. 6.
Change direction right (or left) : The right or left arm is extended in line
with the shoulder. A circular movement is then made, on completion of which the
arm and body should point in the required direction. See figs. 7 and 8.
Right (or left) incline or turn: The body turned in the required direction and the
arm extended in line with the shoulder and pointing in the required direction. See
fig. 9
Wheeling to the right or left : The opposite hand, i.e., for Right Wheel left
hand, and for Left Wheel right hand is extended in line with the shoulder. A
circular movement is then made, on completion of which the arm and body should
point in the required direction.
Double : The clenched hand moved up and down between the thigh and
shoulder. See. fig. 14.
Quick March from double: Bend the right elbows with the palm of the hand
open and facing the men and then drop it smartly. See fig. 15.
Follow me : The arm swung from rear to front above the shoulder. See fig. 16.

165
 As you were: The arm extended downwards with the hand open and waived
across the body parallel to the ground. See fig. 18.
Kneeling position : Bend right knee slightly and indicate signal by touching the
knee three times.
Lying position: Two or three slight movements with the open hand towards the
ground (Palm downwards). See fig. 17.
Section 4
Signals With The Rifle
The following communicating signals will be made with the Rifles :
Enemy in sight in small numbers: The rifle held above the head at the full
extent of the arm and parallel with the ground, muzzle pointing to the front. See
fig. 19.
Enemy in sight in large numbers: The rifle held as in the previous signal,
but raised and lowered frequently. See fig. 20.
No enemy in sight: The rifle held up to the full extent of the arm, muzzle
uppermost. See fig. 21
NOTE: These signals may be used by Scouts, etc., sent ahead of their
sections; care should be taken that the signals cannot be seen by the enemy.
Enemy centre of resistance holding up advance: Place head gear on a rifle
and point in the direction from which fire is coming.
Section 5
Control By Whistle Blasts
The following whistle blasts are used:
Cautionary blast (A short-blast)—to draw attention to a signal or order
about to be given.
The alarm blast (A succession of alternate long and short blasts)—to turn
out men from Camps or bivouacs to fall in, or to occupy previously arranged
positions.
The Rally Blast (A succession of short blasts).
To denote close on the leader in wood, bushes, darkness or crowd, when
the manual signal cannot be seen.
On the above blast being given, the men will double towards the sound of
the whistle and will rally on the leader facing in the same direction.

166
 CHAPTER XXIII
STREET LINING
General: Street lining is generally done on occasions of important melas,
religious festivals, for passing vehicular and pedestrian traffic and for protection
of VIPs. This is generally done without arms, but on important occasions the
duties may be performed with lathis and also weapons.
Strength: The force employed should be according to the length of the road
or area to be guarded and as far as possible the number of men should be enough
to maintain proper control and intercommunication.
Formations: For Street Lining, a platoon or company generally falls in two
ranks, unless the road has to be divided into two parts for passing vehicular and
pedestrian traffic, or when men are short and a greater distance has to be covered
up, in which case the squad or platoon has to be brought into single file from two
ranks.
Deployment: For deploying the platoon or company for the above
movements, it is generally opened out from the rear by bringing it in the centre of
the road and then turning it to the required direction of the road which has to be
guarded.
Dressing: The dressing in all the formations is taken from the guides who
opens out first.
Men will open out and close at the Slope Arms. When required interval has
been achieved, each file will Order Arms and Stand-At-Ease together. Similarly
when ordered to close, each file will come to Attention and Slope Arms together
and then move off.
Section 1
For Guarding A Road On Both Sides.
1. Street Lining from the rear on both sides of the road.....Paces extend Quick
March.
(Sarak Ke Dono Taraf Pichhe Se-Kadam Khol kar Line Bana—Tez chal)
2. Action. At this command the platoon or company which is in two ranks will
move in the direction of the road which has to be guarded.
Both Men in the rear file on the command ‘Quick March’ will touch the
men in front and at the same time wheel outward and after they have reached
the edge of the road will halt and about turn. If with arms, both will Order
Arms and Stand At Ease together. Similarly, each file will carry out the
same procedure as the rear file.

167
NOTE : If the squads are on the move, the command ‘Quick March will be
omitted.
No definite pace can be given for the distance; in each case therefore,
the men will halt at the edge of the road.
Closing
1. On Right/Left, Close (Dahine/Baen, Simatt)
2. Action: The File on the Right/Left Flank will come to attention, take a step
forward, slope arms, turn inwards and march down in front of their respective
ranks. When all the files have moved out, the following order will be given.
Inward About Wheel (Ander Ko Pichhe Ghoom)
The men of the leading file will wheel inwards and at the same time close
their distance to two paces.
Note : The Right and Left Flanks of the squad will be according to the or original
formation of the squad.
Section 3
For Guarding A Road On Both Sides Alternately
For deploying the platoon or company alternately it will be turned in the
required direction and the following command will be given.
Form Single File—Quick March (Ek File Bana—Tez Chal)
On getting this command the front rank men will march forward. The rear
rank will follow the front rank in single file. If the platoon/Coy. is already marching
in the file the portion ‘quick march (Tez chal)’ of the words of command should
be omitted.
When single file has been formed the following orders will be given.
1. Street Lining From The Rear On Both Sides Of The Road Alternately....Paces
Extend.
(Sarak ke Dono Taraf Pichhese Bari Bari.... Kadam Khol kar Line Bana).
2. Action : On the command ‘Extend’ the rear rank man will touch the man in
front of him and at the same time will wheel to the right; the front rank man
similarly will wheel to the left. After completing the interval, they will halt
at the edge of the road and about turn. Similar action will be done by the
remaining men of the rear and front ranks.
If with arms, each man will order arms and stand at ease simultaneously.
Note: Single file can also be formed from at the halt. If the formation is to
be made from at the halt the command “Quick March’ will be added after ‘Extend’.

168
Closing
1. On the Right/Left Close (Dahine/Baen Simatt)
2. Action : Same as in section 84. The farthest man on the extreme flank who
has been ordered to close will march first and when he comes in line with
his original pair, both will move off together.
Section 5
For Deploying A Platoon Or Company From The Centre.
1. For deploying a platoon or company from the centre, the centre man will
first be proved. The following command will then be given:
2. (i) Street Lining From the Centre on Both Sides of the Road, Ranks Outward
Turn.
(Sarak ke Dono Taraf Madhya se Khol kar Line Bana—Linen Bahar Mur)
At this command the ranks on the right and left of the centre men will turn
outwards. The centre men of the rear rank will turn about.
(ii) From the Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paces Extend Quick March (Pichhe
Se. . . . . . . .Kadam Khol Kar Tej Chal)
3. Action: At the command ‘’Quick march,” the centre men will advance to
the front and rear and take up positions on the side of the road, halt, turn
about, and order arms (if armed).
The remaining ranks (i.e., ranks on the left and right of the centre men) will
act as in Section 1 and after achieving the required interval, dress up from
the centre man of their ranks.
4. Closing: - If it is desired to close at the centre, the following command will
be given.
5. On the Centre Close. (Madhya Simatt)
6. Action. (i) The centre men will advance forward and form up in the middle
of the road at two paces interval in the original formation. The remaining
men will close up on the right and left of the centre men and turn in the
required direction which they faced originally.
(ii) The ranks could also be closed as given in Section 1.
Section 6
For Dividing A Road Into Two Halves For Passing Vehicular And Pedestrian
Traffic
After the formation of single file as described in Section 3 the following
commands will be given :

169
1. Street Lining From The Rear Down The Centre Facing Outward. . . . .
Paces Extend.
(Sarak ke Madhye Bahar Munh karte Hue Pichhe se. . . . .Kadam Khol Kar
Line Bana)
2. Action : On the command ‘Extend’ the rear rank man will touch the man in
front of him and at the same time come to the halt and about turn. The
remaining men will similarly touch the men in front after taking the required
paces and halt, the front rank men turning to the left and the rear rank men
to the right. The last man will halt and face in the same direction in which
the line is moving. After each man has taken his position, he will come to
Order Arms and Stand At Ease.
Section 1
Closing
1. On the Right Close. (Dahine Simatt)
2. Action. On the command Close, two men on the left of the front and rear
rank will come to attention and slope arms. The rear rank man, who is in the
extreme end, will turn to his left and move off wheeling to the left.
When the Rear end man has come in line will the second man of Rear
Rank, the second man will move off along with him to the right.
The remaining men of the ranks when these two men are nearing them, will
come to attention, slope arms and follow them.
When all the men have thus joined their ranks and formed two ranks, the
following words of command will be given.
‘Outward About Wheel’ (Bharhar Se Pichhe Ghoom)
At this command both the guides will outward about wheel and at the same
time close their distance and maintain their usual two paces interval between
ranks.

170
 CHAPTER XXIV
COMPANY DRILL
The movements in Company Drill incorporate most of the basic movements
of squad and platoon drill detailed in this Manual.
Company Drill, well conducted, is of great value in building up the morale
and confidence of the company. It also provides an opportunity to practice junior
leaders in giving words of command and in asserting their power of command.
Company Drill should at first be preceded by a lecture to the officers, under-
officers and men to ensure that they understand the formation and movements to
be done. Officers and under-officers should change places during drill so that all
are practised.
Section 1
Strength Of A Company
The strength of a Police Company normally consists of the following officers and
men. The rank and strength of the officers and platoon may differ from State to State.
Designation Strength Rank
(i) Coy. Commander One Gazetted/Inspector
(ii) Platoon Commanders Three Inspector/Sub-Inspector
(iii) Coy. Have. Major One Senior Havaldar
(C.H.M.)
(iv) Coy. Qr. Master One Next Senior
Havaldar (C.Q.M.H.)
(v) Platoon Havaldar Three Third Senior
(vi) Platoon Three* Hd. Constables and Constables
Note: *A Platoon normally consists of 6 Havaldars, and thirty constables
The Platoon Havaldar is the senior most from amongst the Havaldars
in a platoon.
Section 2
Formations And Positions Of Officers And Under Officers
1. The following are the formations in Company Drill:
(i) Line
(ii) Column of Threes.
(iii) Column of Platoons.
(iv) Close Column of Platoons.
(v) Line of Platoon in Threes.
(vi) Column of Route.
171
2. Line :
Line is the formation in which the three platoons form up side by side with
three paces interval between each platoon, i.e., No. 1 platoon on the right No. 2
in the middle and No. 3 platoon on the extreme left. The position of the Platoon
Commanders is in the centre and three paces ahead of their respective platoons.
The C.H.M. will be level with the centre platoon havaldar, but one file on his
right and the C.Q.M.H. one file to his left.
3. Column of Threes :
Column of threes is the same as Line but facing a flank. The officers will be
on the directing flank. If this flank is changed officers and the supernumerary
rank will move clockwise round platoons to gain their positions—on the march
in double time, at the halt in quick time.
4. Column and Close Column of Platoons :
Column of Platoons is the formation in which the platoons are one behind
the other at a distance equal to their own length plus three paces, e.g., the distance
between the first and the second platoons is the frontage of the platoon plus three
paces.
In close column the distance between each platoon is the same (i.e., 7 or 12 paces),
but in Column the distance will vary with any variation in the strength of platoons.
For normal purposes Close column of Platoons will be formed at 12 paces
distance. This is measured between the heels of the rear rank of the leading platoon
and those of the front rank of the next platoon. The distance is based on the room
required to open ranks for inspection. For Drill seven paces is more convenient.
5. Line of Platoon in Threes :
This is the formation in which the platoons are in Three formation with the
leading Threes of all the Three platoons in one line. The distance between platoons
depends upon the order given. The position of the Platoon Commanders will be
three paces in front and in centre of their respective platoons.
6. Column of Route :
This is the same as Column of Threes except that all officers and
supernumeraries are in the ranks, the Company Commander leading Position of
Platoon Commanders will be three paces ahead of their respective platoons. The
C.H.M. will be in level with the Platoon Commander of the leading platoon and
the C.Q.M.H. will be in the rear of No. 3 Platoon. Platoon Havaldars will be in
the rear of their respective platoons.
NOTE: Company and Platoon Commanders will break ranks to supervise the
marching and if necessary to give a word of command or pay a
compliment.
When marching along a road the column should be kept well into the
side of the road, so as to allow other traffic to pass.
172
 Section 3
Dressing
1. On being halted in line column or close column, a company will always be
dressed.
2. On the command “Right Dress” (Dahine Saj)—
(a) The men dress by the right.
(b) The officers in front of the company turn about together as the men
turn off their heads, and supervise the dressing and covering off. They
take up their dressing by the flank of direction.
(c) The Company Havaldar Major turns to his right and marches out five
paces to the flank of the company, wheels left, halts in line with the
front rank and five paces from it, turns left and dresses all three ranks
in rotation. He will return to the line of the front rank having completed
the dressing of the rear rank, and will give “Eyes Front” (Samne Dekh.)
The Company in Column or Close Column.
3. On the command “Right Dress’ (Dahine Saj)—
(a) The men dress by the right.
(b) The officers turn about as the men turn their heads.
(c) The Platoon Havaldars turn right and move out five paces to the flank
of their platoons, wheel left, halt five paces away from and level with
their front rank, turn left and carry on with the dressing at the command
‘Steady’ given by the C.H.M. Having dressed all three ranks they will
return to their position five paces from and level with their front rank,
facing inwards.
NOTE: In order that the Platoon Havaldars may work together it is usual to
lay down the number of paces they will take when marching out.
(d) The C.H.M. steps off and halts six paces to the front of and facing the
right hand man of the company, from which position he can check the
covering of the right-hand man of each platoon. He then turns left,
moves out five paces and checks the dressing of the platoon Havaldars.
On the command ‘Steady’ given by the C.H.M. the platoon havaldars
will carry on the dressing.
(e) When dressing is complete, the Platoon Havaldar of the leading platoon
will give “No......Platoon, Eyes Front.” The centre Platoon Havaldar
repeats the order but omits the word ‘platoon’. The rear platoon
Havaldar gives the cautionary command in full.

173
 On the command “Eyes-Front ‘(Samne Dekh)” given by the rear Platoon
Havaldars:
(f) The officers turn about.
(g) The Platoon Havaldars and C.H.M. step off and return to their places.
4. If the Platoon Havaldar is not available the flank Section Commanders will
dress the platoon.
5. In Company Drill each man will take up his dressing on completion of each
movement. For ceremonial purposes the company should be practised in
dressing by word of command.
6. Unless otherwise ordered, a company will fall-in in Close Column of
Platoons and will then be inspected. If however space does not permit of
this being done, it will fall-in in Line Formation.
Section 4
A Company In Close Columns Of Platoons Falling In
The Havaldar Major will give the command Fall-in upon which the right
Section Commanders of each platoon will take one pace forward (at the order).
They will be covered off by the Havaldar Major who will then give the command
‘Steady’. Upon this command the company will come to attention, take a pace
forward and, after a pause will take up their dressing.
On completion of the dressing, the senior officer will give the command
Stand-at-Ease.
Section 5
A Company When Halted Changing Ranks
About—Turn (pichhe Mur) The whole company will turn about
except officers and supernumeraries
who will regain their positions by
passing round the flanks, or through
the ranks.
NOTE: If it is desired to turn about
without changing ranks, the command
‘About Turn’ will be preceded by the
caution. ‘The Company will retire’ and
in order to resume the original
direction ‘The Company will
Advance’ in which case the officers
and supernumeraries turn about but
will not change their position.

174
 Section 6
Close Column Movements
1. A close column when halted
changing direction.
Change Direction Right—Right (i) The company, except the leading
Wheel (Dahine Disha Badal— will make a partial turn to the left; the
Dahine Ghoom) leading platoon will not turn, but will
look to the right.
Quick—March (Tez—Chal) (ii) Each man will move round on the
circumference of a circle, of which the
right of the leading platoon is the
centre. The outer flank will direct, but
when platoons are of unequal strength
they will maintain the same relative
positions as they held before the
wheel. The Company Havaldar Major
will superintend the wheel on the left
flank, the C.Q.M.H. on the right.
Moving out after the command. Wheel
the former must in regulating the pace,
watch the left guide of the rear
platoon, who will continue to march
at a full pace throughout, and on
whose movement the march of every
man in the company should be made
to depend.
(iii) When the company has circled
round to the required angle, the
command ‘Forward’ (Age Barh) or
halt (Tham) will be given, on which
all will at once advance in the required
direction, or come to halt.
(iv) When wheeling to the left, it will
be the duty of the Havaldar Major to
watch the right guide of the rear
platoon as above.
(v) A Close Column moving in Threes
will wheel as above, the leading Three
of each platoon wheeling in the same
manner as the leading platoon above.
175
 2. A Close Column when halted
forming Column of Threes, in the
front or rear.
Advance (or Retire) in Column of The Commander of the leading (or
Threes from the Right, company platoon will give ‘No.... ‘Platoon Left
right rear) left turn. Wheel Quick—March’ and each
[Dahine (Baen) Se Tino Tin platoon commander will act similarly
Colunm Men Age Barh (Pichhe in time to gain his place in the Column
Laut) kampani Dahine-Baen Mur.) of Threes.
3. Close Column when halted moving
in Columns of Threes towards a flank.
Move to the Right (or Left) in The Commander of the leading (or
Column of Threes, Company Right platoon will give No......Platoon and each
rear) (or Left) Turn. [Kampani remaining Platoon Commander will
Tino Tin Quick—March Column give No....Platoon, Left (or Right)
Men Dahine (ya Baen) Chal, Wheel, Quick—March’ in time to gain
kampani Dahine (ya Baen) Mur]. his place in Column of Threes.
4. A close column when halted moving
to a flank in Threes.
Move To The Right (or Left) In The platoon on the right or left will
Line of Platoon In Threes, direct unless any other platoon is
Company Right (or Left) Turn, detailed. (This formation can also be
Quick March. [Platoonon Ki Tino done while the Coy. is on the move.
Tin Ki Line Men Dahine(Ya Baen) To do this, the words ‘Quick March
Chal, Company Dahine (Ya Baen) (Tez Chal) should be omitted from the
Mur, Tez Chal] words of command.
5. A Close Column when halted
forming line facing in the same
direction.
On the Left Form Line, Remainder The leading platoon will stand fast. The
Left Turn, Quick March. (Baen Ko remainder will be led by their guides
Line Band. Baki Baen Mur, Tez by the shortest route to the spot where
Chal). their inner flank will rest. Each
platoon will then wheel parallel to the
alignment and when opposite to its
place in line will be halted and turned
to the right by its commander.
6. A Close Column on the march
forming line at the halt, facing a flank.

176
By The Left, At The Halt, Facing The Commander of the rear platoon
Left Form Line, (Baen Se Thamkar will at once give at the Halt Left-
Baen Disha Line Bana). Form. Each of the other commanders
will form his platoon into line in like
manner when it arrives at column
distance from the platoon next in rear.
7. Advancing or retiring in column
from close.
Advance In Column The commander of the leading platoon
(Column Men Age Barh). will give No. . . .Platoon will Advance,
By the Right, Quick March. (No....
Platoon Age Barhega, Dahine Se, Tez
Chal) and the remaining Platoons will
be similarly marched off when the
platoon next in front has reached
column distance.
Retire In Column, Company About Platoon commanders will turn about
Turn (Column Men Pichhe Laut, and march their platoons in succession
Company Pichhe Mur.) at column distance giving the
command. No...Platoon will Retire,
About Turn, by the left, Quick March
(No....Platoon, Pichhe Lautegi,
Pachee Mur, Baen Se Tez Chal).
9. Close column on the march opening
to Column.
On No...Platoon Form Column of The leading platoon will continue to
platoons. Remainder Mark time. march. The other platoons will mark
(No.... Platoon Par Platoonon Ki time and will be advanced by the
Kalam Bana, Baki Kadam Tal) respective platoon commanders when
column distance is achieved.
NOTE: If it is necessary to form
column at the halt, the Coy.
Commander should give the words of
command as follows: —
“On No.....Platoon (the rear platoon)
Form Column of Platoons. (No..
..Platoon par platoonon ki Kalam
Bana).” On this command the rear
platoon commander will, at once,
bring his platoon to halt after which
177
 the other platoon commanders will
bring their platoons to halt
successively when column distance is
achieved.
10. A Close Column when halted
opening to column.
On No..... Platoon (Rear Platoon) The rear platoon will stand fast. The
Form Column Of Platoons, remainder will step off and will be
Remainder Quick March, (No.... halted by their commanders on
Platoon par Platoonon Ki Kalam reaching their positions in Column
Bana, Baki Tez Chal). distance.
NOTE: (i) If it is required to form
column on the middle platoon, the
command will be “Column of
Platoons on No...platoon (the Middle
Platoon). Platoon in the Rear Will
Retire, About Turn, Remainder Quick
March (No...platoon par platoonon Ki
Kalam Bana, Pichhe Wale Platoon
Pichhe Lautegi, Pichhe Mur, Baki Tez-
Chal)”. On this command the named
platoon will stand fast.
Platoon in the rear will turn about All
except the named platoon step off and
will be halted by their commanders on
reaching their positions in column
distance. Platoon in rear will be turned
at by their commanders.
(ii) If it is required to form Column of
Platoons on the front platoon the
command will be Form Column of
Platoons No.... Platoon (Front
Platoon Remainder Will Retire About
Turn Quick March (No.... Platoon .
Platoonon Ki Kalam Bana, Baki
Pichhe Lautega, Pichhe Mur, Tez
Chal).
8. A close column moving to a flank
in L of Platoons in Threes forming line
at the halt.

178
 At the halt facing left (or right) The Commander of the right platoon
Form Line [Tham Kar Baen will give the command No....Platoon
(Ya Dahine) Disha Line Bana] Halt, I (right) Turn, (No....Platoon
Tham, Ba (Dahine) Mur].
The remaining platoon will be led by
their guides by the shortest route into
their position in line and will be turned
to the left (or right by order of their
commanders.
Section 7
Column Movements
1. A column on the march changing,
direction.
Change Direction —Right The commander of the leading platoon
(Dahine Disha Badal) will give the command ‘No.....
Platoon, Right—Form (No.... Platoon
Dahine Ban) and when the platoon is
formed in the new direction ‘Forward’
(Age Barh). The remaining platoon on
arriving at the same point will be
formed successively in a similar
manner.
Before changing direction left, a
column should normally be ordered to
march by the left.
2. A column when halted forming
column of Threes (In the same
direction).
Advance in Column of Three from At the Command ‘Quick March’ each
the Right, Company Right Turn, platoon will wheel to the left forming
Platoons Left Wheel, Quick March. Column of Threes. When a Column
(Dahine Se Tino Tin Column is on the march, platoons may, if
Men Age Barh Kampani Dahine desired, advance in Threes in
Mur, Platoonon Baen Ghoom, succession. On the caution ‘In
Tez Chal.) succession Advance in Column of
Threes from the Right’ (Dahine Se,
Bari Bari Tino Tin Kalam Men Age
Barh) the commander of the leading
Platoon will give the order

179
 ‘No...Platoon Right—Turn, Left
Wheel’. Platoon No....Dahine Mur,
Baen Ghoom) On arriving at the same
point the commander of each
succeeding platoon will act in a similar
manner.
NOTE: (i) When the column is on the
march, Column of Threes can be done
to the retire direction. For this the Coy.
Commander has to give “About Turn”
(if the column is not already marching in
the retire direction) to the Company and
then order “Retire” instead of “Advance”.
(ii) When the column is on the march
this formation (i.e. advancing/retiring
in Column of Threes from the right/
left) can be done on the words of
command of the Coy. Commander.
The words of command of the Coy.
Commander will be: “Advance/Retire
in column of Threes from the Right/
Left. Company Right/Left Turn,
Platoons Left Wheel. (Dahine Se/Baen
Se Tino Tin Kalam Men Age Barh/
Pichhe Laut Kampani Dahine/Baen
Mur, Platoonon Baen Ghoom).
On these Words of Command all the
platoons will turn to the right/left and
then wheel to the left simultaneously.
The platoon commanders need not
give any words of command.
3. A column when halted forming
column of Threes (To a flank).
Move to the Right In Column of The leading platoon will move in the
Threes Company Right Turn, required direction and the remaining
Platoon On The Left To The two platoons will follow the leading
Front Remainder Left Wheel, platoon.
Quick March. (Tino Tin When a column is on the march,
Column Men Dahine Chal platoons may, if desired, move
Kampani Dahine Mur, Baen to the flank in threes in succession.

180
Platoon Samne Ko Baki On the caution ‘In succession Move
Baen Ghoom, Tez Chal). to the Right in Column of Threes’
(Dahine Se Bari Bari Tino Tin Kalam
Men Dahine Chal) the leading platoon
commander will order ‘No.......
Platoon Right Turn’. The remaining
platoons will follow suit on reaching
the same spot.
When a column is on the march, the
Company may, if desired, move to the
flank in Column of Threes on the
command of the Company
Commander. For this movement the
words of Command will be the same
as per halt except that the portions
‘Quick March, (Tej Chal) should be
deleted.
4. A column on the march forming
facing in the same direction.
On The Left Form Line, Remainder The leading platoon will continue to
Left Incline, Double March. advance in quick time, dressing by the
(Baen Ko Line Bana Baki Adha right. When each platoon is immediately
Baen Mur, Daurke Chal). in the rear of its position in line it will
receive from its commander
“No...Platoon Right Incline (No...
Platoon, Adha Dahine Mur) and on
reaching the alignment Break into
Quick Time Quick March’ (Tej Chaal
Men Aa, Tej chal) Dressing will be by
the right in each case.
If the company is halted, the command
Quick March will be given instead of
Double March. The leading platoon
will stand fast the remainder will act
as in squad drill and on reaching the
alignment the command Halt instead
of Break into Quick Time, Quick
March will be given.
5. A column when halted forming line
facing a flank.

181
At The Halt, facing Left Into Line, The men will act as in squad drill, the
Platoons left-Form Quick March left guide of each platoon acting on
(Tham Kar, Baen Disha Line Bana the Word “Form” as the pivot man of
Platoonon Baen Ban, Tez Chal). a squad.
This formation (i.e. forming line to a
flank from Column of platoon) can
also be done to a flank when the
Column is on the move. For this the
words of Command will be the same
except that the portions ‘At the Halt
(Thamkar) and ‘Quick March’ (Tez
Chal) will be omitted. The platoons
will change direction to the left
simultaneously and after the formation
will continue to mark time till the
order to advance is given by the Coy
Commander.
6. Column on the march closing to
Close Column.
On No... Platoon Form Close The leading platoon will continue to
Column of Platoons, Remainder advance in quick time, the remainder
Double March (Number Par taking up the quick time as they gain
Nikat ........ Column Bana, Baki correct distance.
Daur Ke Chal).
NOTE: If the command is ‘At the halt
on No...Platoon form close column of
platoons (Thamkar No...Platoon par
Platoon ki Nikat Kolam Bana), the
leading platoon will at once be halted
by its commander. The remainder
platoons will be halted successively
on reaching their position in close
column.
7. A column when haired closing to
Close No...Platoon Form Column..
On No.. .Platoon Form Close The leading platoon will stand fast. The
Remainder March (No... Platoon Column remainder will step off and
Par Nikat Par Nikat Column will be halted by Quick their
Bana, Baki Tez Chal). commanders on reaching their
positions in Close Column.

182
 (i) If it is required to form Close
Column on any but the leading
platoon, the command will be Close
Column on No....... Platoon, Platoon
is) in From will Retire, About Turn.
Remainder Quick March (No.....
Platoon Par Nikat Kalam. Bana, Age
Wali Platoon/Platoonon, Piche
Lautega, Pichhe Mur, Baki Tez Chal).
The named platoon will stand fast,
platoon (s) in front will turn about. All
except the named platoon will step off
and will be halted by their
commanders on reaching their
position in Close Column, Platoon (s)
in front will be turned about by their
commanders.
(ii) If it is required to form on the rear
platoon the command will be Close
Column on No... Platoon, Remainder
will retire, About Turn, Quick March.
(No...Platoon Par Nikat Kalam Bana,
Baki Pichhe Lautega, Pichhe Mur, Tez
Chal). The movement will be carried
out as above.
8. A column when halted or on the
move forming Line of platoons in
threes to a flank.
Move to the Right/Left in Line of The platoons will turn to the required
Platoons in Threes, Company direction simultaneously. When the
Right/Left Turn, (Platoonon Ki Company is already on the march the
Tino Tin ki Line Me Dahine/Baen platoons will take dressing from the
Chal, Kampani Dahine/Baen Mur). leading platoon.

Section 8
Line Movements
1. A line when halted forming column
(or close column) facing in the same
direction.

183
On the Right Form Column (or The platoon on the right will standfast.
Close Column) of Platoons, The remainder will be led by their
Remainder Right Turn, Quick guides by the shortest route to their
March (Dahine Ko Platoonon positions in column (or close column)
Ki Column (Ya Nikat Column) where they will receive from their
Bana, Baki Dahine Mur. commanders No.. . Platoon Halt, Left
Turn, (No. . . Platoon Than, Baen
Mur) On the command ‘Halt’, the
right guides will at once turn to their
left and take up their covering and
distance from the right guide of the
platoon in front, the platoons dressing
by the right as soon as they have
turned to the left.
This formation can also be done, when
the line is on the move. The words of
command will be the same except that
the portion ‘Quick March’ will be
omitted. On this command the leading
platoon will continue to march and the
remainder platoon’s will act as
mentioned above.
It is also possible to do the some
formation when the line is marching
in retire direction. The words of
command will be the same except that
instead of ‘Advance’, the words
‘Retire’ will be given.
NOTE: (i) This can be done on the
left as well by giving the command
‘On the Left Form Column (or Close
Column) of Platoons, Remainder Left
Turn—
Quick March’ [Platoon Baen, Ko
Kalam (Ya Nikat Kalam) Bana, Baki
Baen Mur—Tej Chal] when No. 3
Platoon will stand fast and no 3
Platoon. This movement can be
performed at the halt (ii) A column or
close column can also be made on No.
Platoon by giving the following
184
 command ‘On No. 2 Forum Column
or Close Clounm of Plattens,
Remainder Inward Turn—Quick
March, At the Command Quick March
No. 1 Platoon will form up in front of
No. 2 platoon and No.3 platoon in the
rear of No. 2.
2. A line when halted advancing in
column of platoons.
Advance In Column Of Platoon The platoon on the right will advance
From the Right, Remainder Right command ‘Quick March’. The
Turn, Quick March, Dabhine Streamlining two platoon will move
Platoon Ke Column Men Age Barh, to the right and when the guides of
Baki Dahine Mur, Tez Chal. of each platoon are in the rear and
covered off from the guides of the
preceding platoons, the commander
will give No...... Platoon Left Turn’,
(No......Platoon Baen Mur).
3. A line when halted forming column
facing a flank at the halt.
At The halt Facing right Forum The men will act as in squad drill, the
Column of Platoons, Platoons right guide of each platoon acting the
Right From, Quick March pivot man of a squad. “This formation
(Thamkaras Dahine Disha can also be done Banawhen the
Platoonon ki Kalam Bana. Company in Line on the Platoon
move.
Platoonon Dahine Ban, Tez Chal). For this formation the words of
command will be “Company, Facing
Right Form Column of Platoons,
Platoons Right Form (Kampani,
Dahine Disha Platoonon Ki Kalam
Bana, Platoonon Dahine Ban). After
this formation the command
“Advance (Age Barh)” can be given.
If it is necessary to do this formation
at the halt, then the words Thamkar’
should be prefixed to the words of
command, similarly when the
Company is halted in line this
formation can be done to a flank
without halting the Company. For this
185
 purpose the world “At the halt
(Thamkar)” will be omitted from the
words of command and after the
formation the Company commander
will give the command “Advance
(Age Barh)”.
NOTE: This formation cannot be
formed facing the left flank because
that will change the order of the
Sections.
4. A line forming line of platoon in
threes in the same direction.
NOTE: (i) this formation can also be
done when the Company is on the
move in line formation. For doing this
the portion “Quick March” should be
omitted from the words command.
(ii) This formation can also be done
towards the rear either from the halt
or on the move. To do this the
Company should be turned to the
“Right (to the Left, if already facing
the retire direction in the line
formation) and then the platoons
should be wheeled to the Right”.
Section 9
Movements From Column Of Threes
1. A Column of Threes forming
forward into Column of Platoons.
The Company will Form Column (i) The man will act as in squad drill.
of Platoons On the Left From- Formation will be made on the leading
Platoons. Kampani Platoon Ke guide of each platoon. When column
Column Banaigi, Baen has been formed the company
Platoon Bana). commander will give ‘Forward, By the
Right’.
(ii) A column of threes if desired could
form column of platoons in
succession, also in that case the Coy.
Commander will give the command,

186
 “the Company will Form Colunm of
Platoons”. (Kampani, Bari Bari Baen
Par Platoonon Ki Kalam Bana). The
commander of the leading platoon will
at once give ‘No.... Platoon, on the
Left Form—Platoon followed by
‘Forward’ and on reaching the same
point the remaining commanders will
act in a similar manner.
(iii) This formation can also be done
in such a way that the company will
come to halt automatically after the
formation. To do this the world of
command “At the Halt” (Thamkar)
should be used. This formation when
required to be done when the Coy is
halted in column of Threes, the world
Tez Chal should be used in the world
of command at the end.
2. A column of three forming into
close column of platoons at the halt.
At The Halt On the Left Form Thc commander of the leading platoon
Close Column Of Platoons will at once give ‘No...Platoon, at the
[Thamkar Baen Ko Platoonon Halt, On The Left Form—Platoon’.
Ka Nikat Column Bana] (No...Flatten,Thamkar Bana par
Platoon Bana). The commander of the
remaining platoon on arriving at close
colunm distance will act in similar
manner.
3. A column of Threes forming
column (or close column) of platoons
at the halt facing a flank.
At The Halt Facing Left From The commander of the leading platoon
Column (or Close Column (or will halt his platoon and it to the left
Close Column of Platoons, by giving ‘No...Platoon Halt, Left
[Tham kar Baen Disha Turn’ (No.... Platoon Tham, Baen
Platoon Ka Column Mur). The remainder will be led by
(ya Nikat Column) Bana]. their guides by the shortest route to
their positions in column or close
column where they will receive the

187
 command ‘No...Platoon Halt, Left
Turn’. On the world of Command Halt
the right guides will at once turn to
their left and take up their covering
and distance from the right guide of
the platoon in from.
4. A column of Threes forming
column facing a flank and moving
forward.
Facing Left Advance In Column. The commander of the leading platoon
(Baen Disha Column Men Age Barh). will give ‘No....Platoon, Left Turn’.
Each Platoon commander when the
leading guide of his platoon is in the
rear and covered off from the guides
of the preceding platoon will give
‘No.. Platoon. Left Turn’.
5. A column of Threes forming line of
Platoon in Threes, moving in the same
direction.
On the Right Form Line of The leading platoon will continue to
Platoon. In Threes at ....Paces move forward in quick time. The
Interval, Remainder Double remainder will be led by their guide
March Dahine Ko—Kadam Ko by the shortest route to their position
Fasle per Platoon Ki Tino Tin in the alignment at the named interval,
Ki line Bana Baki Daur Ke Chal. where Platoon Commander will give
the command No.....Platoon, Break
into Quick Time, Quick March’, at the
same time taking post three paces in
form of the leading threes of their
respective platoons.
6. A column of Threes forming a line
of Platoon in Threes in the same
direction at the halt.
At the Halt On The Right Form The leading platoon will be halted by
Line Of Platoon In Threes At its commander and the remainder on
Column Paces Interval, arriving at the remainder will receive
Remainder Left Incline from the required interval will receive
[Tham Kar Dahine Ko Column from the platoon commander ‘No....
Paces Interval, Remainder Platoon Left Incline’ and when in the
Column Quadam Ke Fasle Par alignment, No......Platoon,Halt.

188
 Platoonon Ki Tino Tin Ki Line
Bana, Baqi Adha Baen Mur.]
7. A column of threes when on the
move forming a line of platoon in
threes to the Right flank.
Move To The Right In Line Of All the platoons will wheel to the right
Platoons In Threes, Platoons simultaneously. Dressing should be
Right Wheel Platoonon Ki Tino taken from the left.
Tin Ki Line Men Dahine Chal, This formation can also be done from
Platoonon, Dahine Ghum). Column of Threes halted. The words
of command will be the same except
that the words ‘Quick March’ (Tez
Chal) will be added at the end.
Section 10
Movements From Line Of Platoon In Three (In Column Distance)
1. A line of platoon in threes (halted)
forming column of threes in the same
direction.
Advance In Column Of Threes The Leading platoons will advance and
From The Left, Platoon On The others will wheel to the left and follow
Left To the Front Remainder Left the leading platoon.
Wheel, Company Quick March If it is required to do this formation
(Baense Tino Tin Ki Kalam Men while the Company is on the move
Age Badhega, Baen Platoon Age the portion “Quick March” (Tez Chal)
Baki Baen Ghum, Kampani should be omitted from the words of
Tez Chal). command.
2. A line of platoon in threes (halted)
forming column of threes to a flank.
Company Facing Left Advance In All the three platoons will step off and
Column Of Threes, Platoons Left wheel to the left simultaneously.
Wheel, Quick. March (Kampani,
Baen Disha Tino Tin Ki Kalam This formation can be done while the
Men Age Badh, Platoonon company is on the move. To do this
Baen Ghoom, Tez Chal). the words “Quick March” (Tez-Chal)
should be omitted from the words of
command.
3. A line of platoon in threes halted
forming line, at the halt, in the same
direction.
189
Company, At The Halt Form Line, All the platoons will form on the right
On The Right Form Platoons. simultaneously. (In this formation if
(Kampani, Thamkar Line Banaegi, the right guides of all the platoons are
Dahine Par Platoon Bana). leading the line will be formed in the
retire direction and vice versa).
This formation can also be done to
march the Company in line from the
halt position. To do this the portion
“At the Halt (Thamkar)” is to be
omitted from the words of command.
After the formation is completed
“Forward” (Age Badh) should be
ordered.
This formation can also be done, while
the Company is marching in Line of
Platoon in Threes, to bring the
Company to halt or to continue
marching. Necessary words of
command as mentioned above may be
given to do these.
4. A line of platoon in threes forming
column to a flank.
Advance/Retire in Column Of This can be done when the Company
Platoons, Company Left/Right is halted or on the move, (if the Line
Turn (Platoonon Ki Kalam Men of Platoons in Threes is in Close
Age Badhega/Pichhe Lautega Column distance then it will form
Kampani Baen/Dahine Mud). Close Column).
NOTE: The movements from and to
“Column of Route” can be done as per
Column of Threes. The only
difference is that the words “Column
of threes” may be substituted by the
words “Column of Route” (Kuch
Kalam) in the words of command.
Also each time the column of Route
formation is done the platoon
commanders will move to the front of
the platoons.

190
 Section 11
Dismissing
The officers will first be ordered to fall out, when they will move in quick
time to the commander of the parade, form up in line in front, salute and form up
behind him till the company is dismissed.

A COMPANY IN LINE

Note : A Company in Column of Three is an identification but facing a flank

191
 A COMPANY IN COLUMN
A Company in Close Column is exactly the same formation except the distance
between platoons is 7 or 12 paces.

1 92
CEREMONIAL DRILL

193
 CHAPTER XXV
CEREMONIAL DRILL
1. The objects of ceremonial drill are to promote ‘esprit-de-corps’ and by
attaining a high standard of steadiness and cohesion on the parade ground
to assist in the development of the moral qualities which are essential for
success in field operations.
2. These objects will be attained only by careful preparation and exact execution
on all ceremonial occasions. To this end practice and rehearsals will be
held at all levels, but units will be careful to avoid attempting to carry out
any form of ceremonial for the adequate execution of which their training
has not fitted them.
3. This chapter deals with the drill formations and procedure applicable to
normal ceremonial occasions and provides details of the procedure upto a
Battalion level. These could easily be adopted for lower formations upto a
Company level.
4. Officers are expected to interpret these instructions reasonably and
intelligently, bearing in mind that slight alterations can always be made to
suit the personnel, ground and other exceptional circumstances.
Section I
General Arrangements
1. In order to avoid confusion, all arrangements in connection with an
Inspection or Review necessitate careful preparations under the following
headings:
(i) Arrangements before the ceremony.
(ii) Arrangements for the ceremony,
(iii) Arrangements for dispersal,
(iv) Arrangements for spectators.
(i) Arrangements before the ceremony should normally include
instruction on the following:
(a) The formations in which units are to form up on the Inspection
Line, including any special directions regarding distances and
intervals.
(b) The method by which units and formations are to adjust dressing
on the Inspection Line, including details as to Markers.
(c) The massing of bands both for the inspection and for the march past.
(d) When bands are to play.

194
 (e) General administrative arrangements, i.e., the preparation of
ground, arrangements for spectators, representatives of the press,
traffic control, etc.
(f) Dress to be worn by the persons taking part in the parade.
(ii) Arrangements for the ceremony should include the following:
(a) An outline of the various phases of the ceremonies to be executed.
(b) The method of signalling words of command and the exact
procedure to be adopted on each signal.
(c) Any special instructions regarding distances and interval.
(d) Any special instructions regarding the bands and drums.
(e) The action to be taken by the various units after the march past.
(f) The methods of notifying a cancellation of the parade, e.g., who
takes the decision, who informs and who are informed, including
the means of informing.
(iii) Arrangements for dispersal: Special attention must be paid to traffic
control which must be well co-coordinated. Spectators should be asked
to remain in their places till the units are clear of the parade ground.
In addition, it is suggested that cordoning of the route by which the
units march off or the parade remaining at ease after the march past
till the crowd has dispersed, will assist in traffic control.
(iv) Arrangements for Spectators: It is essential that adequate arrangements
are made for officials of all services and for the general public. There
should be the minimum of seats reserved by name and they should be
restricted to the highest officials and most prominent local notables.
The remainder of the officials of the civil services and armed forces
and people of similar status in non-official life, should be allotted
tickets to general enclosures. They must not be segregated from each
other. Proper arrangements must also be made for the general public.
2. The issue of invitations to those given either individual reserved seats or
access to seats in the reserved enclosures must be done in good time and
advice or assistance of local officials, civil and military, should be sought
so that there are no omissions.
3. Programs: It is useful to issue a program of the parade with notes for
spectators as to when they stand up, salute, take of their hats, and so on.
There should also be loud speakers on all large parades commenting on the
parade for the benefit of the spectators, particularly the general public.
4. Other arrangements:
(a) The dais on which the person for whom the parade is held is to stand
195
 will have only a simple blue, brown or red durries. No carpets will be
used.
(b) The flagstaff will be behind the dais at a suitable distance, and as far
as possible painted white.
(c) Around the dais only people in uniform will be present. Broadcasters
or radio recorders will have their tables at some distance behind the
dais. Microphones when brought up to the person taking the salute
will be brought by a person in uniform.
(d) While the parade is on, persons in plain clothes will not be permitted
to wander about in front of the spectators. The Press and photographers
will be properly controlled by an officer.
Section 2
The Inspection Or Review Parade Ground

LEGEND
A — Before units march pa st after the inspection they will move in
Column of Route of T hrees from the right and will be formed up
at point A facing left in Close Column of Platoon or Companies,
the front rank of the leading company being in alignment with
Point A. When the order March Past is given, companies and
platoons well step off at column interval by the right, the word
of command being given in succession by Platoon Commanders
or Company Commanders in such time as to step off their Pla-
toon or Companies at the correct distance.
B — On reaching Point B, if in slow time, the command ‘Open Or-
der” (Khuli Line) will be given.
C — “Eyes Right” (Dahine Dekh).
D — “Eyes Front” (Samne Dekh).
E — “Close Order” (Nikat Line) (if applicable)
F — “Halt” (Tham) (if necessary)
NOTE: On the assumption that the parade is for a larger formation the distance
196
 between points E and F should be of sufficient length to enable all
units taking part “in the parade to form up in close column clear of
the saluting base after the march past, or, if the parade is not required
to return in close column, to enable the rear of each unit to clear the
saluting base before its commander gives the necessary order for
closing and moving off to a flank.
1. The length of the Inspection Line G—H depends on the frontage of the
troops being inspected. Its distance from the Passing Line will depend on
the greatest frontage occupied by any unit when marching past, plus the
depth occupied by the band or massed bands while playing the march past.
When larger bodies are being reviewed, this distance may require to be
increased to ensure that, when units are drawn up in the line for inspection
and commanders are in position at their correct distance in front of the
Inspection Line, the commander of the parade is at a suitable distance from
the Passing Line in proportion to the dimensions of the parade.
NOTE: It may also be necessary to reduce the distances of commanders in
front of the Inspection Line. Otherwise, in the case of large formation,
either the Inspection Line may be too far from the Passing Line or the
commander of the parade too near the Inspecting Officer.
2. The length of the Saluting Base (B—E) will neither be less than 120 nor
greater than 260 yards, the distance being dependent on local conditions.
The March Past begins at point B and ends at point E. The Reviewing
Officer will be behind the centre of the Saluting Base. Ten yards on each
side of him, along the Saluting Base, are two points, C and D, at which the
salute will begin and finish respectively.
If a March Past is to take place without opening and closing order, i.e. in
quick time only, Points B and E can be dispensed with. Points A and F
should, however, remain at their original distances.
3. The portion of the Passing Line A—B should be of sufficient length to
enable units to obtain their direction before reaching the Saluting Base.
Units will move up to Point B in close formation; from that point, they will
adopt the formation laid down for them in the orders for the review
inspection.
4. As a rule the Passing Line will be the same in length as the Inspection Line.
5. All the points will be marked by flags or markers. Flags or posts may be set
up to mark the line on which the troops are to form or the line may be
picked out or marked with whitewash.
NOTE: When large bodies of men are to march past it will usually be desirable
to place small colored flags among the passing line at appropriate
distances from Point B to guide units moving at correct distances.
197
 Section 3
Unit Organisation
1. For ceremonial purposes units may be organized
(a) Mounted Squad. In two ranks, if available.
(b) Dismounted Unit. In three ranks. A battalion will have at least four
companies on parade, each company sub-divided into
three platoons. Each platoon as possible be of equal
strength. Under Officers below the rank of Havaldars
will normally parade in three ranks. Surplus Havaldar
will normally parade in the ranks.
2. The personal weapon to be carried by the rank and file will be standardized.
3. Colors, etc., will be paraded.
4. The band will be on parade and will form up 8 paces in rear of the centre.
5. Detachments and individuals of other arms like the Home Prantiya Raksha
Dal, etc., may also parade when available.
Section 4
Parade Formations
1. The formation to be adopted by a Battalion or equivalent for review, in line
for review, will be as per Appendix ‘A’.
2. Appendix ‘B’ shows the formation of a Company or equivalent in Line of
Platoons and Column of Sections when on a ceremonial parade with
Battalion in line for review.
3. Appendix ‘C’ shows the formation to be adopted by an infantry battalion in
Mass for review.
4. The colors will remain at the carry throughout the inspection, but the color
party forming the escort to the colors will conform with the rest of the
parade, but do not stand easy.
5. Appendices ‘A’ to ‘C’ give in diagrammatic form the basis of any dismounted
ceremonial parade, however large or small. They should be referred to
throughout.
Section 5
Sizing A Dismounted Unit
1. The unit will first be sized in single rank—the tallest on the right—shortest
on the left. Each man will take 24 inches in the ranks. The word of command
will be “Tallest on the Right, Shortest on the Left, in Single Rank Size”.
(Lamba Dahine, Chhota Baen, Ek Line Men Qad Var) After being carefully
sized, the following words of command will be given: -
198
 (A) “Number” (Kar) Ginti
(B) “Odd Numbers One Pace Forward; Even Numbers One Pace Step
Back—March”. — (Visham Ek Kadam Aage, Sam Ek Kadam, Pichhe
Chal).
(C) “Stand Fast the Right-Hand Man, Odd Numbers to the Right, Even
Numbers to the Left, Ranks Right and Left Turn” (Dahine Jawan Khara
Rahega, Baqi Visham Dahine, Sam Baen, Linen Dahine Aur Baen
Mur).
(D) “Form Three Ranks—Quick March” (Tin Line Bana, Tej Chal).
On the command “Quick March” both ranks will step off—the left-hand
man of the even number rank will wheel to his right and lead on behind the off
number rank; the odd number rank will begin to form three ranks as it arrives in
position, i.e. No. 3 goes to the centre rank behind No.l, No. 5 goes to the rear
rank behind No. 3, No. 7 goes to the front rank, etc. (This can be simplified if the
senior under officer on parade goes along the ranks detailing front, centre and
rear ranks; but he must begin with odd number ranks first.
The unit is now properly sized in three ranks with the tallest on the flanks.
Section 6
Telling Off A Dismounted Unit
When the unit has been sized, it will be numbered from right to left, and
told off into platoons or their equivalent, which will then be numbered within the
unit. When the number of files is not divisible by three the outer platoons will be
stronger. A unit will be told off into platoons by calling out the numbers of the
left-hand man, e.g., “Number 15” on which command No. 15 will prove by raising
the left forearm parallel to the ground, elbow close to the side, fingers and thumb
extended and together, palm facing inwards. Then follows the command “Number
15—Left of No. 1 Platoon”; No, 15 will then cut his forearm away to the side.
‘’Number 29—Left of No. 2 Platoon”—and so on.
The Unit is now equalized.
Section 7
General Instructions For Inspections And Review
Outline procedure
1. The Inspection or Review Ground will be marked as laid down in Section 2.
2. The unit to be inspected will be drawn up in line, or mass formation on the
Inspection Line. See Appendices ‘A’ and ‘C’.
3. Before the Inspection Officer arrives, the formation or unit will fix bayonets
and ranks will be opened.
199
4. The Inspecting or Reviewing Officer will be received in accordance with
the instructions laid down in Section 9.
5. The Inspecting or Reviewing Officer will carry out his inspection as laid
down in Section 11 on the completion of which he will give orders for the
march past.
6. Units and formations will then march past in accordance with the instructions
laid down in subsequent sections.
7. For marching past the rate of marching will be 120 paces to the minute.
8. After completing the march past, units and formations will return to their
original position on the Inspection Line and await orders. If ordered to
advance in Review Order, the procedure will be as laid down in Section 18.
Section 8
Special Instructions For Officers
1. The Parade Commander—
(a) If wearing a sword, he will not draw it unless a senior officer is on
parade.
(b) After he has marched past and saluted, he will move out and place
himself on the right of the Inspecting Officer and will remain there
until the parade has passed. During this period the second-in-command
will assume command.
NOTE: If wearing a sword, the Parade Commander will remain at the carry
while on the Saluting Base or in company with the Inspecting or
Reviewing Officer.
2. Staff officers and officers not taking part in parade
Swords, if worn, will not be drawn by Staff officers, or officers holding
personal appointments. All such officers will salute by hand.
3. Officers taking part in parade
Swords will be drawn by officers other than company commanders after
their companies have been inspected. Company commanders will draw
swords together, taking the time from the second-in-command or company
commander of the leading company when there is no second-in-command
on parade.
4. Swords, if drawn, will be at the carry throughout, except when the men are
standing at ease and when marching to and from a parade ground (but clear
of it) when they be at the slope.
5. Saluting when marching past
(a) With swords drawn—the salute will begin on the command “Eyes
200
 Right” and finish on the order “Eyes Front”. In the case of individual
officers it will begin in sufficient time to enable the second motion of
the sword to be completed on arrival at Point C and the carry to be
resumed at Point D, the time being taken from the officer on the inner
flank.
(b) With swords not drawn—officers will salute with the hand. The salute
will begin at Point C and finish at Point D, officers in front of leading
sub-units taking their time from the commanding officer, remaining
officers taking the time from their company commander.
6. Method of returning swords.
Unless specially ordered to do so earlier, officers will return swords when
dismissing in accordance with para 7 below.
7. Dismissing at the conclusion of the parade
On the command “Fall out the officers” (Officers Line Tor) Officers will
march up to the officer commanding the parade (those with drawn swords
at the carry), halt five paces from him, salute, return swords, and form up in
rear of the commander until the parade is dismissed.
NOTE: The interval between officers with drawn swords will be two arms
length and those without one arm length (fully stretched).
Section 9
Receiving An Inspecting Or Reviewing Officer
1. General Instructions. The Unit or formation will be drawn up on the
Inspection Line with its centre opposite the point at which the Inspecting or
Reviewing Officer will post himself.
(a) Swords will be at the slope in mounted squads, at the carry in
dismounted units.
(b) In units armed with rifles, bayonets will be fixed and arms sloped.
2. Special Instructions. When the Inspecting or Reviewing Officer presents
himself before the centre, he will be received with the appropriate salute to
which he is entitled as per the following procedure:
(a) Units armed with rifles
“General Salute, Present Arms” (General Siloot, Salami Shastra). The
men will present arms and all officers will salute. Supernumerary ranks
and guides will present arms with the parade. Colors will remain at
the carry.
(b) “Slope Arms”. “Order Arms” (Kandhe Shastra, Baju Shastra).

200
 (c) The band will play the first part of a slow march with drums beating,
if there is no band on parade, the buglers will sound the general salute.
(d) Colors if carried will only be dipped for persons entitled to the National
Salute. For officers entitled to General Salute the colors will be “Let Fly”.
Section 10
Receiving The, President And The Governors
1. The procedure will be as laid down in Section above except that—The
caution ‘National Salute’ (Rashtriya Salute) will be substituted in place of
‘general Salute’.
2. It will be given to—
(a) The President of the Republic of India.
(b) The Governors, within their own States.
3. Other dignitaries entitled to salute on ceremonial occasions will be given
the ‘General Salute’.
4. The National Anthem will be played for the following :
(a) President of the Republic of India.
(b) Governors, within their own States.
(c) Ceremonial functions / parades—whether any of the personages
mentioned in 2(a) and 2(b) above is present or not on the 15th August
and 26th January.
5. The National Anthem can also be played for the Prime Minister of India on
special occasions with the prior approval of the State Government.
6. In the case of a foreign personage entitled to a National Salute, the band
will play the appropriate National Anthem.
Section 11
The Inspection
1. Inspection of a Single Unit
(a) After the appropriate salute to the Inspecting or Reviewing Officer is
given, the Parade will be brought to the Order Arms. The Parade
Commander will then report his Unit “Present and ready for
inspection” to the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer. (Shriman ji Parade
Nirikshan Ko Hazir Hai).
(b) When the Inspecting or Reviewing Officer starts inspecting No. 1
Company the Second-in-Command will give the command No.....
Company Stand Fast (i.e., the right hand sub unit) “Remainder Stand
at ease”. (No....Kampani Khari Rahe, Baqi Vishram).
201
 (c) The Reviewing or Inspecting Officer, accompanied by the Parade
Commander and such other officers, etc. as may be in attendance will
then pass down the front rank of the sub unit from right to left, the
centre rank from left to right, and the rear rank from right to left.
NOTE : (i) He will pass along with supernumerary rank at his own discretion.
(ii) All persons accompanying the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer during
the inspection will position themselves to his rear or on the side
farthest from the rank being inspected at the time.
(d) Company Commanders will thereafter call their sub-units to ‘Attention’
as the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer moves towards the left of the
rear rank of the Company on the right. On the approach of the
Inspecting or Reviewing Officer he will salute and conduct him during
the inspection of the Company. After the inspection he will salute and
return to his original position.
(e) Once the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer has moved to begin the
inspection of the next Company, the Company just inspected will be
ordered by its commander to ‘Stand At Ease.’
(f) The Reviewing or Inspecting Officer may review the front rank only
if he so desires, in which event the whole unit will remain at attention
while the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer passes from right to left of
the front rank. The officer will notify the Commander of the parade
beforehand the procedure he proposes to adopt.
(g) The band will play until the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer has
completed the inspection.
(h) The Reviewing or Inspecting Officer will then give orders for the
march past.
Section 12
Marching Past
1. A battalion may march past in the following formations:
(a) By Companies in Line .......... See Appendix ‘D’.
(b) In Column of Route .........…. See Appendix ‘E’.
(c) By Platoons .....................……. See Appendix ‘F’.
2. The inspection or review ground will be marked out as laid down in Section 2.
3. The Band will be formed up in Mass opposite the Inspecting Officer allowing
sufficient room for the Battalion to march past in the above three formations.
The band will move under the command of the Band Master or Drum Major.
On the Conclusion of the March Past of the Battalion the band will also
march past in the rear.

202
4. When a Battalion is required to advance in Review Order, the procedure
will be as laid down in Section 18.
Section 13
Post Of Officers
1. Parade Commander.
(a) By Companies in Line 20 paces in front of the centre of No. 2 Platoon.
(b) In Column of Route. 20 paces in front of the leading Threes.
(c) By Platoons 20 paces in front of the Right half of the Leading Platoons.
2. The Battalion Second-in-Command
(a) By Companies in Line 20 paces in front of the centre of No. 3 platoon
of the leading company, in line with the Battalion Commander.
(b) In Column of Route. 10 paces in rear of the right-hand man of the rear
Threes of the rear company.
(c) By Platoons 20 paces in front of the left half of the leading platoon.
3. The Adjutant.
(a) By Companies in Line. 10 paces in rear of the centre of the rear
company.
(b) In Column of Route. On the left and five paces in rear of the Parade
Commander.
(c) By Platoons. 10 paces in rear of the centre of the rear platoon of the
Battalion.
4. The Company Commander. In all the formations, will be six paces in front
of the centre of his company’s frontage.
5. The Platoon Commanders. In all formations, will be three paces in front of
the centre of their respective platoons. In Column of Route all the three
platoon commanders may also march 3 paces ahead of the leading platoons
of their company.
6. The Subedar Major.
(a) By Companies in Line. Immediately in the rear of the Color Party.
(b) In Column of Route. 10 paces in front of the leading Company covering
off the Parade Commander.
(c) By Platoons. On the right of the Adjutant and covering off the right-
hand man of the rear platoon.
Section 14
Battalion Marching Past By Companies
Moving into position
1. “Close Order—March” (Nikat Line Chal).
203
2. “Slope Arms” (Kandhe Shastra).
3. “Move to the right in column of threes, Battalion right-turn, by the left.
Quick March”, (Tinon tin column men dahine chal, Battalion dahine mur,
baen se tej chal).
The leading Company will wheel to its left when opposite the forming —
up position on the passing line, remaining companies will conform.
4. “At the halt, facing left, form close column of companies” (Battalion
Commander) (Tham kar baen disha, companion ke Nikat column bana).
5. “No.......Company. Halt, Company will advance, left turn”. (No......
Kampani, Tham, Kampani age barhega, baen mur).
The Commands will be given to the leading company on arrival at its position
in the forming up place on the Passing Line.
The remaining companies will be led by their guides to the position where
their right guides will be when the battalion is formed up in Close Column of
Companies. On arrival in position each company commander will give
“No...Company. Halt, Company will advance, left turn”.
6. When the last company has fronted up, the Battalion Commander will give
“Battalion, right dress”. On this command Company Havaldar Majors will
turn to their right together, step off, march out five paces, halt and turn
about and take up their dressing, acting together throughout. They will then
dress their companies, finally giving “Eyes Front”, starting from the front.
On completion Company Havaldar Majors will step off together, halt and
turn to their right.
Marching Past
7. “Battalion will march past by companies” (Battalion, Kampanion men
manch se Guzregi) (Battalion Commander). The leading company
commander will order “No...Company, By the Right, Quick March”,
(No....Kampani, Dan / tine se, Tez Chal) the remaining companies following
in succession at full column distance.
8. The Company Commander will order “Eyes—Right” and “Eyes Front” at
points C and D. Platoon Commanders will take the time from the Comapny
Commander.
The Battalion Commander, Second-in-Command, Adjutant, and Subedar
Major will salute individually.
9. Resuming position on the inspection line.
If the battalion is required to resume its original position on the Inspection

204
Line, it may be brought in Column of Threes by giving the command “In
Succession Advance in Column of Threes from the Right”, (Dahine se Bari Bari
Tino Tin ki Kalam Men Age Badh). After giving two wheels at points F and G the
companies may form up in their original position, halt and turn to the left and
open order march.
Section 15
Marching Past In Column Of Route
Moving into position
1. “Close Order—March” (Nikat Line Chal).
2. “Slope Arms” (Kandhe Shastra).
3. Move to the Right in Column of Route, Battalion Right Turn” (Kuch Column
Men Dahine Chal, Battalion Dahine Mur). Officers will take up position as
given in Appendix E.
Marching Past
4. “Battalion Will March Past In Column of Route” (Battalion Kuch Kalam
Men Manch se Guzregi). (Battalion Commander). The leading company
commander will order “No.... Company, By the Left, Quick March” (No.......
Kampani, Baen-se Tez Chal) the remaining companies following in
succession when approximately 10 pace distance has been achieved.
5. The Companies will wheel at points ‘H’ and ‘A’ and thereafter the dressing
will be by the right.
6. The Company Commander will salute independently at points ‘C’ and ‘D’.
7. Each Platoon Commander will give the command independently to his own
platoon on reaching points ‘C’ and ‘D’ respectively.
8. If swords are not worn, all officers will salute with the hand, taking the time
from the Company Commander.
9. Resuming position on the inspection line.
If the Battalion is required to resume its original position on the Inspection
Line, it will give two wheels at point ‘F’ and ‘G’ and thereafter the battalion may
form up in its original position, halt and turn to the left and open order march.
Section 16
Marching Past By Platoon In Quick Time
Moving into position
1. “Close Order—March” (Nikat Line Chal).
2. “Slope Arms” (Kandhe Shastra).
205
3. “Platoons at the Halt, Right—Form” (Platoon Tham kar Dahine Ban).
4. “Quick March”, “Platoons Left Dress”, “Platoons Eyes Front”. (Tej Chal
Platoon Baen Saj, Platoon Samme Dekh).
5. “Battalion will march past in quick time—by the left Quick March”.
(Battalion Tej Chaal Se Manch Se Guzregi-Baen Se Tej Chal).
6. “Change Direction—Left”. (Baen Disha Badal).
The battalion commander will give this word of command on reaching point
‘H’. Platoon Commander will wheel their platoons. No word of command
will be given by the company commanders. The battalion will change
direction on the Passing Line opposite point B.
7. Marching Past
The officers will commence and end salute when they arrive at points ‘C’
and ‘D’. Platoon Commanders will give “Eyes Right” and “Eyes “Front” at
points ‘C’ and ‘D’.
8. Resuming position on the inspection line.
The battalion will change direction opposite point ‘E’ and again at point
‘G’ platoons wheeling. Company commanders will order their companies
to mark time when the left of the leading platoon of their company reaches
the point where it rested in line.
“Platoons at the halt, left—form” (Platoon Tham Kar Baen Bana).
“Forward” “Centre Dress” “Eyes Front”.
(Age Barh) (Madhye Saj) (Samne Dekh)
Section 17
Marching Past By Platoons In Slow Time
If it is desired to do a March Past by platoons in Slow Time before marching
past in QuickTime, the following procedure will be carried out.
Moving into position. Same as for Sec. 16(1) to (6) except that the first
wheel will be given at a point little further away from point ‘H’ i.e., from a point
when the last platoon of the battalion has crossed point ‘H’. The second wheel
will be given when the leading platoon reaches a point in line with the Saluting
Base. When the whole battalion has wheeled, the halts will be given at point ‘A’.
Marching Past
1. “Platoons Right Dress” (Platoonon Dahine Saj).
2. “Platoons Eyes Front” (Platoon Samne Dekh).
3. “The battalion will march past in slow time, by the Right Slow March”
(Battalion Dhire Chaal Men Manch Se Guzregi, Dahine Se Dhire Chal).
By the Battalion Commander.

206
4. “Battalion in succession Open Order March (Battalion Bari Bari Khuli Line
Chal) to be given by the Battalion Commander when No. 1 Platoon of the
Battalion is nearing point ‘B’. Each platoon will thereafter Open Order at
point ‘B’ and continue marching.
5. The officers will commence and end salute when they arrive at points ‘C’
and ‘D’, Platoon Commanders will give “Eyes Right” and “Eyes Front” at
points ‘C and ‘D’.
6. The Command ‘In Succession Close Order March’ (Bari Bari Nikat Line
Chal) will be given by the Battalion commander when all the platoons have
cleared the Saluting Base and are between points ‘D’ and ‘E’. All the platoons
will Close Order March at the spot from where No. l platoon will close
order and continue marching.
7. Soon after the Close Order has been achieved command ‘Break into Quick
Time, Quick March (Tej Chaal Men Aa, Tej Chal) will be given by the Battalion
Commander followed by “In succession Advance in Column of Threes from
the Right. (Bari Bari Tinon Tin Column Men Dahine Se Age Barh).
8. Three Left Wheels will be given at points ‘F’ ‘G’ and ‘H’. When the column
is about to reach point ‘A’ the command ‘Facing Left Advance in Column
of Platoons (Baen Disha Platoon Ke Column Men Age Barh) will be given
by the Battalion Commander. Thereafter the Platoon will continue the March
Past as for Quick Time and resume position on the Inspection Line.
NOTE: The following action will be taken by the platoons on the command
‘Open and Close Order March’ when marching in slow time.
During a slow march in three ranks, on the command ‘Open Order’
the rear rank will mark time four paces, the centre rank will mark
time two paces, and then lead on, the front rank will continue to lead
on. On the command ‘Close Order’ the front rank will mark time four
paces leading on a full pace on the fifth, the centre rank will mark
time two paces leading on a full pace on the third.
Section 18
Advancing In Review Order
1. If a Unit is to advance in, Review Order at the conclusion of the parade, it
will normally form up on the Inspection Line in the same formation in which
it received the Reviewing Officer, the band being in rear of the centre.
2. The detailed procedure will be as follows:
“Open Order March” (Khule Line Chal).
“On the Centre Dress, Eyes, Front” (Madhya Saj, Samne Dekh).
“Advance in Review Order, By the Centre, Quick March”
(Samiksha Aram Se, Madhya Se, Tej Chal).

207
3. The Unit will advance by the centre for 15 paces, the band and drums playing
without rolls. At the conclusion of 71/2 bar of the music, the band and
drums will cease playing, when the whole parade will automatically halt.
The parade will then be ordered to salute in the same manner as when
receiving the Reviewing or Inspecting Officer after which it will be directed
to Order Arms and will wait for orders.
APPPENDIX ‘A’
Position of officers and men in line formation for review.
(a) Parade Commander 20 paces in front of the centre of the Battalion.
(b) Second-in-command 10 paces in front of the centre of the Colors.
(c) Adjutant 10 paces in front of the left guide of No. 2 Company.
(d) Company Commanders 6 paces in front of the centre of their Companies.
(e) Platoon Commanders 3 paces in front of the centre of the Platoons.
(f) Subedar-Major 10 paces in front of the Right guide of No. 3 Company.
(g) C.H.M. parades as right guide to his Company’s right hand platoon.
(h) C.H.M.Q. parades as left guide to his Company’s left hand platoon.
(i) Havaldars and all other N.C.O.S in the ranks with their platoons. Platoon
Havaldar will parade as the right hand man of his platoon.
(j) Distance 3 paces between platoons, 5 paces between Companies.
(k) Three paces between the Color Party and the Companies on either side.
(l) Companies to be sized and equalized as far as possible. Battalion
Headquarters being included in the four Companies on parade.

208
 APPENDIX ‘B’
“A Company in line of Platoons and Column of Sections on a
Ceremonial Parade with Battalion in line for Review”

APPENDIX ‘C’
A BATTALION FORMED IN PASS FOR REVIEW

BAND
Note: (i) Position and distance of officers will be the same as given in appendix
‘A’.
(ii) Distance between Sub-Units approximately 12 paces.

209
 APPENDIX ‘D’
Position of Officers and Colors in Marching Past by Companies

Note: For distances to be maintained y officers from platoons and companies

b refer to section 13.

2 10
 APPENDIX ‘E’
Position of officers and Colors in
Column of Route
(a) Parade Commander 20 paces in
front of the leading Threes.
(b) Second-in-Command 10 paces in
rear of the right hand man of the rear
threes of the rear company.
(c) Adjutant be on the left and five paces
in rear of the parade commander.
(d) Company Commander in all
formations will be six paces in front
of the centre of his company’s
frontage.
(e) Platoon Commander in all
formations will be three paces in
front of the centre of their platoons.
All the three platoon commanders
may also march 3 paces ahead of
their Company. (This will be done
when all the platoons of the company
join together without keeping any
gap in between the platoons and in
which case the company commander
will bring the company to “Eyes
Right” and “Eyes Front” near the
Saluting Base. However, this will
normally not be done except on route
marches).
(f) Subedar Major 10 paces in front of
the leading Company, covering off
the parade commander.
(g) Colors in rear of No. 2 Company.
(h) Distance between Companies will
be approximately 10 paces.
Position of Coy. Officers in Column of
Route

211
 APPENDIX ‘F’
Position of officers and Men in
Marching Past by Platoons
(a) Parade Commander 20 paces in
front of the right half of the leading
position.
(b) Second-in-Command 20 paces in
front of the left half of the leading
platoon.
(c) Adjutant 10 paces in rear of the
centre of the rear platoon of the
battalion.
(d) Company Commander 6 paces in
front of the leading platoon of their
respective Company.
(e) Platoon Commander 6 paces in front
of the leading platoon of the
battalion.
(f) Subedar Major on the right of the
Adjutant and covering off the right
hand man of the rear platoon.
(g) Colors and Color Party in rear of
rear platoon of No. 2 Company.

212
(m) Band will form up 8 paces in rear of the centre.
APPENDIX ‘G’
Guidelines for preparing Ceremonial Uniform
Ceremonial uniform is worn for participation in various ceremonial parades
and on ceremonial occasions. The following guidelines should be kept in mind
while preparing the ceremonial uniform.
(a) Cap / Turban
(i) Peak Cap / Barrette Cap/Ceremonial Turban should not be loose. In case it is
loose, sufficient packing should be given so that it fits correctly on the head.
(ii) There should be no stains. It should have a fresh look.
(iii) All leather and metal parts should be properly polished.
(iv) The badge should be fitted properly in the centre of the cap/ turban.
(b) Shirt
(i) The Shirt to be worn on parade should be proper cleaned and of proper
khaki shade.
(ii) The folding of the shirt sleeves should be approximately equal to 4 fingers
held together.
(iii) The length of the sleeves should be adjusted in such a way that when one
folds his arms there is no folding on the folded sleeves.
(iv) All buttons in the shirt should be new and should not that the upper edge of
the sign is 4 fingers below the shoulder stitching.
(v) The formation sign should be fixed in such a manner that the upper edge of
the sign is 4 fingers below the shoulder stitching.
(vi) The shoulder insignia should be between the shoulder stitching and the
upper edge of the formation sign and the outer edges should be in the same
line as the formation sign.
(vii) The name plate should be over the upper portion of the pocket stitching and
in the centre of the right hand pocket of the shirt.
(viii) The outer edge of the shirt stitching, the right hand edge of the Belt Buckle
and inner edge of the fly flap of the trousers should be in one straight line.
(ix) All metals worn on the shirt should be properly polished. It should be ensured
that stains of polish should not come on the shirt.
(c) Cross Bell / Belt
(i) The leather should be properly polished and the metal parts also properly
polished.
(ii) The belt should be adequately tight, it should neither be very loose nor very
tight.
213
(iii) The length of the belt should be kept correctly measured so that no extra
portion of the belt projects.
(d) Trousers
(i) The length of the trousers should be much that when standing at attention
the laces of the boots should not be visible.
(ii) After wearing the pant please do not sit down before going for the parade
as this will result in unnecessary creases on the pant.
(iii) The bottom of the pants should measure 16 to 18 inches.
(e) Shoes
(i) The shoes should be properly polished and the blackish tinge of polish
should be removed.
(ii) Laces should be new and not twisted.
(iii) Laces should be properly tied and the eyelet holes should be together and
not kept loose.
(iv) Khaki socks should be worn and this should be sufficient height so that it is
visible even if the pant comes above the boot level.
(f) General
(i) Everybody should have a proper hair cut. They should be properly shaved
and their mustache trimmed.
(ii) No photo chromatic glasses or dark glasses will be allowed on parade.
(iii) No wrist watch should be worn on parade and unnecessary items of jewellery
avoided.
(iv) Lanyard should not be faded and as far as possible should be new.

214
 CHAPTER XXVI
GUARDS AND SENTRIES
General
1. The object of this chapter is to lay a simple routine that will ensure the
effective Mounting and relief of Guards and Sentries. The details give the
normal system followed by the Police Force for ceremonial purposes, and
may be followed where applicable.
2. There are two forms of Guards, the purpose and function of which are quite
different. These are Ceremonial Guards and Tactical Guards.
3. The objects of these two forms of Guards are described in the succeeding
paragraphs. Having regard to the functions to be performed, the form of
Guard which is to be mounted will be at the discretion of the officer in
charge of the District or Unit.
Ceremonial Guard
4. Ceremonial Guard will be mounted for one of the following purposes.
(i) To exercise men in ceremonial drill and to instil in them the highest
standard of smartness, cleanliness, discipline, and arms drill, and to
encourage “pride of the force”.
(ii) To pay compliments to high ranking officers, or other distinguished
persons, between Reveille and Retreat.
5. A ceremonial guard will be mounted only between Reveille and Retreat.
On conclusion of its ceremonial function, or at Retreat, ceremonial guard
may take over duties immediately as Tactical Guard and vice versa.
6. A ceremonial guard is to be considered at all times the symbol of the pride
of the District and Unit. Its drill, smartness, and turn out will be of the
highest standard.
Tactical Guard
7. The object of a Tactical Guard is to fulfil any form of protective task as
decided by the officer in charge of the District. such tasks will include the
guarding of Government buildings, Armoury, Magazine, Treasure, the
security of prisoners and the prevention of unauthorized persons entering
prohibited areas.
8. Tactical Guards will pay compliments like ceremonial guards between
Reveille and Retreat, but during the night hours will merely Stand To, unless
ordered to fall in for inspection by a Round.
9. A tactical guard will be suitably disposed tactically to carry out its task. In
arranging dispositions full opportunity will be taken to train tactically junior
215
 havaldars, and to develop their initiative. Stand to positions, together with
alternative positions will be detailed for each member of a Tactical Guard.
10. It will be realized that Tactical Guard is functioning most efficiently when
it can neither be seen nor heard. In Guard Rooms sentries will be secure but
they must be protected against a rush assault and grenades. For this reason,
it is not intended that the taking up of tactical dispositions should develop
into a form of drill to be performed every time; nor is it intended that the
taking up of tactical dispositions should become the equivalent of the turn
out of a Ceremonial Guard to a Visiting Officer.
11. When in a Stand To position, no member of a Tactical Guard will pay
compliments. Provided that sentries remain tactically disposed, a Tactical
Guard less its sentries may fall in for inspection by a Round. The appropriate
compliment may then be paid.
Section 1
Definitions
1. A Guard is a body of men to protect places or persons.
2. Duties of Guards and Picquets besides the Quarter Guard personnel who
fall in for inspection of the Orderly Officer before they are marched off to
their various assignments.
3. Sentries are Constables belonging to a Guard and posted on duty in various
places.
4. A Sentry’s beat is the length of ground which he has to patrol.
5. A Sentry’s post is the place where he is mounted.
6. A Relief consists of the sentries to be posted on the various sentry posts at
the same time, or to relieve the Sentries already on duty.
7. ‘Grand Round’ includes the Superintendent of Police when on inspection
duty and any gazetted officer detailed by him for a similar purpose.
8. ‘Visiting Round’ includes all non-gazetted officers carrying out similar
duties.
9. Alarm posts are posts made round the Guard for its protection during night.
These posts are occupied by the Guard and sentry when a Stand To is ordered
during night.
10. ‘Alternative Posts’ are similar to Alarm Posts. These are occupied by the
Guard and sentry when it is ordered to Stand To for the second time during
the night.
11. ‘Turning Out’—When Guards turn out they move at the double and fall in
with sloped arms. The Bugler falls in two paces on the right of the Guard
commander and the Sentry, one pace to the right of the Bugler. This is
generally ordered between Reveille and Retreat.
216
12. ‘Stand To’ is the order given during night (between Retreat and Reveille) to
a Guard when they take position in their Alarm Posts.
13. ‘Stand Down’ is the order given to a Guard to close from their Alarm Posts
after the inspection of the Rounds during the night.
14. Bugle Calls
(a) Reveille is the bugle call sounded in the early morning when the flag
is hoisted at the Quarter Guard.
(b) Retreat is the bugle call sounded at sun-set when the flag is lowered
at the Quarter Guard.
(c) Tattoo First Post These are sounded at 9.30 p.m. and 10 p.m. Tattoo
Last Post
The First Post is sounded to warn the men that it is time to close the day’s
activities and get back to the barracks. After the Last Post is sounded the duty
havaldar checks the barracks to ensure that all are in bed and no one is absent.
Section 2
Guard Mounting
Details Remarks
1. Time for Guard Mounting……….… To be fixed by the Officer in-
charge of the District or Unit.
2. Dress for Guard…………….......….. ---- Do ----
3. Stick Orderly: For Ceremonial Guards
an extra man will be deputed to allow
the cleanest man being excused guard
duty. The man so excused will be
named ‘Stick Orderly’. His duty shall
be to wait on the Commandant or the
senior officer in the Station, in his
office to perform the duties of a
‘Runner ’. He will wear his Guard
Mounting Uniform.
4. Parading. On the bugle call ‘Parade Time may be altered at the
for Guard’ (sounded half an hour discretion of the Officer In-
before the guard mounting time) the charge of the District or Unit.
men selected for guard will get ready
for mounting.
On the ‘Quarter Call’ for guard The place for guard mounting
mounting (sounded quarter of an hour need not necessarily be always
217
 Details Remarks
before the guard mounting time) the the parade ground. This may be
duty N.C.O. will parade the guards changed at the discretion of the
and inspect them in the Lines. He will Officer In-charge.
then march the guard to the parade Bugler will be two paces to the
ground five minutes before the Tall in right of the Guard Commander
Call’ is sounded and will hand them and duty N.C.O. five paces.
over to the Orderly Officer in the
following manner: —
(a) Guard Get On Parade
(Garud Parade par)
The Guard will come to attention, step
off and fall in two ranks, at the open
order, two paces in front of the Duty
N.C.O. and stand at ease. The Duty
N.C.O. will then take his position at a
convenient distance from the guard,
say twelve paces and face the guard.
(b) Guard—Attention (Garad Savdhan).
(c) Guard Will Fix Bayonets-Fix- (The guard Commander and the
Bayonets Attention (Garad Sangeen 2nd in Command will not fix
lagayega—Sangeen Laga, Savdhan) bayonets.)
(d) Guard—Right Dress—Eyes Front (The Duty N.C.O. will himself
(Garad— Dahine Saj—Samne Dekh) dress the guard and thereafter
(e) Guard Will Unfix Bayonets—Unfix inspect the guard straightaway).
Bayonets—Attention, (Garad
Sangeen Uttarega—Sangeen Utar—
Savdhan).
(f) For Inspection—Port Arms. (The Duty N.C.O. will inspect
(Nirikshan Ke Liye Baen Shastra). arms and will align himself five
paces at the right incline to the
Guard Commander, before the
next command is given).
(g) Guard—Examine Arms (After examining the bands of
(Garad—Janch Shastra) weapons the Duty N.C.O. will
return to his original position).

(h) Ease—Springs (Bolt—Chala) Carried out as a drill movement.

218
 Details Remarks
(i) Order Arms (Bazu Shastra) After this the duty N.C.O. takes
(j) Stand At Ease (Vishram) his position on the right of the
Bugler at a distance of 5 paces
from him and awaits the arrival
of the Duty Officer.
On the arrival of the Orderly Officer,
the Duty N.C.O. brings the guard to
Attention and Slope Arms and shall
march towards the Orderly Officer
and halt at a distance of two paces in
front of him, salute and report “The
guard is Ready for Inspection Sir
(Shriman Guard Nirikshan Ke Liye
Tayar Hai)”. After this the Orderly
officer will order “Duty N.C.O. Take
Post (Duty NCO Jagah Lo)”. On this
the Duty NCO will salute, turn about
and march back to his original position
at the right of the bugler.
On the ‘Fall in Call’ being sounded
the Orderly Officer will call ‘Marker’.
The Guard Commander will advance
two paces in front of the Orderly
Officer, halt, Order Arms and Stand
at Ease.
On the orderly officer’s Command Guards will always form up in
Duties on Parade, (‘Duties Parade open order.
par’) the guard will march on to the
Marker, Order Arms and Stand at
Ease.
Orderly Officer will move to a If the guard is commanded by an
convenient distance from the guard officer he will be two paces in
(say 20 to 30 paces) and face the front of the centre, and the senior
guard. N.C.O. on the right of the Guard;
if Guard is commanded by an
N.C.O., he will be on the right of
the guard, the next senior N.C.O.
(if any) being in the rear rank
covering the senior N.C.O.
219
 Details Remarks
An Officer commanding a guard
shall not be called upon to act as
a Marker. The senior N.C.O.
commanding the first guard, if
more than one guard, shall be the
Marker.
5. Procedure:
Commands by the Orderly Officer:
(a) Guard Attention (Guard
Savdhan)
(b) Guard will Fix- Bayonets— The Gurad Commander and the
Guard Fix- Bayonets, Attention Second- Command will not fix
(Guard Sangeen lagayega, — bayonets. The duty N.C.O. will
Sangeen Laga, Savdhan). dress the guard by turning to his
(c) Guard Right Dress. (Garad left. On completion he will give
Dehine Saj). ‘Eyes Front’ and turn to his front.

(d) Guard Number.(garad—ginti Here the Orderly Officer will

kar). inspect the guard. The duty
N.C.O. will join him in time to
meet him in front of the guard. He
will salute the Orderly Officer and
accompany him during the
inspection and note down
remarks, if any, pointed out by the
Orderly Officer. After inspection
both will return to their original
positions.
(e) Guard will Unfix Bayonets — Only the front rank excluding the
Unfix- Bayonets—Attention guard commander and the bugler
(Garad Sangeen Uttarega, will call out the number.
Sangeen Uttar, Savdhan)
(f) For Inspection Port Arms The duty N.C.O. will not salute
(Nirikshan Ke Liye Baen Shastra) the Orderly Officer here.
The Orderly Officer and the duty
N.C.O. act as in (a) above, except that
after the inspection of arms both will
align themselves 5 paces at the right
incline to the Guard Commander.
220
 Details Remarks
(g) Examine Arms (Janch Shastra).
After the examination of arms both
will return to their original position,
the duty N.C.O. 5 paces to the right
of the guard and the Orderly Officer
20 to 30 paces to the front of the
Guard. Carried out as a Drill Movement
(h) Ease Spring (Bolt Chala)
(i) Order Arms. (Bazu Shastra)
(j) Guard will Fix Bayonets—Guard
Fix- Bayonets.Attention. (Guard
Sangeen Lagayega—Sangeen Laga—
Savdhan ). The Guard Commander and the
Second-in-Command will not fix.
At this stage the Stick Orderly will be
selected and dismissed. The Stick Orderly will take a pace
forward or backward according to
(k) No... Front (or Rear). Rank—
his position in the front or rear
Stick Orderly., St ick Orderly—
rank, salute and then dismiss.
Dismiss. (No....Samne Ya Pichhli Line
Stick Orderly—Vis-arjan)
(l) Close Order March (Nikat Line
Chal) The Duty N.C.O. will turn to the
left and dress the guard after
(m) Right Dress (Dahine Saj) which he will order the guard to
“Eyes Front”.
(n) Slope Arms (Kandhe Shastra).
(o) Guard Commander Take over.
(Garad Commander Jagha Lo). Here
the Guard Commander will take a
pace forward and salute; the guard
commander will place himself 2 paces
in the rear and centre of the guard. The
second in command will at the same
time take 2 paces forward and occupy
the place of the Guard Commander.

221
 Details Remarks
The Orderly Officer also will move
out to a convenient distance to his left
flank from where he can acknowledge
the compliments of the guard given
on its march.
Commands by the Guard Commander.
(p) Guard by the Right—Quick March
(Garad Dahine Se Tej Chal).
(q) Eyes Right, Eyes Front (Dahine If it is not possible to march the
Dekh, Samme Dekh). guard all the way in two ranks or
The Guard Commander marches off single ranks to the Guard Room,
the guard to the place where he is to suitable formation may be
relieve the old Guard. adopted
The Orderly Officer will fall out. The
duty N.C.O. and both will supervise
the changing of the Guards.

Section 3
Relieving, Posting And Dismissing A Guard
1. When the ground admits, the new Guard will advance in line towards the
OLD Guard and be halted where possible,15 paces in front of it.When this
is not possible, the new Guard will Halt Six Paces From the left of the Old
Guard facing the same direction and dress up.
2. On the approach of the new Guard, the Old Guard Commander will fall in
his guard at the slope and dress up.
The following ceremonials will then be observed:
O.G.C.—Old Guard Present Arms (Officers salute).
[Purani Garad Salami Shastra (officers’ siloot).]
N.G.C.—New Guard Present Arms. (Nai Garad’ Salami Shastra).
O.G.C.—Old Guard Slope Arms. (Purani Garad Kandhe Shastra).
N.G.C.—New Guard Slope Arms. (Nai Garad Kandhe Shastra).
O.G.C.—Old Guard Order Arms. (Purani Garad Bazu Shastra).
N.G.C.—New Guard Order Arms. (Nai Garad Bazu Shastra).

222
 O.G.C.—Old Guard Stand at Ease (Purani Garad Vishrarm).
N.G.C.—New Guard Stand at Ease (Nai Garad Vishram).
3. Taking the time from the Old Guard Commander, both Guard Commanders
come to Attention, Slope Arms, take five paces forward, halt and incline
inwards. The Old Guard Commander then asks for the relief of his sentries
as follows:
One Sentiy by Day and one (two) by Night. (Ek sentry Din Aur Ek (ya Do)
Sentry Rat). The New Guard Commander repeats the same.
4. Both Guard commanders then move off to their respective guards, the Old
guard commander falling in on the right of his guard and the new Guard
Commander placing himself in front of his guard.
5. The New Guard is then numbered by its commander and reliefs distributed
as follows:
New Guard Attention (Right hand man will be No. 1;
(Nai Garad Savdhan) rear rank right hand man No. 2;
As a Guard Number front rank No. 2 will be No. 3;
(Garad Ki Tarah Ginti kar) and his rear rank man No. 4 and so on)
No. 1, No. 2 First—Relief (Pahali Badali,)
No. 3, No. 4 Second—Relief (Doosari Badali,)
No. 5, No. 6 Third—Relief (Tisari Badali,)
First Relief Stand Fast, Remainder At this except the first relief others will
Stand at Ease (Pahali Badli Khari come to Vishram.
Rahegi Baqi Vishram)
First Relief arms Slope Arms At this command both the old guard
(Pahli Badli Kandhe Shastra). commander and the old Sentry will come
to Slope Arms.
Quick March. (Tez Chal) the Halt If there are only up to four Sentries in
(Tham). Relief form up (Badali Band)”. the first relief they will form up in single
rank according to their numbers.
6. When the first relief of the New Guard is sent out, the second in command
of the old guard will accompany it to bring in the relieved sentries. At the
command ‘Relief Form Up’, he will place himself on the right of the first
sentry of the new Relief. The second in command of the New Guard will
place himself on the left. The second in command of the New Guard will
then give the order. ‘Relief Move to the Right in Single File—Right Turn.
(Badali Ek File Men Dahine Chalo—Dahine Mur). He will then place
himself on the right of the rear Sentry and give the order ‘Relief Quick
March.’ The second in command of the Old Guard will then lead the relief

223
 to the sentry post and the sentries will be changed as detailed in Section 4.
As soon as all the sentries are relieved, the seconds in command will change
places and second in command of the Old Guard will assume command.
7. While the relief is marching round and changing sentries, the new Guard
Commander will take over the property of the guard according to the list on
the inventory board. At the same time both Guard Commanders will sign
the charge reports. If there is only one Havaldar in the Guard he will take
charge of the property, etc., after the sentries have been relieved. The guard
commanders will then report their change of charge to the Orderly Officers,
if present.
8. When the relief have returned, and all the men of the old and new Guard
have fallen in, in their respective guards, the following ceremonials will be
observed:
O.G.C. — Old Guard Attention. (Purani Garad Savdhan).
N.G.C. — New Guard Attention. (Nai Garad Savdhan).
O.G.C. — Old Guard Slope Arms. (Purani Garad Kandhe Shastra).
N.G.C. — New Guard Slope Arms. (Nai Garad Kandhe shastra).
O.G.C. — Move to the Right in File (or Single File) Right Turn.
(Purani garad, Ek file Men Dahine chal, Dahine Mur)
NOTE: - The Old Guard commander takes position on the right of the Guard in
line with the rear man, while the second in command takes his place.
O.G.C. — Quick March. (Purani Garad Tej Chal).
N.G.C. — New Guard Present Arms. (Nai Garad Salami Shastra).
O.G.C. — Old Guard Eyes Left—Eyes Front(Purani Garad Baen Dekh,
Samne Dekh).
N.G.C. — New Guard Slope Arms. (Nai Garad Kandhe Shastra).
9. When the Old guard has left, the new Guard will be marched to the position
previously occupied by the Old Guard in file or single file as the case may
be and will be explained the details for turning out and the Stand To positions.
The Guard will then be dismissed to the guard room, when the orders for
the Guard will be read out. These orders will also be read and explained to
the men of the first relief when they come off Sentry. To dismiss the guard
the words of command will be “Sentry Stand Fast, Remainder To The Guard
Room—Dismiss (Sentry Khada Rahe, Baqi Guard Room Ko, Visarjan).
10. If it is necessary to pay compliments during Guard Mounting, words of
Command will be given to both guards by the senior officer or Havaldar.
11. The Old Guard will be marched to the original position of the new Guard
and after the inspection of weapons and ammunition, will be dismissed.
224
 Section 4
Posting Relieving, Marching And Dismissing Sentries And Relief
Posting Sentries.
1. When a, sentry, who is to be posted on a new post, without a sentry, reaches
a point just short of the post assigned to him, he will be halted. The sentry
will then step off without further order and will halt and face in the required
direction on his exact post. The Havaldar (normally the junior havaldar)
will then read and explain to him his orders, the object for which he is
posted, the front of his post and the extent of this beat.
Relieving Sentries. (Badali Santari)
2. On the approach of the relief, the sentry, with his rifle at the slope, will
place himself in front of the sentry box. The Havaldar of the relief will halt
the relief at about two paces from the sentry. The new sentry will then move
out from the relief, and fall in on the left of the old sentry turning to face in
the same direction. The Havaldar will read the orders to the new sentry and
ensure that the sentry understands them.
3. ‘Sentries Pass’ (Santri Badli Karo). The old sentry will move to his place
in rear of the relief, and the new sentry will close two paces to his right.
4. ‘Relief Quick March’. (Badli Tej Chal). The Relief will be marched off.
After all the sentries have been changed the relief will be brought in the
centre of both the Guards. They will then break off at the command of the
old Guard Commander and join their respective Guards.
Section 5
Turning Out A Guard For Inspection By Day
1. When the sentry sees the Inspecting Officer actually approaching the Quarter
Guard, the sentry will come to attention, slope arms, and shout “Guard
Turn Out” (Garad Line Bana).
All personnel of the Guard will move at the double and fall in on the
prescribed line.
2. When the Inspecting Officer has taken post in front of the Guard, the Guard
will give the appropriate salute on orders from the Guard Commander. For
those who are entitled to, the bugler will sound the appropriate Salute.
Where the Inspecting Officer is so entitled, the command ‘Present Arms’ will
be given after the Guard has fallen in, followed by the command ‘Slope Arms’
and ‘Orders Arms’ before the Guard is reported to the Inspecting Officer.
When the Inspecting Officer is taking the salute, all others who may be
accompanying him will stand to attention behind him.

225
3. After the Guard has been brought to the ‘Order Arms’, the Guard Commander
will report ‘Guard Ready For Inspection (Nirikshan Ke Liye Garad Hazir
Hai) to the Inspecting Officer. No other form of report will be used.
4. After receiving the report of the Guard Commander the Inspecting Officer
will go forward to inspect the Guard. The Guard Commander will Slope
Arms, take a step forward, turns to the left and accompany the Inspecting
Officer. All personnel of the party other than the Inspecting Officer will
remain at attention wherever they may be till the inspection has been
completed and the Guard dismissed. When the inspection is completed the
Inspecting Officer will order the Guard Commander To Dismiss/Turn in
the Guard (Guard Line Tor, Guard Viserjan).
5. Having received instructions to Turn in the Guard/Dismiss the Guard from
the Inspecting Officer, the Guard Commander will give the order ‘Guard
Slope Arms, Sentry Stand Fast, Remainder Dismiss’, or Guard to the Guard
Room Dismiss’. All personnel of the Guard except the sentry will turn to
their right, salute and then move off at the double to the Guard Room.
6. Having dismissed the Guard, the Guard Commander will turn toward the
Inspecting Officer and salute. He will then accompany the Inspecting Officer
for an inspection of the Guard Room and its vicinity. Other persons who
have accompanied the Inspecting Officer may now accompany him during
the inspection.
7. After the inspection of the Guard Room etc., has been completed, the Guard
Commander will again salute the Inspecting Officer and then break off and
return to the Guard Room.
Section 6
Turning Out A Guard By Night
1. When the Sentry sees the ‘Grand Round’ or the ‘Visiting round’ approaching
his Guard, the sentry will come to the ‘On Guard’ position and halt the
‘Round’ approaching by shouting ‘Halt, Who Comes There’. (Tham, Kauyi
Ata Hai)
2. At the challenge ‘Halt, who comes there’, the Grand or Visiting Round will
halt and disclose his identity by saying ‘Grand Round’ or ‘Visiting Round.’
(Bara Muayana Ya Chhota Muayana)
3. When the sentry has received the answer to his challenge and is satisfied
that the round approaching the Guard is a ‘Grand’ or ‘Visiting’ Round, he
will Stand To the Guard by shouting ‘Halt Grand (or Visiting) Round, Guard
Stand To’. Tham Bara (ya chhota) Muayana, Guard Hoshiar. He will repeat
this (Guard Stand To) three times, and remain at the ‘On Guard’ position.
The Guard along with the Guard Commander will then come out of the
226
 Guard Room at the double and take positions in their respective Alarm
Posts already detailed before hand.
4. The Guard Commander will approach the sentry and enquire from him
‘Sentry What Round’, and on a reply from the Sentry ‘Grand’ or ‘Visiting’
Round, he will give a pass to the Round by saying ‘Advance Grand Round
or Visiting Round, All is well’. (Age Barho, Bara Muayana ya Chhota
Muayana, Sab Thik Hai). The sentry in the meantime will take his position
behind the Alarm Post already detailed, and so also the Guard Commander.
5. After the inspection is over, the Grand or Visiting Round will give the
following orders:
(i) ‘Stand Down the Guard’ (Garad Jagahe Chhore).
Or
(ii) ‘Fall in the Guard’ (Line Bana).
6. If the Guard is required to ‘Stand Down’ they will leave their Alarm Posts
and double up to the Guard Room.
The Guard Commander will move to the Guard Room after the inspecting
Officer has recorded his inspection, etc., in the Guard Book and has left.
7. If the Guard is ordered to ‘Fall In’ the Gurd minus the sentries will fall in on
the prescribed line and the same procedure will be followed as for Inspection
by Day. The inspection of the Guard Room, etc., may not be done and the
Guard may be ordered to be Dismissed after the inspection.
Section 7
General Rules For Sentries
1. A sentry when moving off on his beat will come to attention, take a pace
forward, Slope Arms, turn to his right or left and move off in quick time.
2. On arrival at the end of his beat a sentry will halt and turn about by making
two distinct turns outwards (i.e., towards his front) to the right or left as the
case may be and will move off again in quick time.
3. A sentry will not halt on his beat except in front of his box or post, unless to
pay a compliment or when challenging.
4. When halting outside his box or post, a sentry will face his front, order
arms, take a pace to the rear, and stand at ease.
5. A sentry will not quit his arms or post, lounge or converse with any one
(except in the performance of his duty) nor will he take shelter in his box
except in very bad whether.
6. A sentry will always remain alert and will pay all necessary compliments
smartly.
227
Sentries Challenging
7. A sentry will challenge all persons or parties during the night approaching
his post when he is doubtful as to whether the person or party approaching
is authorized to pass or when he is suspicious as to his or their reasons for
approaching.
8. When challenging on the part of a sentry is necessary, it will be carried out
as follows :
When a person or party approaches his post, the sentry will as soon as the
person or party is within speaking distance, come to ‘On Guard’ position and call out
‘Halt who comes there’. He will repeat this in the language most suitable to the
locality, without disclosing his position. When the person or party has halted, he will
call out ‘Advance One’ (Ek Aage Barho) (Translated if necessary). If and when the
sentry is satisfied as to the identity of the person or party, he will say, ‘Pass Friend All
is Well’ (Chalo Dost, Sab Thik Hai) remaining of Guard until the person or party, has
passed. It not satisfied regarding the identity or bona fides of the person or party, the
sentry will Stand To the Guard and report to the Guard Commander. If in answer to
the challenge the sentry receives the reply ‘Grand’ or ‘Visiting Round’ and the sentry
is satisfied, he will follow the same procedure as laid down in Section 6.
NOTE: By night sentries will invariably challenge all persons approaching
the Guard Room. If in reply to the challenge he receives the reply
‘Friends’ and he is satisfied with the identity of the person he will
allow him to pass.
Section 8
General Instructions And Compliments To Be Given By Guards And Sentries
General
1. Sentries always march with sloped arms and bayonets fixed, and always
turn outwards by making two distinct turns left or right, as the case may be,
i.e., never face the Sentry Post.
2. Bayonets will always remain fixed in the Guard Room.
3. Every relief will be inspected by the Guard Commander on going out and
returning.
4. Compliments will not be paid to unarmed parties.
Compliments by Guards
5. Day (Between Reveille and Retreat).
(a) The President and Governors, the latter within states, with the bugler
sounding the National Salute.

228
 (b) The Prime Minister, Union Ministers and State Ministers within their
jurisdictions with the bugler sounding the General Salute. For the
Prime Minister, National Salute can be played with the special
permission of the State Government.
(c) Police Officers of and above the rank of Dy. Inspector General of
Police and officers of and above the rank of Major General in the
Army or equivalent ranks in the Navy and the Air Force with the
bugler sounding the General Salute.
(d) The District Superintendent of Police on his first visit to the guard
each day.
(e) Grand Rounds.
(f) All armed parties numerically superior to the strength of the guard.
(g) At the commencement of Reveille and Tattoo sounding.
(h) To any other police officer of and above the rank of Sub Inspector,
the guard will turn out once a day when he is detailed as Orderly/
Duty Officer and the guard commander, only will give Butt Salute.
NOTE: (i) It is necessary to pay compliments while guards are actually being
mounted or changed over, the senior officer or N.C.O. giving the
command.
(ii) The above orders regarding compliments do not apply to Special
Guards mounted at the residences or camps of Presidents, Union
Ministers, Governors and State Ministers. Such guards will not pay
compliments to persons of lesser rank or status. When visited by police
officers on duty, they will turn out at the slope.
6. Night (Between Retreat and Reveille).
Guards will not turn out after Retreat, or before Reveille, except at Tattoo,
on the approach of an armed party, in cases of an alarm, or to receive Grand and
Visiting Rounds, nor will they during this period pay any compliment except to
Grand Rounds to whom they will present Arms.
Compliments by Sentries
7. Day.
(a) A sentry will Present Arms, to Police Officers wearing the State
Emblem or badges of higher rank and to officers of the Indian Army,
Navy and Air Force of equivalent ranks.
(b) Before paying a compliment, a sentry will always halt and turn to his
front. If standing in a Sentry Box, he will salute by coming to attention.

229
 (c) A sentry will Present Arms to armed parties and will salute unarmed
parties.
(d) A sentry will give Butt Salute to police officers of and above the rank
of Sub-Inspectors who are not entitled to Present Arms.
(a) A sentry will not Present Arms to any armed party after dark.
(b) As long as a sentry can discern an officer, he will halt and turn to
his front on his approach and will pay the correct compliments
as for day.
8. Special Instructions
The above orders regarding compliments by guards and sentries do not
apply to special guards mounted at the residences or camps of the President, or of
the Governor within his jurisdiction. Such guards will not Present Arms to persons
of lesser rank or status than of those for whom they are provided. When visited
by officers on duty they will turn out with arms at the slope. The sentries at such
residences or camps will Present Arms to the President/Governor and to armed
corps only. They will salute (butt salute, if at the slope; coming to attention, if at
the order) officers of lesser rank and unarmed parties.

230
 CHAPTER XXVII
GUARD OF HONOUR
The Guard of Honor to be mounted will depend on the status of the personage
as well as on the occasion.
Section 1
Composition, Strength & Occasions
Sl.No. Personage Strength Remarks
Entitled (Rank & file)
1 President 150 Two Bands to be in
attendance.
2 Vice President 100 One Band to be in
attendance.
3 Prime Minister 100 -Do-
4 Governor 100 -Do-
5 Union Home Minister/ MOS (Home)/ 50 -Do-
Dy. Minister (Home)
6 Chief Minister 50 -Do-
7 State Home Minister 35 -Do-
8 ****Director General of Police/ Addl.DGP 20-35 One Band to be in
attendance when
available.
9 ****Inspector Gneral of Police 12-20 Two Buglars
10 ****Dy. Inspector General of Police 12 -Do-
11 Head of Foreign State 150 Two Bands to be in
attendance.
12 Vice-Head of Foreign State 100 One Band to be in
Attendance.
13 Head of Diplomatic mission in 100 -Do-
14 Head of a Foreign Police Forces 20-35 -Do-
****As small districts have less strength so flexibility of strength has been kept.

231
(b) Occasions
Sl. No. Personage Entitled Occasions
1 President On arrival and/or departure when public. All
official visits are not public. Only formal visits
notified as such by the Central Govt. through
local civil authorities and/or Army Hqrs’ will
be treated as public.
2 Vice President At special occasions concerned with police
forces.
3 Prime Minister -Do-
4 Governor (i) On special occasions, Governor will be
presented with Guard of Honor within
jurisdiction.
(ii) On arrival to take over appointment once
only.
(iii) On departure or relinquishing such
appointment once only.
5 Union Home Minister/ On special occasions connected with police,
MOS (Home)/ which should include a visit to a State Police/
Dy. Minister (Home) CPO/Office/ establishment.
6 Chief Minister -Do-
7 State Home Minister -Do-
8 Director General of On official visits to a Distt. Hqrs/ Armed Police
Police/ Addl. DGP. Bus/Police Training Schools, when the Visit
is for Inspection/Ceremonial purposed, both on
arrival end on departure.
9 Inspector Gneral of Police -Do-
10 Dy. Inspector General -Do-
of Police
11 Foreign Dignitaries Foreign dignitaries will be presented the Guard
of Honor only when they are on official visit
to a State Police/ CPO Office/Establishments.
Special Note
The entitlement for the President, Vice-President, Prime Minister and
Governor have been well laid out in the various notifications of Union and State
Governments. For other personages, Section 1, para 131 only means to provide

232
guidelines. The entitlement for other persons and occasions on which Guard of
Honor is to be presented, should be notified in the Central/State Government
Gazette.
Section 2
Dress
The Dress of all Guards of Honor will be Review Order Dress but Specific
order should be issued deciding the exact uniforms to be worn on each occasion.
Section 3
Formation
(a) Guard
The Guard of Honor will be sized and equalized as for a company. Where
possible, it will be formed up facing the direction from which the personage for
whom it is mounted will approach.
The Guard will from up in two equal divisions in two ranks with a distance
of 4 paces between the front and rear ranks. It will be dressed at intervals of 24".
The interval for the escort party of colors between the two divisions will be
3 paces. In case no colors are carried, this interval may be ignored.
(b) Officers
With Colors
(i) G.Os. and Inspectors/Sub-Inspectors:—The Commander 4 paces in
front of the second file from the right. The next senior G.O./Inspector/
Sub-Inspector, two paces in front of the second from the left. The
Junior Officer/Inspector/Sub-Inspector (with the Color) two paces in
front of the centre of the Guard.
(ii) Havaldars: —The senior Hav. Major will be the right Guide of the
first division and the next junior left Guide of the second division.
The third junior will be the right Guide of the second division and the
junior most left of the first division.
Without Colors
(iii) The Commander: —Four paces in front of the centre of the Guard;
the next senior G.O./Inspector/Sub-Inspector, two paces in front of
the second file from the right; the third junior G.O./Inspector/Sub-
Inspector, two paces in front of the second file from the left.
(iv) Havaldars: —Their posts will be the same as detailed in para (b) (ii)
above.
(v) On special occasions when the guard strength is increased to 150 all
233
 ranks, and when colors are not carried, the Guard Commander will be
8 paces in front and in centre of the Guard. The next senior G.O./
Inspector/Sub-Inspector, three paces in from of the second file from
the right, the third junior G.O./Inspector/Sub-Inspector, 3 paces in
front of the second file from the left.
(c) Band
(i) The Band will form up on the right flank in line with the Guard and 7
paces from the right Guide of the Guard. The band will be in Column
in four files with 2 paces between each file. The Drum major will be
3 paces in front of the front rank of the band and the Band Master 2
paces in front of him.
(ii) When no band is available, two buglers may be provided who will
fall in line on the right of the Guard of Honor. Similarly if there is no
space on the right flank, the Band may be positioned behind the Guard.
Section 4
Aide-De-Camp
There will always be two As D.C. who will stand on either side of the dais,
3 paces to the right and left of the front edge.
Section 5
Conducting Officer
The Conducting Officer (civil or police office who receives the V.I.P. and
conducts him to the Saluting Base will, after conducting the V.I.P. to the dais,
position himself in the centre rear of the dais and at 3 paces from it.
Section 6
Colors
Colors may be brought on parade by the Guard of Honor, in accordance
with the custom of the State Police. Colors will not be fought on parade when an
inter-State Guard of Honor is provided.
Section 7
Salute
Only one salute before the Inspection will be given. As. D.C. will not salute
when either the National or General Salute is played.
National Salute will be given to—
(i) The President of the Republic of India.
(ii) Governors within their own States.

234
 Other dignitaries entitled to salute on ceremonial occasions will be given
the ‘General Salute’.
Section 8
National Anthem
There are two versions of the National Anthem.
(i) Full version, which can be played approximately for 52 seconds.
(ii) Short version of nine bars, which can be played approximately for 20
seconds.
The Full Version should be played on the following occasions: —
(a) On all occasions when the President is present in person (including
broadcasts by the President on National Days).
(b) On all occasions for Governors when they attend Ceremonial Parades,
Guard of Honor within their own States.
(c) At Republic Day and Independence Day Parades when the National
Flag is broken at the mast.
(d) The National Anthem can also be played for the Prime Minister of
India on special occasions with the prior approval of the State
Government.
The short version may be played on all other occasions according to
instructions.
Whenever National Anthem is played, all ranks will come to attention and
all officers of and above the rank of Head Constable, if in uniform, will give
proper salute. Officers in attendance on the chief dignitary taking the salute will
only come to attention and will not salute when National Anthem is played.
Section 9
Inspection
The following procedure will be observed for inspection
(a) After paying the proper compliments i.e., National Salute/General
Salute to the personage for whom it is mounted, the Guard should be
brought to the position of ‘Order Arms’. The Colors, if carried, will
remain at the ‘Carry’.
(b) The Guard Commander will then march forward and report to the
V.I.P. He will do so in a suitably loud voice and say “Guard of Honour
consisting of officers and other Ranks is ready for your
inspection, Sir” (Ke Afsran Aur Jawan ke Samman Garad, Nirikshan
ke liye Hazir Hai, Shriman).
235
 (c) The V.I.P. will come down from the dais and the Guard Commander
will conduct him, moving on the V.I.P.’s right side and a little in front
of him. He will walk and not do the ‘Slow March’.
(d) As.D.C. will not march in front of the V.I.P.
(e) The V.I.P. will inspect the band passing behind the Drum Major of the
Band. The Band will not turn their heads and eyes towards the V.I.P.
during the inspection, but will look straight to the front.
(f) As soon as the V.I.P. passes the left hand man of the band, the Bank
Master will turn about, get the band ready and start playing. Taking
the time from the first beat of the drum, every officer and man of the
Guard, (i.e., both the front and the rear rank) except the officer carrying
the color, will turn his heads and eyes towards the V.I.P. i.e., he will
look at him. As the V.I.P. moves on, the officers and men will also
move their heads and eyes looking at him all the time. If the V.I.P.
stops during the inspection, the movement of heads will also stop.
(g) The band will stop playing as soon as the V.I.P. has finished the
inspection, and the Guard taking the time from the last note of the
music, will turn their heads and eyes to the front.
(h) If the Band is positioned in the rear, the Band will not be inspected
and if no Band is available the heads and eyes of every officer and
man of the Guard except the officers carrying colors will turn to the
right together as soon as the V.I.P. has completed his inspection of the
Buglers who will look straight during the inspection.
(i) Only the front rank of the Guard will be inspected. The V.I.P. will
move in front of the officers and the colors i.e., he will inspect the
Guard from a distance of 3-4 paces from the front.
(j) The V.I.P. will be conducted by the Guard Commander towards the
Conducting Officer. The Conducting Officer would have, moved from
his position behind the dais to a new position suitable to take the
V.I.P. away for the introductions. When the V.I.P. is being handed
over to the Conducting officer, the Guard Commander will salute the
V.I.P. The Guard Commander must be prepared to shake hands with
the V.I.P. should the latter offer to do so; in that case he will immediately
hold the sword, (if carrying a sword) in the left hand.
Section 10
General
1. The Guard of Honor will not march off or ‘Stand Easy’ till the personage
for whom it is mounted has left the place or reception.
2. The Guard of Honor will not march past.

236
3. No Guard of Honor will be provided in any station between the hours of
sun-set and sun-rise.
4. The Guard of Honor should be provided for dignitaries who are entitled to
it and not for others. The strength of Guard of Honor should never be less
than SO and it should not be mounted at odd time and place.
5. In certain special circumstances, such as limitation of space, where it is not
practicable to follow the above instructions in its entirety, suitable
modifications may be made to meet the occasion.

237
 CHAPTER XXVIII
FIRING A FEU-DE-JOIE
Section 1
Occasions
FEU-DE-JOIE will be fired only on the following occasions:-
(i) Republic Day
(ii) Independence Day
(iii) State Day
(iv) Raising Day of the Force/Unit
Section 2
Procedure And Words Of Command
1. The procedure of firing of the FEU-DE-JOIE will be as under: -
(a) The troops will be drawn up in line in three ranks in open order, rifles
at the order and bayonets fixed.
(b) The parade Will Fire a FEU-DE-JOIE, Officers and JCOs (and colors)
Take Post [Parade Harsh Fire Karegi, Afisers Aur JCOs (Aur Rangin)
Jagah Sambhal.]
(c) The Police colors will be brought to the CARRY and the color party
will advance six paces on the command of the senior officer.
(d) The colors will not be lowered during the firing of a FEU-DE-JOIE.
Standing Load (Khare Bhar)
2. The guides and all NCOs and men in the ranks will load. The muzzles of
the rifles will be inclined upwards, so as to clear the heads of the men in
front. The supernumerary ranks will remain at the order.
Present (Pesh Kare)
3. Rifles will be brought to the position for firing at an angle of 135 degrees.
Heads will be kept perfectly still and no attempt will be made to aim.
Commence (Shuru)
4. The right hand man of the front rank will commence the fire, which will
run down the front, up the middle and down the rear rank as quickly as
possible.
NOTE: -
(i) The FEU DE-JOIE will be fired in three parts or series.
(ii) When the left hand man of the rear rank has fired, the band will play the
238
 first part of the National Anthem, the troops remaining at the Present, Offices
at the salute. On the last note of the band, Unit Commander will again give
“Load” and the men will again act as above, while the band will play the
second part of the National Anthem. Three series will be fired in all, the
whole of the National Anthem being played on completion of the last series.
(iii) Some times it is necessary to fire FEU-DE-JOIE with a troop in two ranks.
In such a case the firing is to be done from right to left in the front and left
to right in the rear rank. The band will play the National Anthem after the
right hand man of the rear rank has fired.
Unload (Khali Kare)
5. At the conclusion of the National Anthem, Unit Commander will give the
Command “Unload” when the men will come to the loading position and
will unload, holding their rifles at an angle of 135 degrees.
Order—Arms Officers (And Colors) Take Post.
6. The color party will resume its position in line and order arms on the
Command of the senior officer, the colors being brought to the order.
Section 3
Giving Of Cheers At Parades (Parade Par Jai Bolna)
1. Cheers will be given on the following occasions: —
(a) To the President when actually taking a parade.
(b) For the President at Republic Day and Independence Day parades.
(c) To the VIPs and other senior police officials at their farewell parade.
2. (a) Cheers will be given: —
(i) After the inspection and before the march past, when not
advancing in Review order.
(ii) After paying of the compliments in Review order.
(b) When a speech is being given by the personage, the cheers will be
given after the speech whatever ceremonial form may be in force.
3. The drill for giving cheers will be as follows: —
(a) The parade is brought to the position of “Savadhan”.
(b) The parade Commander gives a warning order “parade will give three
cheers” (Parade Tin Bar Jai Bolegi).
(c) The Parade Commander then shouts: —
(i) The actual name of the personage on occasion mentioned in paras
l (a) and l(c).
239
 (ii) The word “Rashtrapati” on the occasion mentioned in para 1(b).
(d) The parade will then shout ‘Ki Jai’, and every rank at the same time
will raise his left arms to full length above his head.
(e) The drill given in sub-para (c) and (d) will be repeated three times.

240
PASSING OUT PARADE
 CHAPTER XXIX

PASSING OUT PARADE (DEEKSHANT PARADE)

Introduction
1. Passing Out Parade, is held in Police Academies, Police Training Colleges,
Recruits Training Schools and other Police Training establishments to mark
the conclusion of training of personnel (cadets and recruits) in that
establishment.
2. The Passing Out Parade is a ceremonial occasion. Therefore, the units should
make careful preparation as this will reflect the standard of training imparted,
before a number of invitees and general public.
3. The Passing Out Parade involves ‘Oath Taking’ by the trainees and their
induction to a professional life. Thus this is a solemn occasion to which the
trainees look forward and take pride. The trainees should be motivated to
give their best in the Parade.
4. To achieve these objectives, adequate number of rehearsals should be done
under proper supervision at all levels.
5. This chapter deals with the standard procedure to be followed during this
parade. However, officers are expected to interpret these instructions
reasonably and intelligently bearing in mind that slight alternations can
always be made to suit the strength of the trainees.
Section 1
General Instructions
The Passing Out Parade being a ceremonial occasion, the instructions
regarding General Arrangements, Inspection ground, Unit organisation, Sizing
of units, Parade formation, Receiving the Inspecting Officer (including VVIPs),
Inspection Post of officers, March Past in various formations and Advancing in
Review Order as contained in Chapter XVI of this Manual, will be followed.
Also the officers will follow special instructions as contained in the same chapter.
Diagram of the Inspection ground is given ‘below for ready reference (Figure 1)

241
The Inspection Or Review Parade Ground.

(Figure 1, For details please see Section 2 of Chapter XVI)

Section 2
Formation of Parade
(i) Thirty minutes before the scheduled commencement of the programme, the
“Deekshant Parade” will form up behind the Fort Wall, platoon-wise, rifles
in “Bazu Shastra” (Order Arms) position with bayonets fixed. Half of the
number of platoons will take position on the right side of the ‘Fort Gate’,
platoon number 1 being near to the gate and other platoons to its right in the
ascending order of their serial numbers. The remaining half will stand on
the left of the gate, the serially last platoon being near the gate and the
others to its left in the descending order of their serial number. Thus, if
there are six platoons participating in the parade, platoon numbers 1, 2, 3
will stand on the right of the ‘Fort Gate” and platoon numbers 6, 5, 4 to its
left, in that order (Figure 2 given below). With five platoons in the Parade,
platoon numbers 1, 2, 3 will stand on the right of the gate and platoon
numbers 5, 4 on its left.
The parade commander will take position in front. The swords of the parade
commander and platoon commanders will be in “Carry” position. The Riding
Section, if available, will be behind the parade followed by the Band at the
rear, in the centre. Buglers and Lancers will also position behind the fort
wall.
(ii) Fort-gate is opened by two gate-keepers 20 minutes before the
commencement of the Parade. Two buglers enter the parade ground from
the sides of the centre wall and march up to the inspection line (For
description of inspection line, passing line, etc., please see Section 2 of
Chapter XVI) and will sound Markers Call. The buglers turn and march

242
 back to the rear of the fort wall. The Markers will take their positions on the
inspection line. The buglers and lancers also take up their respective positions
on the top of the fort wall and on the sides of the parade ground.
(iii) The buglers sound Fall in Call (Advance Call) 3 minutes after the Markers
Call. There upon the parade commander will bring the parade to “Savdhan”
and “Kandhe Shastra” positions, and march it to the inspection line, giving
the command “Parade Dahine Baen Se Tej Chal”. On crossing the Gate,
the right side Platoons (Nos. 1, 2, 3) will proceed towards the right of the
wall; the left side ones (Nos. 6, 5, 4) marching towards the left of the wall.
On reaching the markers, the platoons will mark time. On a drum beat,
given after all the platoons haveeached
r their respective positions on the
inspection line, the parade will halt. The parade commander will give the
following commands in succession:-
“Parade, Dahine Baen Mur”,
“Parade, Bazu Shastra”,
“Parade Khuli Line Chal”,
“Parade Madhye Saj”.
The Riding Section will form up n the left. The Band will form up 8 paces
o behind the inspection line in entre.
the C
(iv) The parade is now in ready position (See Figure-3 given below)
N.B. :
1. It is seen that big institutions have permanent forts especially made for the
passing out parades. These forts have ramparts. The buglers should be
243
 stationed on the ramparts or any other convenient places, if the wall has no
ramparts.
2. If the institution does not have the permanent fort, it is desirable that a
Temporary Fort of canvass cloth is made. This will lend color and pageant
to the ceremony.
3. Mounted squad and lancers will be included in the Parade depending upon
the availability.
Section-3
Presenting Compliments To The Head Of The Organisation / Institution
(i) The Head of the Institution / Organisation will arrive 10 minutes before the
commencement of the program. The moment his arrival is sighted, the parade
commander will bring the parade to “Savdhan” and “Kandhe Shastra”
positions. Immediately after the head of the institution has taken position at
the Saluting Base, the parade commander will give the command “Parade,
General Salute, Salami Shastra”. The Band will play the tune “General
Salute”, at the conclusion of which the parade commander will give the
following commands successively:
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”,
“Parade Bazu Shastra”,
“Parade Vishram”.
(ii) After taking salute, the head of the institution will proceed to the alighting
point to receive the VIP invited to review the “Deekshant Parade” and walk
for his arrival.
Section 4
Arrival Of The VIP/VVIP
As soon as the VIP/VVIP is sighted, the buglers will sound “Fanfare”. The
244
 Parade commander will immediately give the Command; “Deekshant
Parade, Savdhan”, followed by “Parade kandhe Shastra”.
As soon as the VIP, escorted by the head of the institution, takes up his
position on the Saluting Base, the parade will present arms to him, the
parade commander giving the following words of command:
“Parade, General Salute, Salami Shastra”
The Band will play the tune “General Salute” and the parade will stay in
that position till the tune is over. (If the VIP is the President of India or a
Governor, the “Rashtriya Salute” will be given and the Band will play
National Anthem) The parade commander will, thereafter, bring the parade
to “Kandhe Shastra” and “Bazu Shastra” positions.
N.B. Regarding ‘Salute’ and playing of National Anthem instructions
contained in Section 7 and Section 8 of Chapter XVIII (Chapter on Guard
of Honor) will be followed.
Section 5
Review Of The Parade By The VIP
The moment the parade comes to “Bazu Shastr” as position, the commander
will march towards Saluting Book, halt, pay compliments to VIP and report–
“Shriman, (“Mahodayaa”, if the VIP is a lady), Deekshant Parade Aapke
Nirikshan Ke Liye Hazir Hai” Meanwhile, the inspection jeep (if one is
planned to be used), stationed close at hand, will reach the Saluting Base.
The VIP will stand in the front portion of the jeep, and the head of the
institution and the parade commander in the rear portion, with the former
on the right and the latter on his left side. The jeep will then proceed to the
right of the parade and pass through the front rank of the parade from right
to left (in case a jeep is not intended to be used, the VIP will be escorted on
foot to the inspection line with the head of the institution on his right and
the parade commander on the left, both moving one step behind the VIP).
As soon as the VIP (whether on the inspection jeep or on foot) passes the
right guide of the first platoon, the Band will start playing one of the slow
march tunes and will continue to play the same till the review of the parade
by the VIP is over. (If the VIP is on foot, the parade commander and the
head of the institution will move in slow march during the review).
Section 6
Oath Taking
(i) After the VIP’s return to the Saluting Base, the parade commander will
salute him and seek permission for oath taking in the following words:
“Shriman” (“Mahodayaa” for a lady VIP), Shapath Grahan Karne Ki Agyaa
Pardan Karen”
245
 The Parade Commander will once again salute the VIP, turn about and
return to his original position near the inspection line.
(ii) Parade commander will, thereafter, bring the parade to “Kandhe Shastra”
position and call the ‘Color Party’ (consisting of bearers of the National
Flag and that of the institution/unit, and the escorts), using the word of
command, “Nishan Toli Parade Par”.
There upon the ‘Nishan Toli’ (Color Party) with National Flag and Unit
Flag, will march towards (and in front of) of inspection line and reach up to
14 paces beyond the right guide of the first platoon. As soon as the ‘Nishan
Toli’ starts marching, the parade will present arms to the national Flag on
the command of the parade commander:
“Parade Rashtriya Salute, Salami Shastr”
The band will play the full version of the National Anthem. During the
“Rashtriya Salute”, all the guests, invitees and others present at the parade
ground will stand up and officers in uniform, among them will salute.
Suitable announcements will be made beforehand in this regard.
Upon the ‘Nishan Toli’ reaching its designated position on the right hand
side of the parade, the Nishan Toli Commander will give the command,
“Nishan Toli, Salami Shastra”, on which the ‘Nishan Toli’ will also present
arms. The institution / unit flag will be dipped. All this while, the parade
will remain in “Salami Shastra” position.
The parade commander will now bring the parade and the ‘Nishan Toli’ to
“Kandhe Shastra” and “Bazu Shastra” positions. All the invitees and others
will resume their seats.
(iii) The parade commander will, thereafter, give the following commands to
the Platoon commanders:
“Commanders Wapas Kirch”
“Commanders Jagah Lo”
On the first command, the platoon commanders will return their swords.
On the second command, they will take a right turn and wait for a drum
beat on which they will march to the right of their respective platoons and
halt. On a second drum beat, they will turn about.
(iv) The parade commander will then give the command “Nishan Jagah Lo”,
upon which the two flag bearers will march forward and take position 7
paces before the right guide of the First Platoon, the national flag being in
front and the institution unit flag behind it. Simultaneously, the parade
participants will move their left hands and take hold of their rifles with it (a
drum beat will be given for this). On the next from beat, they will raise their
right hands to an angle of 45° to the horizontal.
246
(v) On the parade commander’s command, “Nishan, Karyavahi Shuru Kar”,
the two flag bearers will start moving in slow march in front of the parade,
the national flag leading. The Band will play one of the slow march tunes.
When the flag bearers cross the left guide of the last platoon, the middle
rank will hold their rifles with left hand and raise their right hand on drum
beats. Simultaneously the front flank will cut their hands to “Savdhan”
position. Likewise, after passing completely through the rear flank, the flag
bearers will start quick march and come to the centre of the parade and halt,
facing towards the parade.
(vi) For the Oath-taking, a drum beat will again be given upon which the cadets
will raise their right hands to 45° to the horizontal, holding their rifles with
left hands, as before.
(vii) The Head of the Institution Organisation will now read out the prescribed
oath (breaking its text in convenient parts) in the language spoken and
understood by the cadets who will repeat every part of it as soon as read out
by the former. Once the text of the oath is completed, the cadets will, on a
drum beat, swiftly cut their right hands and on the second beat, they will
take the rifle in their right hands and resume the “Savdhan” position.
(viii) The parade commander will now give the command, “Commanders Jagah
Lo”, upon which the platoon commanders will take their positions in front
of their respective platoons; the Nishan Toli will simultaneously turn to the
left and join its escorts.
(ix) The parade will, thereafter, give the command “Commanders Nikal Kirch”,
upon which the platoon commanders will fake out their swords. The parade
will be brought to “Kandhe Shastra” position.
(x) The parade commander will now order the ‘Color Party’ to move out with
the command, “Nishan Toli, Kooch Kar”, upon which the ‘Nishan Toli’
will march off, passing in front of the parade. The parade commander will
immediately give the command, “Parade, Rashtriya Salute, Salami Shastra”,
upon which the parade will present arms to the national flag. The Band will
play full version of the National Anthem. All the invitees, guests and other
present at the parade ground will once again stand up and officers in uniform,
among them, will salute. Suitable announcements will once again be made
beforehand in this regard.
(xi) The spectators will assume their seats once the National Anthem is over
and the ‘Color Party” is seen. off. The parade commander will give the
commands, “Parade, Kandhe Shastra” and “Parade, Bazu Shastra”.
Section 7
Ceremonial March Past
(i) Once the ‘Color Party’ has marched off and the parade has come to “Bazu
247
 Shastra” position, the parade commander will give the following commands
to commence the March Past: —
“Parade, Nikat Line Chal”
“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade, Tin-o-Tin Column men Dahine Chalega, Dahine Mur”
“Baen Se Tej Chal”
(The Band will start playing one of the quick march tunes)
“Baen Disha Badal, Baen Ghoom”.
Formation into Close Column
(ii) As the parade approaches the march past line in front and the left of the
Saluting Base. (Point ‘A’) the parade commander will give the word of
command, “Parade, tham Kar, Baen Disha Platoon Ke Nikat Column
Banaa”.
Individual platoon commanders will then bring their respective platoons to
halt and make them turn to the left, in succession. When the last platoon has
thus formed up, the parade commander will give the command, “Parade,
Bazu Shastra”, and immediately thereafter order the dressing of the platoons
with the words of Command “Parade Dahine Saj”.
On this command, the right guides of all the platoons will turn to their right,
march out 5 paces, halt, turn about and take up the dressing of the front
line, one after the other, the right guides of all the platoons, in succession,
giving the command “Hilo Mat”. Immediately after the right guide of the
last platoon has finished his command to the first line, all the fight guides
will together take a left turn, move a step forward, take right turn and respect
the action for dressing of the second line. All these movements will once
again be repeated for the third line of each platoon in the same sequence.
Immediately after the right guide of the last platoon has given the command
“Hilo Mat” to the last line of his platoon, all the right guides will together
take a turn to the right, move two steps forward, take a left turn to their
original positions in alignment with the first line of their respective platoons.
The guides will take care to coordinate all their movements with each other
throughout.
After dressing of the platoons is over, the parade commander will give the
word of command ‘Samne Dekh’ on which the entire parade will
simultaneously come to the ‘eyes front’ position, and platoon commanders
and the parade commander will turn about. All the right guides will step out
together, march 5 paces, halt and turn to their right. The parade is now
ready for the March Past.

248
March Past:
(iii) The Parade Commander will now give the Commands:
“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”
‘Parade, Platoon Ke Column Men Manch Se Guzregi-Number One Platoon
Aage”.
Immediately after this command, the platoon commander of the 1st platoon
will give the command, “Number Ek Platoon, Aage Barhega, Dahine, Se
Dhire Chal”. The first platoon will, on this command, start slow march.
The Band will play slow march tune. The remaining platoons will follow in
succession at the column distance, each platoon commander giving the
command independently to his own platoon to start marching. The parade
commander will start marching as soon as Number 1 platoon commences
its march.
(iv) When the Platoon No. 1 is approaching Point ‘B’. parade commander will
give the command ‘Parade Bari-Bari Khuli Line Chal”.
Thereupon, each platoon commander will give the following commands
independently to his own platoon on reaching the Marked Flag Points.
(i) No........ Platoon Khuli Line (At point B) (Platoons will one order &
continue marching)
(ii) No ........ Platoon Dahine Dekh (At Point C)
(iii) No.........Platoon Samne Dekh (At point D)
At the command Platoon Dahine Dekh the entire platoon except the right
guide will turn ‘Eyes right’. The Platoon Commander will simultaneously
salute the VIP. The parade commander salutes independently.
(v) When all platoons have cleared saluting base and between point ‘D’ & ‘E’,
the parade commander will give the command for close order ‘Parade Bari
Nikat Line Chal. There upon each platoon commander will give the
command independently to his own platoon, on reaching the marked flag
point. The word of command for platoon commander is ‘Platoon No...Nikat
Line’.
On reaching the corner flag (Point F) parade commander gives the word of
command “Parade, Tham Kar, No. 1. Platoon par, Platoono-ka-Nikat Column
Banaa”. On this parade will be formed again in the close column of platoon
No. 1. For this each platoon commander will give the command
“No.....Platoon Tham’ independently on raching at close column distance—
after No. 1 platoon halts near corner point.
After this, the parade commander gives word of command “Parade Dahine
Se Bari Bari, Tinon-tin ke Column Mein Aage Barh, Parade Dahine Mur”.
249
(vi) As soon as the parade is turned to its right, No. 1 platoon commander will
advance his platoon by giving word of command “No. 1 Platoon, Baen Se
Tej Chal, Baen Ghoom” and thereafter all platoon commanders will advance
their respective platoons and march along with inspection line. The Parade
has to pass through the saluting base again in quick march, in platoons and
such on reaching near passing line again the parade will be advanced in the
platoons columns.
On reaching near the passing line (Point ‘A’) the parade commander will
give the world of command “Parade Baen Disha Platoon-ke-column Mein
Aage Barh”.
There upon, each platoon commander will advance the platoon by giving
the following word of command:
“NO:......Platoon Aage Barhega baen Murh—Dahine Se”
Similarly, platoon commanders will give following words of command while
passing in front of saluting base:
“No......Platoon Dahine Dekh” (Point C)
“No......Platoon Samne Dekh” (Point D)
On reaching the corner flag Parade Commander will give the word of
command:
“Parade, Dahine Se Bari Bari Tinon Tin Ke Column Mein Age Barh,”
Thereupon on reaching near the corner, the parade will again advance in
column of threes for forming up on Inspection Line. For this, each platoon
commander gives the following words of command:
“No......Platoon Tinon Tin Men Dahine Chalega—Dahine Murh”
On this, each platoon will right turn on the marked place and Platoons
wheel twice and again near the inspection line on commands “Baen Ghoom”.
(vii) Once the parade reaches the original position i.e. on inspection line, Parade
Commander will give word of command “Parade Tham”, on which the
parade will come to halt. The Parade Commander will, thereafter, give the
following further commands: —
“Parade Aghe Barhega, Baen Murh”
“Parade Khuli Line Chal”
“Parade Madhye Saj”
The parade, on these commands, will turn to the left and move to open
order position. On a drum beat, the platoons on the right side of the Fort
Wall Gate will turn their heads to the left and those on the right flank will
look towards right and dress themselves up. At the next drum beat, all will
come to ‘eyes front’ position.

250
N.B.:
1. The procedure described in Section-7 involves two times March Past by
the parade before the saluting base. First in slow time in Platoons column
(Please see Section 17 of Chapter XVI of the Manual) and secondly in
quick time in platoon column (Please see Section 16 of Chapter XVI. This
procedure should be adopted for the passing out parade for officer—cadets.
2. In the passing out parade of recruit-constables, when the number of trainees
very large, march past, in slow time way be omitted.
3. While marching past in slow time, the procedure involves a ‘Halt’ on passing
line at the right corner (Near Point T’ after all the platoons have marched
past the saluting base in slow march) for formation of parade in close column.
This can be done in continuous marching (i.e. without halt) also as outlined
in Section 17 of Chapter XVI.
Section 8
Advance In Review Order, Report By The Head Of The Institution, Prize
Distribution And VIP’s Address
(i) “Once the dressing is over, the parade Commander will advance the parade
in review order, by giving the command “Parade, Sameeksha Kram Mein
madhye Se Tej Chal” Upon this command, the parade will march 15 paces
forward and automatically come to halt (on further word of command will
by given for halt). As soon as the parade halts, it will present General Salute
on the following commands of the Parade Commander:—
“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade, General Salute, Salami Shastra”
“Parade, Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade, Bazu Shastra”
“Parade, Vishram”
The Head of the Institution will now present his report.
(ii) Once this is over, the parade commander will take the prize winners forward
for receiving their prizes and trophies. The sequence of commands will be
as follows: —
“Parade, Savdhan”
“Commanders Waapas Kirch” (on this parade Commander and Platoon
Commanders will return their swords.)”
“Parade, Vishram”
“Puraskar Vijeta, Savdhan”
“Puraskar Vijeta, Line Ban”
A drum beat will be given on the command “Puraskar Vijeta Line Ban”,

251
 upon which each prize winner will pass his rifle into the left hand of the
person standing next to him. On a second beat, all prize winners will march
to form a line on both sides of the parade Commander, facing the Saluting
Base, and dress up on the parade Commander’s word of command, “Vijeta,
Saj Ja”.
On his next command, “Vijeta, Madhye Se Tej Chal” all prize winners
(including the parade Commander himself) will advance. On reaching the
marked line in front of the Saluting Base, and dress up on the Parade
Commander will bring them to halt and give the following further
commands:—
“Vijeta, Saj Ja”
“Puraskar Vijeta, Salute”
“Vijeta, Vishram”
The names of the prize winners will then be called out, upon which each of
them will take a step forward and proceed to the Saluting Base, salute the
VIP, receive the prize/trophy, again salute, turn to the left, march up a few
paces to the side of the Saluting Base, hand over the prize/trophy to the
official detailed for the purpose, and return to his original place in the line
of prize winners.
Once all the prizes have been distributed, the Parade Commander will take
the prize winners back, giving the following words of command:—
“Puraskar Vijeta, Savdhan”
“Vijeta, Salute”
“Vijeta, Piche Mur”
“Vijeta, Madhye Se Tej Chal”
On their reaching near the parade and in line with the original position of the
Parade Commander, the Parade commander will give them the word of
command, “Vijeta, Tham” on which they will come to halt. On the word of
command, “Puraskar vijeta, Jagah Lo”, all the prize winners would move forward
to their respective places’ in the Parade, the Parade Commander staying behind.
A drum beat will then be sounded, on which all of them will take back their
rifles. One-third-drum beat, they will come to stand-at-ease position.
(iii) The VIP will now deliver his address.
Section 9
Peeling off
(i) Once the VIP’s address is over, the Parade commander will give the
following words of command :

252
 ‘Tarade, Savdhan”
“Commanders, Nikal Kirch”
(ii) After the Parade has come to attention and the platoon commanders have
drawn their swords, the Parade commander will advance to the Saluting
Base and seek permission of the VIP for peeling off in the following words:
“Shriman, (‘Mahodayaa’ in the case of a lady VIP), Deekshant Parade Ko
Nishkraman Karne Kee Agyaa Pradan Karen”
(iii) The Parade commander, after obtaining permission for peeling off, will
return to his position hi front of the parade and give the words of command:
“Deekshant Parade, Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade, Dahine Baen Murh” the following words of
“Parade Nishkraman Ke Liye, Dahine Baen Se Dhire Chal”
Upon these commands, the parade turns inside and the cadets start stepping
out in columns of threes, from platoon on left as well as right side of the
parade, abreast with each other, towards and no either side of the Saluting
Base, in slow march. Every nest, six cadets will follow the previous six at a
distance of 8 paces.
The Parade and platoon Commanders and the right guides will step out in
slow march along with the files and form up in the centre waiting for their
turn for peeling off. As each row of six cadets reaches the mark point near
the Saluting base, they will split into tow rows of three each one moving
towards the right and the other towards the left of the Saluting base. On
approaching the VIP, they will pay compliments by offering the butt salute.
After moving 8 paces, they will cut down the salute and after crossing the
marked line they will break into quick march and proceed to the armory to
deposit their riffles.
The right guides and the platoon commanders followed by the Parade
Commander will start marching after the last row of cadets. As soon as the
Parade Commander has crossed the VIP, the riding section and the band
will march off through the fort wall gate. The gate will then be shut.
Section 10
Special Notes
(i) The procedure described in the chapter requires formation of parade in
platoon. In case, the number of trainers is very large and it is desired, that
the formation of parade should be in companies, march past will be done by
the procedure given in Section-14 of Chapter XVI.
(ii) The passing out Parade is an occasion marking culmination of the training
of the trainees. So the Parade has a little role for the Unit Adjutant and Unit

253
 SM Similarly there is little role for parade 2/IC. However, where it is desired,
that they should be taken into parade according to the traditions of the unit/
organisation/institution, permission of the concerned Director General of
Police should be taken. Then their position in the parade will be as in
Appendix ‘A’ of Chapter XVI.
(iii) The Words of commands regarding Arms Drill pertain to Arms Drill with
.303 Rifles. In the units where trainees have only SLrs.the commands
regarding “Kandhe Shastra” will be omitted and march past will be in “Bagal
Shastra”.
(iv) If cheers are to be given to the VVIP/VIP at the parade, the procedure
contained in Section 3 of Chapter XIX will be followed.

254
COLOLR PRESENTATION
PARADE

255
 CHAPTER XXX
COLOR PRESENTATION PARADE (ALANKARAN PARADE)
This chapter is divided into two parts. Part I includes information regarding
Color and basic drill movements associated with it such as Dressing, Casing,
Uncasing etc. part-II contains the procedure for the ceremony of presentation of
colors.
Part I
Section 1
Definition Of Color, Its Parts And Their Measurements
Color is ensign or flag carried by Armed Units and Formations. It is a mark
of their bravery and courage. The color is also called Standard.
Parts of Color:
(i) Color consists of pike and cloth. (Figure 1 below)
(ii) Pike’s length including the pike head is 8' 7”.
(iii) The size of Color’s Cloth:
(a) Length 3' 9” (Three feet Nine inches)
(b) Breadth 3' (Feet)
(c) Frill 2” (Two inches)
(d) Chord 4' 6” (Four Feet Six i nches)

Section 2
Carry Belt And Its Dressing
(i) Carry Belt: It is used to carry the Color. It has a socket and a strap, ‘battle of
Honour’ is written on its both sides.
(ii) Dressing of carry Belt: It is dressed like a crossbelt from the right shoulder.
256
 It also depends on the customs of a unit, but the Ensign Officer’s decoration
and medals should be visible. Socket should be always at the centre of the
body.
Section 3
Dressing of Color
Method: Hold the Color between right hand’s thumb and fingers. Bottom
of the pike should be a bit forward from the top and towards the right. Holding
the top part, press it with the help of thumbs so that the Tarsal is on the outside.
For the second fold of the double layer, 6’ of cloth should be left and holding the
double layer’s upper cloth, press it under left thumb. For the last fold, cloth should
be sized so that “Battle of Honor” is visible, fold the Color from lower to upper
side with right hand’s length.
Section 4
Casing And Uncasing The Color
(i) The occasions of uncasing the Color:
(a) Ceremonial parade;
(b) Passing out Parade (POP);
(c) Presentation of Guard of Honor;
(d) At any main occasion of the unit,
(ii) Uncasing:
After lifting the Color, the Ensign Officer stands in attention position, with
Senior NCO 3 paces to his front. Ensign Officer bends the color with both his
hands to the side of NCO. The NCO also handles the Color with both hands,
pressing the pike under right elbow the Ensign officer opens the case from inside.
The NCO puts the case on his left shoulder after pulling it slowly. The Ensign
Officer lifts the Color in attention position, the NCO salutes the Color, turns right
and goes away.
(iii) Casing:
Whenever the Color is kept in quarter guard or officers, mess it must be
cases. If possible it should be kept in a wooden box of 9' by length and 3' by
breadth with a glass lid. The color should be kept in the box in a way so that there
is no crease. While casing the Ensign Officer and NCO both stand in attention
position. The Color is with the English Officer. To start casing, the NCO salutes
the color. Then the Ensign Officer bends the Color and the NCO takes hold of the
head of pike. Thereupon the Ensign Officer puts his left leg forward and NCO
his right leg. After this the NCO puts the case on his right shoulder. Ensign Officer
holds the pike with left hand the then grasps the lower corner of Color and joins
257
it with the pike from left side by pressing with thumbs and fingers. The folded
Color is rolled above the pike from left to right. Tarsal is rolled properly above
the Color so that it wouldn’t open. Ensign Officer controls both the pike and
color and NCO mounts the case on it. Ensign Officer helps him to mount. After
the case has been mounted NCO keeps the cased Color properly.
Section 5
Uthao Nishan And Bazu Nishan
(i) Need
Ensign Officer must know the drill of ‘Uthao Nishan’ and ‘Bazu Nishan’
before holding and lifting the Color.
(ii) Uthao Nishan
Description of activity by counting
(a) On word of command “Ginti Se Color Drill Uthao Nishan-Ek;” lift
the color with right hand and bring it in front of the body. In this way
right hand’s elbow should join with pike. Hold the bottom of pike
with left hand and put it inside the socket.
(b) Points to see in this position: Color grasped with right hand at 90°
angle, elbow joined with pike and left hand on the socket joined with
the body.
(c) Squad-2 on the word of command : “Squad-2, bring the left hand of
left side quickly and bring right hand in front of your mouth, so that
the elbow is parallel to the ground.
(d) Points to see in this position: Right hand before lips and fingers gripped
inwards and thumb outwards; right forearm from elbow to wrist parallel
to ground; rest as in attention position.
(iii) Bazu-Nishan
(a) Description of activities by counting : The word of command is
received from ‘Uthao Nishan’ - Ginti Se Bazu Nishan Ek “lift the
color up to that height such that bottom of pike separates from the
socket. Join the right elbow with pike and bring the left hand on the
pike so that bottom of pike is helped to come out.
(b) Points to see in this position : As in Uthao Nishan position with any
one difference i.e. bottom of the pike is separated from the socket.
(c) Squad -2 on the word of command : “Squad-2” bring the Color with
right hand to right side and hold the Color from the belt’s line so that
the pike should be joined with shoulder. Bottom of the pike should be
above the ground and on the right side of the right boot’s toe line.
258
 (d) Points to see in this position: Bottom of the pike half (1/2) inch above
the ground and right hand holding the pike; left hand grasping the
color on belt line; rest of the position is like attention position.
(e) Squad 3: On this word of command bring left hand on left side quickly
in attention position.
Section 6
Uthao Nishan to Kandhe Nishan And Vice Versa
(i) Necessity of Kandhe Nishan - It is the method of carrying the Color from
one place to another.
(ii) Description of Activities by Counting:
(a) The word of command is received from the Uthao Nishan position -
“Ginti Se Color Drill Kandhe Nishan Ek”, lift the Color with right
hand so that the bottom of the pike come before the socket.
(b) Points to see in this position are like the first motion of Bazu Nishan.
(c) Squad 2: On the word of command “Squad 2” bring the left hand in
attention position and the color to the shoulder. Right elbow should
touch the body.
(d) Points to see in this position — Right elbow joined with right side of
the body; the pike gripped with right hand on the shoulder and at the
angle of 45° it is covered with color from the head of the pike to right
hand’s grip.
Section 7
Let Fly, Holding And Dipping Of The Color
(i) Let Fly: In this the color is waived according to procedure given below and
it is done when the word of command ‘Salami Shastra’ is given.
(ii) Description of Activity : On the word of command “Let Fly” move the
right hand along with the pike almost about 6 inches and let free the Color
from the hand. When Color is free bring the right hand again to the former
position. The movement is done with the third movement of Salami Shastra.
Right hand should not be removed from the pike.
(iii) Points to see in this position: It is like Uthao Nishan but the color is flying.
(iv) Holding the Color : This activity is done on the command of Bazu Shastra.
On this command, hold the Color with left hand and bring it on the left side.
On the word of command of Bazu Shastra, Color is to be brought to Bazu
Nishan accordingly. If the VIP has to inspect after receiving the salute then
the Color is kept in carry position and Ensign Officer coordinates his
movements with words of command of Arms Drill.

259
(v) Occasions to dip the Color;
(a) President’s Color:
President’s Color is dipped for the
(i) President
(ii) Governor in the State
President Color is dipped only when National Salute is being
given.
(b) Regimental Colouur
It is dipped for the following :
(i) President
(ii) Vice President
(iii) Governor
(iv) Prime Minister
(v) Union Home Minister
(vi) Field Marshal
(vii) Chief Minister in his State
(viii) Chief of Army Staff, Air Chief Marshal, Chief of Naval Staff with
permission from Union Home Ministry
(ix) Director General of Police with permission.
(i) Description of activity by counting
Word of command is received from the carry position Ginti Se Color Drill
Jhukao Nishan Ek”, join right elbow with the pike.
(ii) Squad 2: — On the word of command ‘Squad 2’, lift the Color at 45°
on left or right depending upon the direction of the wind so that the
color will fly completely in the air.
Section 8
Color Party, Escort And Priests
(i) Color will be carried in the above-described manner, by the Ensign Officer
of the rank of Dy SP/ASP. The escort of the Color party will consist of 3
specially selected NCOs (in a Battalion the senior most NCO who is
Battalion Havildar Major and two other senior NCOs should form the escort).
(ii) The entire color party will take its position, in the centre of the parade.

260
(iii) In addition, two specially selected NCOs will stay with the Color party
with Cased Colors.
(iv) If there are two Colors i.e. President’s color and Regimental Color, there
will be two Ensign Officers. President’s colors should always be on the
right and the officer carrying the color will be senior of the two and
commander of the party.
(v) Priests: Priests or Religious Teachers (RTs) should be specially selected for
the parade. They should be included in the rehearsals.
(vi) Before the start of the parade, the RTs should take post behind the Saluting
Base, a few paces towards the right.

261
 PART II
Section 1
General Instructions
Color is presented to a force/unit as recognition of the services rendered by
it. It is a mark of the spirit of dedication, bravery and courage exhibited by the
unit. Color Presentation Parade, therefore is a highly ceremonial occasion. Careful
preparation should be done under supervision at all levels to ensure a high standard
of the parade. Procedure regarding General Arrangements. Parade Ground, Unit
Organisation, Receiving the Inspecting Officer, Inspection, March Past, Post of
Officers and Advancing in Review order is given in Chapter XVI of this Manual
and will be followed. Officers will follow the special instructions regarding
ceremonial parade given in section 8 of the same chapter. Officers arc therefore
advised to thoroughly study Chapter XVI along with this chapter.
Section 2
VVIPs To Present The Color
Color Presentation is a singular occasion marking the recognition of the
achievements of the Unit. It is occasion, which will be engraved in the memory
of the members of unit . Therefore, the Heads of Forces should ensure that color
is presented to a force / unit by a VVIP only).
For President’s Color
President’s Color to a police force (CPO/State Police) will be presented
by one of the following VVIPs:
(a) President
(b) Prime Minister
(c) Union Minister of Home Affairs.
For Regimental Color
Regimental Color to a police formation (Battalion/PTC) will be presented
by one of the following: -
(a) Governor
(b) Chief Minister of the State
(c) State Minister of Home Affairs
Section 3
Strength Of Parade
Color Presentation Parade (Alankaran Parade) will consist of the following:
(i) For President’s Color

262
 (a) Parade Commander (Commandant/SP.)
(b) Parade Second-in-Command (Addl.SP)
(c) Parade Adjutant
(d) Officers - 4 (Company Commanders)
(e) Subedar Major - 1
(f) SOs - 12
(g) Other Ranks - 4 Coys of 75 Other Ranks each
(h) Ensign Officer - 1
(i) Escorts to the Color 3 + 2
(j) Bands - Two Bands (Brass & Pipe mixed)
(k) Mounted Squad - As per availability.
Instructions regarding Ensign Officer and Escorts are already discussed
in Section 8 of Part I of this Chapter.
(ii) For Regimental Color
(a) Parade Commander (Dy. Comdt.)
(b) Parade 2/IC (Dy. SP)
(c) Parade SM
(d) Ensign Officer-1
(e) Escorts to the color 3+2
(f) SOs: as per the strength of the other ranks.
(g) Other Ranks: at least two coys.
(h) Band: One/two as per availability
(i) Mounted Squad: as per availability.
Section 4
Formation Of Parade
(i) Thirty minutes before the scheduled commencement of the program, the
Alankaran Parade will form up behind the Fort Wall, Coy-wise, rifles in
“Bazu Shastra” (Order Arms) position with bayonets fixed. Two Coys will
take position on the right side of the ‘Fort Gate’, coy number 1 being nearest
to the gate and other coy (Coy number 2) to its right. The last coy (Coy
number 4) will be near the gate on left and coy number 3 will be to its
further left. The Riding Squad will be behind the parade followed by the
Band at the rear, in the centre. Buglars and lancers will also position behind
the fort wall.
(ii) Fort-gate is opened by two gate-keepers 20 minutes before the
commencement of the parade. Two buglars enter the parade ground from
263
 the sides of the centre wall and march up to the inspection line (for description
of inspection line, passing line etc. please see Section 2 of Chapter XVI)
and will sound Markers Call. The buglars turn and march back to the rear
of the fort wall. The markers will take their positions on the inspection line.
The buglars and lancers take up their respective positions on the top of the
fort wall and on the sides of the parade ground.
The buglars sound Fall in Call (Advance Call) 3 minutes, after the Marker’s
Call.
(iii) The parade SM will now bring the parade to “Savdhan’’ and “Kandhe
Shastra” positions, and march it to the inspection line, giving the command
“Parade Dahine Baen Se Tej Chal”. On crossing the gate, the right side
coys. (Nos. 1, 2) will proceed toward the right of the wall; the left side ones
(Nos. 3, 4) marching towards the left of the wall. On reaching the markers,
the platoons will mark time. On a drum beat, given after all the platoons
have reached their respective positions on the inspection line, the parade
will halt. The parade SM will give the following commands in succession:—
“Parade, Age Barhega Dahine Baen Murh”,
“Parade, Bazu Shastra”,
“Parade Khuli Line Chal”,
“Parade Madhye Saj”.
“Parade Vishram”.
The riding section will form up on the left. The band will form up 8 paces
behind the inspection line in the centre.
(iv) Parade Adjutant marches from the dais side towards the parade. On seeing
the parade adjutant, Parade Sub. Major brings the parade to ‘Savdhan’ and
hands over the parade to the Parade Adjt . and turns about and takes his
position
(v) Parade Adjt. turns about, faces the dais and brings the parade to” Vishram.”
(vi) Parade Adjt. brings the Parade to ‘Savdhan’ on seeing the Parade 2/IC
approaching form the dais end.
(vii) Parade Adjt hands over the parade to the Parade 2/IC turns about and takes
his position.
(viii) Parade 2/IC turns about and faces the dais.
(ix) Officers Call: Buglars sound “Officers Call” and on this Officers march on
the parade ground from the centre, take right and left turn and take up
positions in front of their respective coys at a time and turn left/right to face
the dais. This is done on drum beat. As the officers have taken their places,

264
 parade 2/IC will give command Officers, Sos Kirch, Nikalenge, Nikal
Kirch”. Thereupon all officers and Sos on parade will draw swords except
Ensign Officer and Band Master, After this Parade 2/IC brings Parade to
‘Vishram’ and parade awaits arrival of the Parade Commander.
(x) On the arrival of the Parade Commander Parade 2/IC brings the Parade to
‘Savdhan’ and Kandhe Shastra. Then he gives the command— “Parade
Salami Degi Salami Shastra”.
On this the parade salutes the Parade Commander (Band will not play) and
Parade 2/IC gives the commands of “Parade Kandhe Shastr” and “Parade
Bazu Shastra,” marches up to the dais and hands over the parade to the
Parade Commander.
(xi) The Parade Commander and Parade 2/IC move upto their respective
positions and turn about.
(xii) Parade Commander should give sufficient start to the 2/IC before he leaves
his post so that both reach their post simultaneously.
(xiii) The Parade Commander brings the Parade to ‘Vishram’ and awaits arrival
of the DGP.
N.B. : -
1. Being a major parade, it is desired that it should be held where a permanent
fort is available. These forts have ramparts. The buglars should be stationed
on the ramparts or any other convenient places if the wall has no ramparts.
2. If the state/unit does not have the permanent fort, then a temporary fort of
canvass cloth should be made. This will lend color and pageant to the
ceremony.
3. Mounted squad and lancers will be included in the parade depending upon
the availability.
4. To save time, the procedure can be modified in which Parade 2/IC, Coy.
Commanders, Parade Adjutant, and Parade SM all fall behind the fort wall.
Parade 2/IC brings the parade-to-parade ground hands over to the Parade
Commander.
Section 5
Arrival Of Cased Colors
After the parade commander has taken his position, he orders the parade
to “Kandhe Shastra” and to the Color party to bring the Cased Colors to the
parade ground by the following commands: —
(a) Parade Kandhe Shastra”
(b) Nishan Toli Parade Par”
265
 [On this word of command Nishan Toli (Color Party) alonghwith the
Commanders will march into take position (See appendix ‘A’ of Chapter
XVI)]
(c) “Parade Bazu Shastra” (after the color party taken its position)
(d) “Parade Vishram”
Section 6
Presenting Compliments To The DGP
The Director General of Police will arrive 10 minutes before the
commencement of the programme. The moment his arrival is sighted, the parade
commander will bring the parade to ‘Savdhan’, and ‘Kandhe Shastra, position.
Immediately after the DGP has taken position at the Saluting Base, the parade
commander will give the command “Parade General Salute, Salami Shastra”.
The Band will play the tune ‘General Salute’ at the conclusion of which the
parade commander will give the following commands successively:
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
After taking salute, the DGP will proceed to the alighting point to receive
the VVIP invited to present the colors and wait for his arrival.
N.B. In addition to DGP of the Organisation/State police force, general
salute may be given to the Inspector General & Additional Director General, who
have been involved in the suspervision/preparation of the parade. This should be
given before the arrival of DGP.
Section 7
Arrival Of VVIP/VIP
As soon as the VIP/VVIP is sighted, the buglars will sound “Fanfare”. The
parade commander will immediately give the command:” Alankaran Parade
Savdhan”, followed by “Parade Kandhe Shastra”.
As soon as the VVIP, escorted by the DGP, takes up his position on the
saluting base, the parade will present arms to him, the parade commander giving
the following words of command:
“Parade, General salute, Salami Shastra”
The Band will play the tune “General Salute” and the parade will stay in
that position till the tune is over. (If the VVIP is the President of India or a Governor,
the “Rashtriya Salute” will be given and the Band will play National Anthem).
The parade commander will, thereafter, bring the parade to “Kandhe Shastr”
and “Bazu Shastr” positions.
266
 N.B. Regarding Rashtriya Salute and Playing of National Anthem
instructions contained in Section 7 and Section of Chapter XXII (Chapter on
Guard of Honour) will be followed
Section 8
Review Of The Parade By The VVIP
The moment the parade comes to “Bazu Shastra” position, the parade
commander will march towards Saluting Base, halt, pay compliment of VVIP
and report :
“Shriman (Mahodayaa if the VVIP is a lady)
Alankaran Parade Aapke Nirikshan Ke Liye Hazir Hai”
Meanwhile, the inspection jeep (if one is planned to be used), stationed
close at hand will reach the saluting base. The VVIP will stand in the front portion
of the jeep, and the DGP and the parade commander in the rear portion with the
former on the right and the latter on his left side. The jeep will proceed to the
right of the parade and pass through the front rank of the parade from right to left
(in case a jeep is not intended to be used, the VVIP will be escorted on foot to the
inspection line with the DGP on his right and the parade commander on the left,
both moving one step behind the VVIP).
As soon as the VVIP (whether on the inspection jeep or on foot) passes the
right guide of the first platoon, the band will start playing one of the slow march
tunes and will continue to play the same till the review of the parade by the VVIP
is over. (If the VVIP is on foot, the parade commander and the DGP will move in
slow march during the review).
After VVIP’s return to the saluting base, parade commander salutes him,
returns to his position and turns about.
N.B: —As color presentation is a major ceremonial occasion and parade is
also quite big, it is desirable that an inspection jeep should be arranged.
Section 9
Parade Troops
(i) This is done when the organisation is having old color and is being replaced
by a New Color. There will be two Ensign Officers. Senior Ensign Officer
will hand over the old color to the Jr. Ensign Officer, who will march off
the parade ground and Senior Ensign Office will stay back and receive the
New Colors.
(ii) In this, the parade commander will give the command
‘Parade Troop’
On the command troop, the band and drums will move across the parade
ground from the right to left playing a slow troop. They will count march 10
267
 paces from the old color and will halt when the drum major is in the centre of
the parade ground. Now both escort parties come on parade ground.
(iii) When the escort parties are moving parade commander orders “General
Salute” to the “Old Color” by giving the following commands:
(a) “Parade Kandhe Shastra”
(b) “Parade General Salute Salami Shastra”,
Escort Party will also present arms at the same time.
(c) “Parade Kandhe Shastra”
(d) “Parade Bazu Shastra”
(iv) After this, the parade commander gives the command “Ensign officer Jagah Lo”.
On this word of command, Ensign Officers march to the centre line in front
of parade comdr. Senior Ensign officer hands over the old color to Jr. Ensign
officer. After handing and taking over, both officers join their respective escorts
and escort having old color leaves the parade ground on the command of Jr.
Ensign Officer.
(v) As the escort with the old color is leaving the parade ground, parade again
will give “General Salute” to the old color. Parade Commander gives the
required commands. Simultaneously, the senior ensign officer, will take his
original place in the parade alongwith the New Cased Colors.
Section 10
Formation Of Hollow Square
1. To form the hollow square, the parade commander gives the following
commands:
(a) “Parade Khali Varg Banaegi Bazu Dal Adha Dahine Baen Murh”. (on
this only the front ranks of flanking coys will turn half left and half
right).
(b) “Bazu Dal Dahine Baen Se Tej Chal”. (On this, the band will play
and the flanking Coys march to form the hollow square. Inner coys
remain in position. Second-in Command coy commanders and adjutant
also take their positions.)
(c) “Bazu Dal Tham” (When the flanking companies have reached at
their places).
(d) “Bazu Dal Madhye Saj” (The dressing takes place to the roll of drums).
(e) “Bazu Dal Samne Dekh” (Flanking coys look to the front)
(f) After this parade commander brings the parade to ‘vishram’.
268
 Section 11
Pilling Of Drums And Consecration Of The Color
(i) Parade commander gives the word of command “Drummers Drum Lagao”
and on this 10 side drummers and one base drummer move forward in quick
time from the centre-rear of the parade. They will move to the centre of the
parade ground opposite the saluting dais, halt on either side of the position
marked for pilling of the drums and face inwards. The drums will then be
piled in the place already marked.
(ii) While the drummers march off to the accompaniment of the drum beat the
Parade 2-IC will move forward and position himself on the right side at a
distance of seven paces from the file of drums between the drums and the
parade.
(iii) Now the Parade commander gives words of command “Nishan Jagah lo”,
and thereupon the NCO carrying the cased color will move forward from
the centre of the parade and halt 10 paces from the drums. The Parade 2-IC
will uncase the color (he will not salute) and hand over the case to the
NCO. The 2-IC will place the color on the drums towards the parade and
then resume his position. The NCO with the case will about turn and move
up in quick time inside the fort.
NOTE: The escorts to the new color will halt at the inspection line. Only the
NCO carrying the cased colors will move forward.
(iv) After this, parade commander gives word of command “Dharam Guru Jagah
Lo”. Thereupon Dharam Gurus (Religious Teachers) followed by their
sewadars advance from outside the parade ground and halt on the spot on
the places marked for them on the left and facing towards the drums.
(v) After the Religious Teachers (RTs) have assumed their places, parade
commander gives command. “Dharam Guru Pavitar Karvai Shuru Karo”.
Thereupon RTs perform consecration.
(vi) As soon as the RTs complete the consecration, parade commander brings
the parade to Savdhan and gives commnad “Ensign Officer Jagah Lo”.
Only the ensign officer will move forward and halt 10 paces from the pile
of drums. The escorts will remain at the inspection line.
Section 12
Presentation Of Color
(i) The parade commander advances towards the saluting dais in order to request
the VVIP/VIP “to present the color. After paying compliments to VVIP/
VIP, he says “Shriman Nishan Pardan Karne Ke Liye Nivedan Hai” The

269
 VVIP/VIP accompanied by the DGP and parade commander will now come
down from the dais and move forward towards the centre of parade ground.
(ii) The VVIP/VIP and DGP will move to a position in front of the drums.
Parade 2-IC will move forward and pick up the standard from the drums
and hand it over to the DGP who in turn will hand it over to the VVIP/VIP.
The ensign officer sinking on the right knee awaits presentation of the color.
The VVIP/VIP will then present the color. The band play “FAN FARE”.
The ensign officer will then rise and resume his position.
(iii) The VVIP/VIP will then return to the dais. The religious teachers leave the
parade ground and take position behind the saluting dais where they remain
till the end of the parade.
(iv) The parade commander returns to his original position. The ensign officer
remains at the same spot.
(v) Parade commander now brings the parade to ‘Vishram’ to mark that the
ceremony is over. After a brief pause, he again brings the parade to
‘Savdhan’.
Section 13
Re-Formation Of Parade On The Inspection Line
(i) For reforming the parade on the inspection line, the Parade commander
gives following words of commands in succession—
(a) “Bazu Dal Pichhe Murh” (The flanking Coys do an about turn)
(b) “Parade Line Par Banaegi (The flanking Coys will turn half Bazu
Dal Adha Dahine right and half left)
Baen Murh”
(c) “Bazu Dal Dahine Aur Baen (The flanking Coys step out in “Tej Chal”
quick time and reform on the
inspection line.)
(d) “Bazu Dal Tham” (The flanking Coys will come to halt)
(e) “Bazu Coy Age Barhega (The flanking Coys turn about and
Pichhe Murh” to the saluting dais)
(f) “Parade Madhye Saj” (The parade dresses from the centre to
the roll of drums)
Now the parade has reformed at the inspection line except that the drums
are still lying at the centre of the parade ground.
(ii) The parade commander brings the parade to ‘Vishram’ and gives the
command, “Drummers Drum Uthao”.

270
 On this drummers come in line, pick up their drums and join the band. They
play their drums while marching.
After the drummers have joined the band, parade commander brings the
parade to Savdhan. The escorts to the new colors now move up and join the
ensign officer.
(iii) The parade commander now gives the command—
“Nishan Sthan Lo”
On this word of command, the ensign officer comes to the inspection line
in ‘Dhire Chal for taking up position facing the dais.
While the ensign officer is bringing the color to the inspection line, the
parade commander will give the word of command, “Parade, Nishan Ko Samman
Degi General Salute, Salami Shastra” and the parade pays compliments to the
new color.
Section 14
Ceremonial March Past
(i) After this parade will do ceremonial march past. The parade will march
past twice first in slow time and then in quick time.
The procedure for march past by the platoons has been described in Section
17 and Section 16 of Chapter XVI (Chapter on Ceremonial Drill). The position
of the officers, men and colors will be as per Appendix-F of the same chapter.
The procedure for this type of march past has also been described in detail in
Section 7 of Chapter XXIII (Chapter on Passing Out Parade).
(ii) If the march past is to be done by companies, the same procedure will be
followed i.e., first in slow time and then in quick time. March past by coys
has been discussed in Section 14 of Chapter XVI. The position of officers,
men and colors will be as per Appendix-D of the same chapter. However, a
brief summary of the events and words of command in this case is given
below:
(a) The parade commander gives the following commands—
“Parade Nikat Line Chal”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Tinon Teen Ke Column Mein Dahine chalega, Dahine Murh’
“Parade Bazu Se Tej Chal”
“Parade Do Bar Disha Badal Baen Ghoom”
(b) Formation in dose column—
As the parade approaches march past line in front and to the left of saluting
base, parade commander orders the parade to form in close column. He will give
the following command:

271
 “Parade Baen Disha Tham Kar, Number Ek Par Companion Ka Nikat
Column Banaa” Number one Coy will come to halt at the command of Coy.
Commander and turn left. Other Coys will follow at the marked places at the
command of their respective commanders. Color party will take position on
command of ensign officer.
After the parade has halted, he gives the following words of commands in
succession—
“Parade Bazu Shastra”
“Parade Dahine Saj”
“Parade Samne Dekh” (After the dressing is over)
(ii) March past: After dressing, the parade commander gives command, “Parade
Dahine Se, Bari Bari Companion Ke Column Me, Dhire Aur Tej Chal Mein,
Munch Se Guzrengee Fasla 20 Kadam, Number Ek Coy Age”
After this, each individual coy commander gives the following words of
command:
(a) “Number.....Coy age Barhegi, Dahine Se Dhire Chal”
(b) “Number.....Coy Khuli Line Chal” (At point ‘B’; coy will open order
and continue marching).
(c) “Number.....Coy Dahine Dekh” (At point ‘C coys will turn ‘Eyes
Right’)
(d) “Number.....Coy Samne Dekh” (At point ‘D’ the coys will do ‘Eyes
front’)
(e) “Number.....Coy Nikat Line Chal” (The coys will close order and
continue marching)
(f) On approaching right corner, the parade commander (Point ‘F’) will
give the command—”Parade Tham Kar, Coys Ka Nikat Column
Banaa”. After this, individual coy commanders will bring their coys
to halt on the command “No....Coy Tham”
(g) After the parade has halted parade commander will command the
parade to turn right by giving the word of command, “Parade, Dahine
Se Tinon Teen Ke Column Mein Age Barh, Parade Dahine Murh”.
(h) After the parade has turned right, each individual coy commander
will give the command, “Number....Coy Baen Se Baen Ghoom, Tej
Chal” on this coys will follow, one by one, on command of their
respective coy comdrs.
(i) The parade will march past in quick march this time but without coming
to halt anywhere and in close column. All coys will pay compliments
as was done in slow march near the saluting base.

272
 (j) Once the parade reaches its original position on inspection line the
individual coy commanders will bring their coys to halt on the
command, “No....Coy Tham”
After the parade has come to the halt, parade commanders gives the following
words of command:
“Parade Age Bareghi Baen Murh”
“Parade Bazu Shastra”
“Parade Madhye Saj” (Parade will dress up on the drum rolls).
N.B. Color will be dipped in front of the saluting base if required as per Sectioin
7 of Part-I of this chapter.
Section 15
Advance In Review Order, And Speech By VVIP
Now the parade will advance in review order as per procedure given in
Section 18 of Chapter XVI. After advancing the parade will pay compliments to
VVIP/VIP and come to Vishram. Now VVIP/VIP will deliver the speech. After
the speech is over, cheers may be given to VVIP/VIP immediately as per the
procedure contained in Section 2 of Chapter XIX.
Section 16
Return of Colors
After the above, Parade Commander will give the commands—
“Parade Savdhan”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Nishan Jagah Lo”
On the last command, the color party will march and forms at left of the
Saluting Base. It performs this activity on the command of Ensign officer on the
words of command—
(a) “Nishan Toli Kandhe Shastra”
(b) “Nishan Toli, Madhye Se Tej Chal”
After the color party has formed to the left of the saluting base, parade
commander gives the command, “Nishan Kooch Kar”.
Now this color party leaves the parade ground and simultaneously parade
pays compliments to the color on the word of command—
“Parade Nishan Ko Samman Degi General Salute, Salami Shastra”. The
parade will remain Salami Shastra position till color party leaves the ground.
Band will play general salute.
273
 Section 17
Handing Over The Parade
(i) After the colors have left the ground, the parade commander gives
folowing commands—
(a) “Parade Kandhe Shastra”
(b) “Parade Bazu Shastra”
(c) “Officers, Sqs Kirch Wapas Karenge, Wapas Kirch” (All offic-
ers and Sqs will return their swords)
(d) “Officers Mere Baen Line Ban, Sub. Maj. Parade Kooch Ke Liye
Sthan Lo” (On this command, all officers will form up on the
left of the parade commander. Sub-Major will take position to
march off the parade)
(e) “Officers Dahine Se Tej Chal”
(f) “Officers Tham” (Officers will come to halt in front of the dais
for introduction to the VIP/VVIP).
(g) “Officers Salute” (All officers will salute the VIP/VVIP.)
(ii) After saluting the officers are introduced to the VVIP/VIP who shakes
hands with them. The officers reforms in front of the saluting base
and parade commander give the following commands—
“Officers Salute” (All officers will salute the VVIP/VIP)
“Officers Line Tor” (Officers will dispersed)
(iii) After the officers have dispersed, Subedar Major marches off the
parade by giving following commands—
“Parade Kandhe, Shastra”
“Parade Ander Ko Murh” (On this command, all coys will turn inward).
“Parade Dahine Bayen Ghoom Tej Chal”
“All coys will go behind the fort wall. Band will also take coomtel march
and go behind the fort wall. Fort gate will be closed.”

274
 CHAPTER XXXI
FAREWELL PARADE
(VIDAI PARADE)
Introduction
(i) Farewell is accorded to senior police officers on the occasion of their
retirement and transfer by holding Farewell Parades.
(ii) Farewell Parade is held as a mark of recognition of the services
rendered by the Outgoing Officer and his association with the force/
unit.
(iii) As the officer is going on retirement/transfer and the new incumbent
is coming to replace him, it is desired that the new incumbent should
also be present at the parade, if possible.
Section 1
General Instructions
Farewell parade is a ceremonial occasion and therefore, the procedure
regarding General Arrangements, Parade Ground, Unit Organisation, Receiving
of Inspecting Officer, Inspection, March Past, Post of Officers and advancing in
review order as given in Chapter XVI will be followed. Officers will follow the
special instructions regarding Ceremonial Parade given in Section 8 of the same
chapter.
Section 2
Strength Of The Parade
The Strength of the farewell parade should be befitting. The rank of the outgoing
officer. However, it should not be ostentatious. The strength of the parade to be
organised, in respect of the officers of different ranks should be as under : —
(It should not exceed to prescribed strength in any case): -
Sl. Rank of Out- Rank of Parade Rank of Strength of the
No. going officer Commander Parade 2/IC Parade
1 DGP ADDL. SP Dy SP 3 Coys. Mounted squad if
available Motorised column
like Signals, Commn. vechs.
etc., if available.
2 Addl. DG -do- -do- 2-3 coys. Mounted squad if
available.
3 IG ASP/Dy SP Inspt 2 coys. Mounted squad if
available.
4 DIG -do- -do- 5 platoons. Mounted squad if
available.
5 SSP/SP/Comdt. -do- -do- 4 Platoons Mounted squad if
available

275
 (ii) For the farewell of DGP, Addl. DGP and IGP, two bands should be
requisitioned, with the minimum strength of 40 band pieces for DGP
and Addl. DGP and 30 for IGP. For DIG and SP only one band should
be organised.
(iii) Strength of buglars may be as follows—
Rank Number of buglars
(a) DGP/Addl. DGP 8-12
(b) IG 6
(c) DIG 4
(d) SSP/SP/Comdt. 2
(iv) 8 to 12 lancers may also be positioned on either side of the fort wall
for the farewell parade of DGP and Addl. DGP, if available.
Section 3
Formation Of Parade
(i) Twenty minutes before the scheduled commencement of the programme,
the “farwell parade” will form up behind the Fort wall ( if fort is available)
or outside the parade ground, platoon wise, rifles in “Bazu shasrra” (order
arms) position with bayonets fixed. Half of the number of platoons will
take position on the right side of the ‘Fort Gate’ (or entry point into parade
ground), platoon number 1 being nearest to the gate and other platoons to
its right in the ascending order of their serial numbers. The remaining half
will stand on the left of the gate, the serially last platoons being near the
gate and the others to its left in the descending order of their serial number.
Thus, if there are six platoons participating in the parade, platoons numbers
1,2,3 will stand on, the right of the ‘Fort Gate’ and platoon numbers 6,5,4 to
iis left, in that order. With five platoons in the parade, platoons numbers
1,2,3 will stand on the right of the gate and platoon numbers 5,4 on its left.
The Parade 2/IC will take position in front. The swords of the Parade 2/IC
and Platoon Commanders will be in “Carry” position. The Riding Section,
if available, will be behind the parade followed by the band at the rear, in
the centre. Buglers and Lancers will also position behind the fort wall.
(ii) Fort-gate is opened by two gate-keepers 15 minutes before the
commencement of the Parade. Two buglers enter the parade ground from
the sides of the centre wall and march upto the inspection line and will
sound Markers Call The buglers turn and march back to the rear of the fort
wall. The Markers will take their positions on she inspection line.
The buglers and lancers also take up their respective positions on the top of
the fort wall and on the sides of the parade ground.
276
(iii) The buglers sound Fall in Call (Advance Call) 3 minutes after the Markers
Call. There upon the Parade 2/IC will bring the parade to “Savdhan” and
‘“Kandha Shastra” positions, and march it to the inspection line, giving the
command “Parade Dahine Bayen Se Tej Chal”. Oh crossing the gate, the
right of the wall; the left side ones (Nos. 6,5,4) marching towards the left of
the wall. On reaching the markers, the platoons will mark time. On a drum
beat given after all the platoons have reached their respective positions on
the inspection line, the parade will halt. The Parade Commander will give
the following commands in succession:
“Parade, Dhine Bayen Mur”,
“Parade, Bazu Shastra”,
“Parade Khuli Line Chal”,
“Parade Madhye Saj”.
The Riding Section will form up on the left. The band will form up 8 paces
behind the inspection line in the centre.
(iv) On the arrival of Parade Commander. Parade 2/IC will give following
commands: —
“Parade Savdhan”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Salami Degi, Parade Salami Shastra”
(Band will Not play)
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Bazu Shastra”
Then the Parade 2/IC marches up to Parade Commander, pays compliments
to him and hands over the parade to him.
(iv) Both Parade Commander and Parade 2/IC will take their positions and Parade
Commander will bring the Parade to “Vishram”.
Section 4
Arrival of the Outgoing Officer
As soon as the Outgoing Officer is sighted, the buglers will sound “Fanfare”.
The Parade Commander will immediately give the Command: “Vidaegi Parade,
Savdhan”, followed by “Parade Kandhe Shastra”.
As soon as the Outgoing Officer escorted by other Senior Officers, takes
up his position on the Saluting Base, the parade will present arms to him, the
Parade Commander giving the following words of command:
“Parade, General Salute, Salami Shastra”
The Band will play the tune “General Salute” and the parade will stay in
that position till the tune is over.
277
 Section 5
Review of the Parade by the Outgoing Officer
The moment the parade comes to “Bazu Shastra” position, the Parade
Commander will march towards Saluting Base, halt, pay compliments to Outgoing
Officer and report—
“Shriman” (“Mahodaya”, if the VIP is a lady) Vidai Parade Aapke Nirikshan
Ke Liye Hazir Hai”. Meanwhile, the inspection jeep (if one is planned to be
used), stationed close at hand, will reach the Saluting Base. The Outgoing Officer
will stand in the front portion of the jeep and the Parade Commander in the rear
portion. The jeep will then proceed to the right of the parade and pass through the
front rank of the parade from right to left (in case a jeep is not intended to be
used, the Outoging Officer will be escorted on foot to the inspection line by the
Parade Commander who will move one step behind the Outgoing Officer and to
the left). As soon as the Outgoing Officer (whether on the inspection jeep or on
foot) passes the right guide of the first platoon, the band will start playing one of
the slow march tunes and will continue to play the same till the review of the
parade is over. (If the Outgoing Officer is on foot, the Parade Commander will
move in slow march during the review).
Section 6
Ceremonial March Past
After the inspection is over and Outgoing Officer has returned to the Saluting
Base, the Parade Commander will salute him and return to his position. After this
the parade will do the march past. The procedure for the march past is described
in Section 16 of Chapter XVI. If it is desired to do a march past in slow time
before marching past in quick time, procedure given in Section 17 of the Chapter
XVI will be followed. The procedure for march past has also been discussed in
detail in Section 7 of Chapter XX (Chapter on Passing Out Parade).
Section 7
Advance in Review Order and Speeches
(i) Once the ceremonial March Past is over and parade has reformed on the
inspection line, the parade commander will advance the parade in Review
Order as per the procedure given in Section 18 of Chapter XVI (Also given
in Section 8 of Chapter XX (Chapter on Passing Out Parade).
(ii) When the parade halts, parade commander will order general salute to the
Outgoing Officer by giving the following commands —
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Genera! Salute, Salami Shasra”
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”

278
 “Parade Bazu Shastra”
“Parade Vishram”
(iii) Now the senior-most officer of the force/unit (except the Outgoing and
Incoming officers) will say a few words about the contributions of the
Outgoing Officer. The speech should be short and to the point. After his
own speech, he will request the Outgoing Officer to say a few words.
Section 8
Giving Cheers To The Outgoing Officer
After the speech of the Outgoing Officer is over. Parade Commander will
bring parade to ‘SAVDHAN’ and cheers will be given to the Outgoing Officer as
per procedure given is Section 3 of Chapter XIX.
Section 9
General Notes
(i) After the cheers, the Senior Officers will escort the Outgoing Officer to the
mess/office as per programme. Parade commander will hand over the parade
to parade 2/1C who will march off the parade outside the parade ground.
(ii) If some cultural/sport show is to follow, after the speech of Outgoing Officer,
Parade commander will march upto Saluting Base, pay compliments to
Outgoing Officer and ask permission to march off by saying “Shriman,
Parade Ko Kooch Karne Ki Aagya Pardan Karen”. Having taken permission,
he will again pay compliments to Outgoing Officer, return to his place and
hand over the parade to parade 2/1C by giving word of command, “Parade
2/1C Sambhal Parade”. Parade 2/1C will salute the parade commander and
turn about and give the following commands —
“Parade Kandhe Shastra”
“Parade Ander Ko Murh”. (on this command, all platoons will turn inwards.)
“Parade Dahine Bayen Ghoom Tej Chal”
All platoons will go behind fort wall. Band will also take coomtel march
and go behind fort wall. Fort gate will be closed.

279
FUNERAL DRILL
 CHAPTER XXXII
FUNERAL DRILL
Funeral Drill will be organised to honour those deceased police personnel
who sacrificed their lives in line of duty. The Head of the Police Force will,
however, have the discretion to permit funeral parade in the case of any other
officer or man who, in his opinion, deserves that honour.
Section 1
Ceremony To Be Observed At A Funeral
1. The Firing Party— The party consisting of one Head Constable, one Naik,
one Lance Naik and twelve Constables will fire volleys at the funeral. While
marching in slow time arms will be carried at the reverse and in quick time
at the trail. During the march, arms may be changed but the party will not
march at ease.
2. The Bearer Party— This consists of an officer, one Head Constable and
eight bearers whose ranks will depend upon the rank or status of the
deceased. The bearers will be detailed also according to the religious custom
of the deceased. The Commander will see that the flag, headdress, side-
arms and wreaths are properly arranged and tied to the coffin or bier to
prevent them from falling.
3. Order of Forming Up— The firing party will be drawn up in two ranks
with sloped arms, one pace interval between files, facing the building where
the body is placed. The Naik will be on the flank of the front rank towards
which the procession will move. The Head Constable will give all words of
command and be posted in rear of the centre. As soon as the body is brought
out of building by the bearers, the Head Constable of the firing party will
give the command “Salami Shastra”. When the coffin or bier has been placed
in the carriage and the cortege is ready to move off, he will order “Ulta
Shastra,” “Dahine/Bayen Mudh” (The Naik taking up his place two paces
in front and midway between the ranks). “Dhire Chal”.
4. The mourners in uniform, band and drummers, with drums muffled, will
form up in two ranks, facing inward, with two paces interval between men
and eight paces distance between ranks.
5. The firing party and the remainder of the leading portion of the procession
will pass between the ranks.
The Procession will then move off in the following order: —
(a) Escort.
(b) Firing party.
(c) Band and Drums.
280
 (d) Body on gun carriage, Pall bearers, Bearers.
(e) Chief mourners.
(f) The President’s special representative, if applicable.
(g) Mourners in uniform in order of seniority (the senior leading).
(h) Mourners not in uniform.
(i) Troops lining the route in three beginning on the inner flank when
reversing arms in succession as they break into slow time,
(j) Rear Detachment.
(k) Mounted units forming part of the escort.
(l) Motor cars or other vehicles unless directed by a separate route.
NOTE: — The bearers will march on either side of the gun carriage, except when
pall bearers are present, in which case the pall bearers will march
immediately on either side of the gun carriage and the bearers on the
outer flank at two paces interval. The positions of the pall bearers will
be in order of seniority alternately on either side of the coffin, the
senior being in rear on the right hand side, the next senior in rear on
the left hand side and so on.
If the mourners for any reasons are not able to walk in the procession,
they will proceed by car by a separate route.
6. The Band and Drum
The band or drum will begin to play the “Dead March” when about 300
paces from the mortuary and continue from such distance as the officer-in-charge
may have ordered before marching off. The firing party will receive the command
“Tez Chal” (the band will cease playing) when at a convenient distance from the
cemetery or burning ground as directed by the officer-in-charge, the Head
Constable in charge of the firing party will give the command “Dhire Chal” and
the band and drum will again begin playing.
Section 2
Procedure On Arrival At The Place Of Interment/Cremation Ground
When the head of the procession arrives near the burial ground/ cremation
ghat, the ranks of the firing party, at the head of the procession and the band and
drums will open out to six paces distance and will halt at the command of the
Havildar in-charge of the firing party. The order “Inward Turn (Andar Murh)”
and “Rest on your Arms Reversed (SHOK SHASTRA)” will then be given by
the Havildar. The coffin/bier will then be moved by the bearers and carried feet-
end foremost through the ranks of the firing party. The order of the procession
will now be religious priest, body with the pall bearers and bearers (the former
walking behind the body if the path is too narrow to allow them to remain in their
correct positions), mourners, band and drum and firing party. The mourners will
281
then fire around the grave/pyre, halt and turn inwards without word of command.
The firing party will follow the mourners and will be halted near the grave/pyre
under the orders of the Havaldar incharge, who will give the following command
Savdhan Ulta-Shastra, —Ranks, Dahine/Bayen Murh—Dhire Chal—Tham-Baen
Mur, Shok Shastra.
The leading detachment (if present) will be halted at some convenient pre-
arranged position.
Section 3
Procedure During The Service
As soon as the chief mourners are in position and the burial (or cremation)
service is ready to be started the bearers will raise the coffin (or bier) from the
wooden bearers and lower it into the grave or on to the pyre, having first removed
from the coffin (or bier) the flag, head-dress, side-arms, wreaths and so on. Once
the coffin (or bier) has been lowered, the bearers will move from the grave (or
pyre) side and stand at ease. At the conclusion of the service, if volleys are to be
fired the Havaldar will order:—
“Firing Toli, Salami Shastra”, “Kandhe Shastra”
“Firing Toli Volleys with Blank Cartridges Load”
“Present—Fire”
(Two more volleys will be similarly fired),
“Khali Kar”
“Bazu Shastra “
“Laga—Sangin”
“Kandhe Shastra “
“Salami Shastra “
If no volley is fired the havaldar will order: —
“Salami Shastra “
“Kandhe Shastra “
“Bazu Shastra “
“Laga—Sangin “
“Kandhe Shastra “
“Salami Shastra “
NOTE: At the funerals if men are detailed to line the route, they will be required
to “Salami Shastra “ to the funeral procession first and “Ulta Shastra”
before again. “Shok Shastra “. They will normally “Shok Shastra “ as
the head of the funeral party approaches them and “Ulta Shastra “ as
the firing party approaches.
282
 Section 4
Procedure For Firing The Volleys
The procedure by the firing party for firing three volleys will be as follows,
if armed with the rifle:—
(a) “Salak Bhar”—Adopt the loading position. Load—The muzzels of
the rifles to be inclined upwards so as to clear the heads of the men in
front.
(b) “Pesh Kar”—Rifles will be brought to the position for firing but at an
angle of 135 degrees. Head to be kept perfectly still and no attempts
made to aim.
(c) “Fire”—Each man will at once press the trigger, remaining at the
“Peshkar” until the command “Dobara Bhar” or “Khali Kar” is given—
Two more volleys will be similarly fired.
(d) “Khali Kar”—Bring the rifle to the loading position and carry out
unloading, remaining in the loading position, rifle at an angle of 135
degrees.
“Kandhe Shastra”
“Bazu Shastra “
Section 5
Procedure For Carrying The Coffin
The coffin (or bier) will always be carried feet end foremost and normally
the bearers will work on the word of command of the officer or NCO incharge of
the bear party. Words of command will be given in a quiet, low tone e.g. “Uthane
ko Taiyar”, “Dhire Chal”, “Tham”, “Rakhne ko Taiyar”. These movements cannot
be controlled by a signal and should always be ordered by a word of command.
When in the lift position the bearer party should be evenly spaced four on
each side of the coffin (or bier); their arms crossed and around each other’s
shoulders, the coffin (or bier) resting on the shoulder with the face close to the
coffin (or bier) itself. The head dress of the bearers will be carried by an NCO or
by drummers to be specially detailed. The bearers will step off with the inside
foot to avoid undue rocking of the coffin (or bier). The NCO incharge of the
bearers party will march two paces in the rear and in the centre of the bearer
party.
Section 6
Procedure For Doing “Reverse Arms” And Rest On Your Arms Reversed
1. Reverse Arms From The Present (Salami Shastra Se Ulta Shastra)

283
 Reverse Arm By Number-One (Gintise Ulta Shastra, Squad-Ek) on this
command bend the right knee and place the foot alongside the left as in the Slope
from the present. At the same time force the rifle out in front of the body to the
full extent of both arms, keeping the left hand as low as possible.
Squad-Two (Squad-Do): Turn the rifle over slowly by bringing the butt
between the arms in the direction of the body (changing the grip of the hands)
until the position of the rifle is reversed, with the muzzle pointing to the ground,
magazine towards the body and in line with the chest, arms straight, finger and
thumb of both hands curled round the rifle.
Squad-Three (Squad-Tin): Interchange the position of the hands by seizing
the small of the butt with the left hand, back of the hand to the left and immediately
seizing the rifle at the point of balance with the right hand.
Squad-Four (Squad-Char): Release the rifle with the right hand and force
it under the left armpit so that the magazine is uppermost and in front of the body,
muzzle to the rear, rifle against the side, elbow against the rifle, rifle at an angle
of 45 degrees. At the same time force the right arm behind the body in line with
the waist belt and hold ‘the rifle near the outer band, back of the hand downwards.
NOTE:- The rifle is carried at the reverse only when marching in slow time.
2. Change Arms From The Reverse (Vita Shastra Se Badal Shastra)
“Change Arms—By Number-One (Gintise Badal Shastra. Squad-Ek)”
Release the rifle with the right hand and cut the right arm to the side. At the
same time, hold the rifle at the small of the butt with the left hand and allow the
muzzle to swing forward so that the rifle is perpendicular. Keep the left hand at
the level of the breast pocket.
Squad-Two (Squad-Do):
Throw the rifle arcross the body and catch it at the small of the butt with the
right hand level with the breast pocket. At the same time cut the left hand to the
side.
Squad-Three (Squad-Tin):
Force the rifle under the armpit and seize it near the outer hand with the left
hand behind the body, in the position of reverse.
NOTE:— On the march, movements are done on successive beats of the left
foot.
3. Rest on your Arms Reversed from the Reverse (Ulta Shastra Se Shok
Shastra): —
NOTE: — Only done when the rifle is under the left arm.
Rest on your Arms Reversed (Shok-Shastra):
Cut the right hand to the side and bring the rifle to a perpendicular position
with the left hand; lower the muzzle on to the left foot, between the toe cap and
284
the lace holes, so that the butt is in front of the body, turn the head and eyes to the
right and shoot the right arm to the right at the shoulder level, arms straight,
fingers extended, back of hand upper-most, bring the right arm round to the front
keeping the arm straight until it has traversed 45 degrees, bend the arms and
place the right palm on the butt plate, back of the hand upper-most, fingers extended
down the left side of the butt, thumb round the toe of the butt; pause and turn the
head and eyes to the front. Keep the hold on the rifle by the right hand and then
do the same with the left hand (i.e. first turning the head to the left side etc.).
Place the left palm over the right on the butt plate, pause and then turn the head to
the front. After this pause, drop both elbows against the body and lower the chin
on to the chest.
In performing the above movements the time should be taken from the
right or left hand man as the case may be.
Attention from Rest on your Arms Reversed (Shok Shastra Se Savdhan):
Squad Attention (Squad-Savdhan):
Raise the head to the normal attention position and also simultaneously
rise both the elbows so that the forearms are parallel to the ground.
NOTE: - This command is always given before doing any other movement from
“Rest on Your Arms Reverse’d—Shok Shastra)”
4. Reverse Arms from Rest on your Arms Reversed (Shok Shastra Se
Ulta Shastra): -
Reverse Arms by Number-One (Gintise Ulta Shastra, Squad-Ek):
Hold the small of the butt with the left hand, back of the palm to the left and
cut the right hand to the side.
Squad-Two (Squad-Do)
Force the rifle under the left armpit and seize it with the right hand behind
the back.
5. Rest on Your Arms Reserved from Present Arms (Salami Shastra Se
Shok Shastra):
Rest on Your Arms Reversed—By Number—One (Gintise Shok Shastra.
Squad—Ek): -
Bring the right foot smartly up to the left, raise the rifle about six inches,
and place the right hand underneath the butt plate, thumb round the toe of the
butt, the first two joints of the fingers grasping the left side of the butt.
Squad-Two (Squad-Do): -
Turn the rifle over to the front, muzzle leading, butt kept close to the body
so that the position of the rifle is reversed, i.e. the muzzle is now pointing towards
the ground. Place the muzzle on the toe of the left foot.
During this motion the right hand will be allowed to turn with the rifle so
that on the completion of the movement it will be resting on top of the butt plate,

285
fingers and thumb being in the same position as in “one”.
Squad-Three (Squad-Tin):
Place the left hand on top of the right over the butt plate. At the same time
lower the head on to the chest.
6. Present Arms From Rest On Your Arms Reversed (Shok Shastra Se
Salami Shastra):
(Before doing this motion the position of “Attention”, as described above,
should be taken).
Present Arms by Number-One (Gintise Salami Shastra, Squad-Ek):
Raise the rifle about six inches with the right hand. At the same time seize
it with the left hand as in the position held when at the Present, back of the hand
downwards and towards the body, thumb to the left.
Squad-Two (Squad-Do)
Hold the rifle with the right hand, just below the small of the butt in the
position as held when at the Present, thumb on the left, fingers on the right, back
of the hand to the front.
Squad-Three (Squad-Tin):
Turn the rifle over gradually lowering the butt towards the body. When the
rifle is horizontal, smartly come to the Present Arms position with the rifle and
simultaneously bend the right knee and move the right foot to its correct position.
Section 7
Procedure when Sword is used in “Funeral Drill”
These movements will be done by the Officer/Officers carrying the sword
in a funeral party.
While the Commander will give commands for Armed Drill, the equivalent
movements with sword will be performed by Commander himself, and other
Officers carrying the sword.
(a) Reverse Arms from An equivalent movement with sword can be
the Present done in two parts.
(Ulta Shastra Se (i) Bring the sword to the “Recover”.
Badal Shastra) (ii) Then reverse the sword under the right
arm, so that the point is downwards and the
edge is upwards. The hilt is grasped with right
hand, the right elbow is close to the body and
the sword is at the angle of 45 degree.
(b) Change Arms from Equivalent movement with sword be done in
the Reverse the three parts:
(Ulta Shastra Se (i) First bring the sword to “carry”
Badal Shastra)
286
 (ii) Then, pass the sword across the body and
change the hands, i.e., grip the hilt with left
hand and cut the right hand to the side.
(iii) Now reverse the sword under left armpit
and bring the right hand to grasp the blade at
the rear of the body. Left elbow is close to the
body and sword is at the angle of 45 degree.
(c) Rest on your Arms The sword is brought down so that the point
Reversed from the is on the ground between the feet; the edge of
Reverse (Ulta Shastra the sword is towards the right. For this, first
Se Shok Shastra) bring the right hand to grasp the hilt and cut the
left hand to the side. Now, slowly bring the sword
down so that the point is between the feet and
edge is towards the right. Extend the left arm to
the left with the back of the hand upwards. Bring
the left hand slowly to the top of the hilt and place
it on the right. Both the elbows should be along
the sides. Now, lower the head on the breast. All
the movements should be coordinated with the
men carrying the Arms Drill.
(d) Attention from Savdhan Rest on yours Arms Reversed (Shok Shastra
se Raise your head.
(e) Present Arm from Shastra): Rest on Arms Reserved (Shok Shastra se
Salami Shastra):
The equivalent movement with Arm from Rest
on Arms Reserved (Shok Shastra se Salami
sword are done in three parts,
(i) First cut the left arm away to the side” and
bring the sword to the ‘Carry’ position.
(ii) Then bring the sword to ‘Recover’ position.
(iii) Now bring the sword to ‘Salute’ position.
(f) There can be another equivalent movement for the command of Arms Drill
to ‘Reverse Arms from rest on your Arms Reversed’ (Shok Shastra se Ulta
Shastra):
On the command of Ulta. Shastra for the
equivalent movement with sword, carry the sword
with right liana under the right armpit at the same
time seizing the blade with the left hand behind
the back (position already described above).
287
 ANNEXURE WORDS OF
COMMAND
Sl.No. In English In Hindi
1. Halt Tham
2. About Turn Piche Murh
3. Right Turn Dahine Murh
4. Right Form Dahine Ban
5. Right Incline Aadha Dahine Murh
6. Left Turn Bayen Murh
7. Left From Bayen Ban
8. Left Incline Aadha Baye Murh
9. Mark Time Kadam Tal
10. Halt (When Marking Time) Tham (Kadam Tal Par)
11. Forward (When Marking Time) Aage Bar (Kadam Tal Par)
12. Break Into Quick Time, Quick March Tej Chal Me Aa, Tej Chal
13. Break Into Slow Time, Slow March Dhire Chal Me Aa, Dhire Chal
14. Break Into Double Time, Double March Daur Chaal Me Aa, Daur Chal
15. On The Right/Left Form Squad Dahine / Bayen Squad Bana
16. Open Order March Khuli Line Chal
17. Close Order March Nikat Line Chal
18. Squad Attention Squad Savdhan
19. Stand-At-Ease Vishram
20. Stand-Easy Aaram Se
21. Right (or Left) Dress Dahine (Ya Baye) Saj
22. Eyes Front Samane Dhekh
23. Turning About By Numbers, Squad— One Ginti Se Piche Murna, Squad
Piche Murh Ek
24. Turning to the Right By Numbers, Ginti Se Dahine Murna,
Right Turn-One Dahine- Murh- Ek
25. Squad—two Squad Do
26. Squad Will Advance, Quick March Squad Aage Barega, Tej Chal
27. Step-Out Lamba Kadam
28. Step Short Chota Kadam
29. Paces Forward/Step Back-March Kadam Aage/Piche Chal

288
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

30. Change Step—One Kadam Badal Ek

31. Squad—Two Squad Do
32. Squad—Three Squad Tin
33. Double March Daur Ke Chal
34. Salute To The Front By Numbers— Ginati Se Samne Salute
Squad One Squad Ek
35. Salute To The Right—Salute Dahine Ko Salute Salute
36. Salute To The Left—Salute Baye Ko Salute Salute
37. Squad, Dismiss Squad, Visarjan
38. Salute To The Right/Left Squad Salute Dahine (Bayen) Ko Salute-
Squad Salute
39. Squad/Platoon Fall-in Squad/Platoon Line Bana
40. Blank File Khali File
41. By The Right Quick March Dahine se taj chal
42. Platoon Will Retire, About Turn Platoon Pecha Lautega Pecha
Moor
43. Platoon Will Advance, About Turn Platoon Aage Badega Pecha
Moor
44. Change Direction Right, Right Form Dahine Disha Badal, Dahine
Ban
45. Change Direction Left, Left Form Bayen Disha Badal, Bayen Ban
46. Platoon Forward Platoon Aage Barh
47. Move To The Right In Threes, Tino Tin Me Aage Chalega,
A Right Turn Dahine Murh
48. By The Left Quick March Bayen Se Tej Chal
49. Platoon Will Advance, Left Turn PlatoonAage Barega, Bayen Murh
50. Platoon Will Retire, Left Turn Platoon Piche Barega, Bayen Murh
51. Platoon Will Advance, Right Turn PlatoonAageBarega,DahineMurh
52. Platoon Will Retire, Right Turn Platoon Piche Barega, Bayen
Mur
53. Change Direction Left/Right, fell Bayen/Dahine Disha Badal,
Left/Right Wheel. Bayen/Dahine Ghum
54. On The Left, Form Squad/ Platoon Bayen Ko Squad/Platoon Bana
55. On The Right Form Squad/ Platoon Dahine Ko Squad/Platoon Bana
56. Form Two Ranks Do Line Bana
289
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

57. Form Three Ranks Tin Line Bana

58. In Three Ranks Right Dress Tin Line Me Dahine Saj
59. Form Single File From The Left— Bayen Se Ek File Bana—Tej Chal
Quick March
60. Form Single File From The Left Bayen Se Ek File Bana
61. At The Halt On The Right, Form Dahine Tham Kar Tino Tin
Threes — Quick March Bana, Tej Chal
62. Advance In Single File, From Dahine Se Ek File Me Aage
The Right, Quick March Barh, Tej Chal
63. Form Single File, From The Right Dahine Se Ek File Bana
64. At the Halt On The Left Form Bayen Thamkar Line Bana,
Quick March Tej Chal
65. On the Left Form Line Bayen Par Line Bana
66. Attention Savdhan
67. Slope Arms By Numbers— Squad One Ginati Se Kandhe Sastra-
Squad Ek
68. Order Arms By Numbers—Squad One Ginati Se Baju Sastra-Squad Ek
69. Present Arms By Numbers—Squad One Ginati Se Salami Sastra-Squad Ek
70. The Squad Will Fix Bayonets, Squad Fix Squad Sangin Lagayega,
Sangin
71. Squad Bayonets Squad Laga
72. (A) Squad Will Unfix Bayonets, Squad Unfix Squad Sangin Utarega, Sangin
72. (B) Squad Bayonets Squad Utar
73. Port Arms Bayen Sastra
74. For Inspection Port Arms By Numbers, Ginati Se Nirinhaks Ke Liye
Squad — One Baye Sastra Squad, Ek
75. Ease Spring By Numbers— Squad One Ginati Se Bolat Chala, Squad Ek
76. Examine Arms Ganch Sastra
77. Trail Arms Tol Sastra
78. Trail Arms By Numbers—Squad One Ginati Se Tol Sastra, Squad–Ek
79. Secure Arms By Numbers— Squad One Ginati Se Sanbhal Sastra,
Squad –Ek
80. Change Arms By Numbers, Squad—One Ginati Se Badal Sastra,
Squad –Ek

290
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

81. Ground Arms By Numbers, Squad—One Ginati Se Bhumi Sastra,

Squad—Ek
82. Short Trail Samtol Sastra
83. Sling Arms Latka Sastra
84. Draw Swords Nikal Kirch
85. Slope Swords Kandhe Kirch
86. Return Swords By Numbers, Squad—One Ginati Se Vapas Kirch,
Squad—Ek
87. No... Centre File And File Of Direction, No.... Madhy File Aur Disha
The Objective Is Ke File Udyadesh Hai
88. To The Right Extend Dahine Fail
89. To The Left Extend Bayen Fail
90. From The Centre Extend Madhy Se Fail
91. On The Right Close Dahine Simat
92. On The Left Close Bayen Simat
93. On The Centre Close Madhy Simat
94. Street Lining From The Rear On Sadak Ke Dono Taraf Piche
Both Sides Of The Road Se-Kadam Kholkar Line Bana,
Paces Extend, Quick March Tej Chal
95. On the Right/Left Close Dahine/Bayen Simat
96. Inward About Wheel Aandar Ko Piche Ghum
97. Street Lining From The Rear On Sadak Ke Dono Taraf Piche
Both Sides Of The Road Se Bari-Bari -Kadam Kholkar
Alternatively... .Paces Extend Line Bana
98. Street Lining From The Centre On Both Sadak Ke Dono Taraf Madhya
Sides of The Road, Ranks Outward Turn Se Kholkar Line Bana Liene
Bahar Murh
99. From The Rear.... Paces Extend Piche Se Kadam Kholkar
Quick March. Tej chal
100. Street Lining From The Rear Down Sadak Ke Madhy Bahar Munh
The Centre Facing Outward Karate Huye Piche Se Kadam
Paces Extend Khol Kar Line Bana
101. Outward About Wheel Bahar Ko Piche Ghum
102. Steady Hilo Mat
103. No.. . Platoon, Eyes Front No Platoon, Samne Dekh

291
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

104. The Company Will Retire Company Piche Loitegi

105. The Company Will Advance Company Aage Baregi
106. Change Direction Right, Right Wheel Dahine Disha Badal, Dahine
Ghum
107. Forward Aage Barh
108. Advance (or Retire) In Column Of Dahine Se Tino-Tin Kalam
Threes From The Right, Company Me Aage Barh (Piche Loqt),
— Right/Left Turn Company Dahine/Baye Murh
109. Move To The Right (or Left) Tino Tin Column Me Dahine
In Column Of Threes, Company (Ya Bayen) Chal
Right (or Left) Turn
110. Move To The Right (Or Left) Platoon Ki Tino Tin Ki Line
In Line Of Platoon In Threes. Me Dahine (Ya Bayen) Chal,
Company Right (Or Left) Turn, Company Dahine (Ya Bayen)
Quick March Murh Tej Chal
111. On The Left Form Line, Remainder Bayen Ko Line Bana, Baki Bayen
Left Turn, Quick March. Murh,Tej Chal
112. By The Left, At The Halt, Bayen Se Tamkar Bayen Ki
Facing Left, Form Line Disha Me Line Bana
113. Advance In Column Kalam Me Aage Bar
114. Retire In Column, Company About Turn Kalam Me Piche Lot,
Company Piche Murh
115. On No.. . Platoon Form Column No. Platoon Par Platoono Ki
Of Platoons, Remainder Mark Time Kalam Bana, Baki Kadam Tal
116. On No.. Platoon, From Column Of No. Platoon Par Platoono Ki
Platoons, Remainder Quick March Kalam Bana, Baki Tej Chal
117. On No... Platoon Form Close Column No. Platoon Par Platoono Ke
Of Platoons, Remainder Double March Nikat Kalam Bana, Baki Daur
Ke Chal
118. At The Halt Facing Left (or Right) Tam Kar Bayen, (Ya Dahine)
Form Line Disha Line Bana
119. Change Direction Right Dahine Disha Badal
120. Advance In Column Of Threes From Dahine Se Tino Tin Kalam Me
The Right, Company Right Turn, Aage Bar, Company Dahine
Platoons Left Wheel, Quick March Murh, Platoon Baye Ghum,
Tej Chal

292
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

121. Move To The Right In Column of Tino Tin Kalam Me Dahine

Threes, Company Right Turn, Chal, Company Dahine Mur,
Platoon On The Left To The Front, Bayen Platoon Samane Ko,
Remainder Left Wheel, Quick March Baki Bayen Ghum, Tej Chal
122. On The Left Form Line, Remainder Bayen Ko Line Bana, Baki
Left Incline, Double March Aadha Bayen Murh, Daur Ke Chal
123. At The Halt Facing Right Form Tamkar Dahine Disha
Column Of Platoons, Platoons Platoono Ki Kalam Bana,
Right Form, Quick March. Platoono Dahine Ban, Tej Chal
124. At The Halt, Facing Left, Into Line, Tamkar Dahine Disha Line
Platoons Left Form, Quick March, Bana, Platoono Bayen Ban, Tej Chal
125. Move To The Right/Left, In Line Platoon Ki Tino Tin Ki
Of Platoons In Threes, Line Me Dahine/Bayen Chal,
Company Right/ Left Turn Company Dahine/Bayen Mur
126. On The Right Form Column (or Dahine Ko Platoono Ki Kalam
Close Column) Of Platoons, (Ya Nikat Kalam) Bana, Baki
Remainder Right Turn, Quick March Dahine Mur, Tej Chal
127. Advance In Column of From The Right Dahine Se Platoono Ki Kalam
Ramainder Right Turn, Quick March Me Aage Bar, Baki Dahine
Mur, Tej Chal
128. Advance In Line Of Platoons Bayen Se Platoono Ki Tino Tin
In Threes From The Left, Company Ki Line Me Aage Bar, Comp-
Left Turn, Platoons Right Wheel, any Bayen Murh, Platoono
Quick March Dahine Ghum, Tej Chal
129. The Company Will Form Column of Company Platoono Ke Kalam
Platoons, On The Left form Platoons Benayegi, Bayen Platoon Bana
130. At The Halt On The Left Form Thamkar Bayen Ko Platoono
Close Column Of Platoons Ka Nikat Kalam Bana
131. At The Halt Facing Left Form-Column Tamkar Bayen Disha Platoono
(or Close Column) Of Platoons Ka Kalam (Ya Nikat Kalam)
Bana
132. Facing Left Advance In Column Bayin Disha Kalam meAage Barh
133. On the Right Form Line Of Platoons Dahine Ko… Kadam Ke
In Threes at. Paces Interval, Phasle Par Platoono Ki Tino
Remainder Double March Tin Ki Line Bana, Baki Daur
Ke Chal

293
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

134. At The Halt On The Right Form Tamkar Dahine Ko Kadam Ke

Line Of Platoons In Threes at Column Phasle Par Platoono Ki Tino
Paces Interval, Remainder Left Incline Tin Ki Line Bana, Baki Aadha
Bayen Murh
135. Advance In Column Of Threes Bayen Se Tino Tin Ki Kalam
From The Left, Platoon On The Me Aage Barega, Bayen
Left To The Front, Remainder Platoon Aage Baki Bayen
Left Wheel, Company Quick March Ghum, Company Tej Chal
136. Company Facing Left Advance Company Bayen Disha Tino
Column Of Threes, Platoons Tin Ki Kalam Me Aage Bar,
Left Wheel, Quick March Platoon Bayen Ghum, Tej Chal
137. Company, At The Halt Form Line, Company Tamkar Line Bnnay-
On The Right Form Platoons egi, Dahine Par Platoon Bana
138. Advance/Retire In Column Of Platoons, Platoono Ki Kalam Me Aage
Company Left/ Right Turn Barega/ Piche Loitega,
Company Bayen/Dayen Murh
139. Move To The Right In Line Platoons Platoono Ki Tino Tin Ki Line
In Threes, Platoons Right Wheel Me Dahine Chal, Platoono
Dahine Ghum
140. Number Ginati Kar
141. Odd Numbers One Pace Forward, Even Visam Ek Kadam Aage, Sam
Numbers One Pace Step Back March Ek Kadam Piche Chal
142. Stand Fast The Right Hand Man, Odd Dahine Javan Khara Rahega, Baki
Numbers To The Right, Even Numbers Visram Dahine, Sam Bayen,
To The Left, Ranks Right And Left turn Line Dahine Aur Bayen Murh
143. Form Three ranks—Quick March Tin Line Bana – Tej Chal
144. Fall Out The Officers Officers Line Tor
145. National Salute National Salute
146. Present And Ready For Inspection Sriman Ji Parade Nirikhan Ko
Hajir Hai
147. No…Company Stand Fast Remainder No…. Company Khari Rahe,
Stand At Ease Baki Vishram
148. Move To The Right In Column Of Tino Tin Kalam Me Dahine
Threes, Battalion Right Turn, Chal, Battalion Dahine Murh,
By The Left Quick March Bayen Tej Chal
149. At The Halt, Facing Left, Tamkar Bayen Disha, Comp-
Form Close Column Of Companies any Ke Nikat Kalam Bana
294
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

150. No... Company, Halt, Company No…. Company Tham,

Will Advance, Left Turn Company Aage Baregi, Baye
Murh
151. No.. Company. By The Right, No…Company Dahine Se
Quick March Tej Chal
152. 1n Succession Advance In Column Dahine Se Bari-Bari Tino Tin
Of Threes From The Right Ki Kalam Me Aage Barh
153. Move to The Right In Column Of Chuch Kalam Me Dahine
Route, Battalion Right Turn Chal, Battalion Dahine Murh
154. Battalion Will March Past In Battalion Kuch Kalam Me
Column Of Route Manch Se Gujregi
155. No. ...... Company, By The Left No…Company, Bayen Se Tej
Quick March Chal
156. Platoon? At The Halt, Right Form Platoon Tamkar, Dahine Ban
157. Quick March, Platoons Left Dress, Tej Chal, Platoon Bayen Saj,
Platoons Eyes Front Platoon Samne Dekh
158. Battalion Will March Past In Quick Battalion Tej Chal Se Manch
Time— By The Left Quick March Se Gujregi, Bayen Se Tej Chal
159. Change Direction Left Baye Disha Badal
160. Platoons At The Halt, Left Form Platoon Tam Kar Bayen Ban
161. Centre Dress Madhya Saj
162. The Battalion Will March Past In Battalion Dhire Chal Me
Slow Time, By The Right Slow March Manch Se Gujregi, Dahine Se
Dhire Chal
163. Break Into Quick Time, Quick March Tej Chal Me Aa, Tej Chal
164. In Succession Advance In Column Bari-Bari Tino Tin Kalam Me
of Threes From The Right Dahine Se Aage Barh
165. Facing Left Advance In Column Bayen Disha Platoon Ke Kalam
Of Platoons Me Aage Barh
166. Advance In Review Order, By Centre, Samiksa Karm Se Madhya Se,
The Quick March Tej Chal
167. For Inspection, Port Arms Nirikshan Ke Liye, Bayen Sastra
168. Guard Examine Arms Guard Janch Sastra
169. Ease Spring Bolt Chala
170. Marker Darsak

295
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

171. Duties on Parade Duties Pared Par

172. Guard Will Fix Bayonets, Guard Guard Sangin Lagayega-Guard
Fix Bayonets — Attention Sangin Laga—Savdhan
173. Guard Number Guard Ginti Kar
174. Guard Will Unfix Bayonets—Guard Guard Sangin Utarega—Guard
Unfix Bayonets—Attention. Sangin Utar—Savdhan
175. No Front (or Rear) Rank Stick No. Samne (Ya Pichli) Line
Orderly, Stick Orderly—Dismiss Stick—Orderly Visarjan
176. Guard Commander Take Over Guard Commander Jagah Lo
177. Guard By The Right Quick March Guard Dahine Se Tej Chal
178. Old Guard Slope Arms Purana Guard Kandhe Sastra
179. New Guard Slope Arms Naya Guard Kandhe Sastra
180. Old Guard Order Arms Purana Guard Baju Sastra
181. New Guard Order Arms Naya Guard Baju Sastra
182. Old Guard Stand At Ease Purana Guard Visram
183. New Guard Stand At Ease Naya Guard Visram
184. As a Guard Number Guard Ki Tarah Ginati Kar
185. First Relief Pahali Badali
186. Second Relief Dusari Badali
187. Third Relief Tisari Badali
188. First Relief Stand Fast, Pahali Badali Khari Rahegi,
Remainder Stand At Ease Baki Visram
189. First Relief Slope Arms Pahali Badali Kandhe Sastra
190. Relief Form Up Badali Bana
191. Relief Move To The Right Badali Ek Line Me Dahine
In Single File—Right Turn Chal, Dahine Murh
192. Old Guard Attention Purana Guard Savdhan
193. New Guard Attention Naya Guard Savdhan
194. Old Guard Close Order March Purana Guard Nikat Line Chal
195. Old Guard Move To The Right In Purana Guard—Ek File Me
File (Or Single File) Right Turn Dahine Chal, Dahine Mur
196. New Guard Present Arms Naya Guard Salami Sastra
197. Old Guard Eyes Left-Eyes Front Purana Guard Baye Dekh,
Samane Dekh
198. Relieving Sentries Badali Sentries

296
Sl.No. In English In Hindi

199. Sentries Pass Sentries Badali Karo

200. Relief Quick March Badali Tej Chal
201. Guard Turn Out Guard Line Bana
202. Guard Ready For Inspection Nirikshan Ke Liye Guard
Hajir Hai
203. Turn In The Guard—Dismiss the Guard Guard Line Tor-Guard Hajir
Hai
204. Halt, Who Comes There Tam Kaun Aata Hai
205. Grand Round or Visiting Round Bara Muayana Ya Chota
Muayana
206. Advance Grand Round or Visiting Aage Baro Bara Muayana Ya
Round, All Is Well Chota Muayana Sab Thik Hai
207. Stand Down The Guard Guard Jagah Chor
208. Fall In The Guard Guard Line Bana
209. Advance, One Ek,Aage Baro
210. Pass Friend All Is Well Chalo Dost Sab Thik Hai
211. General Salute General Salute
212. Guard of Honour Consisting of.. —Ke Officers Aur Javano Ka
Officers And.... Other Ranks Is Ready Samman Guard Nirishan Ke
For Your Inspection, Sir Liye Hajir Hai Sriman
213. Standing Load Khare Bhar
214. Present Pes Kar
215. Unload Khali Kar
216. Parade Will Give Three Cheers Parade Tin Bar Jai Bolegi
217. Reverse Arms Ulta Sastra
218. Reverse Arms By Numbers, One Ginati Se Ulta Sastra, Squad, Ek
219. Change Arms By Numbers, One Ginati Se Badal Sastra, Squad,
Ek
220. Rest On Your Arms Reversed Sok Sastra
221. Rest On Your Arms Reversed Ginati Se Sok Sastra Squad,
By Number, One Ek
222. Present Arms By Number, One Ginati Se Salami Sastra
Squad, Ek

297
 CHAPTER XXXIII
GUIDELINES FOR SALUTING
It is observed that the general standard of saluting in almost all branches of the
Police Force is far from satisfactory. There appears to be a great deal of confusion
and misunderstanding in the minds of all Officer Trainees in regard to the correct
method of saluting and paying compliments. With a view to eradicate this
confusion and enforce a uniform standard of saluting, the under mentioned
instructions are issued for the information of all concerned. All officers may please
see that these instructions are strictly complied with and the mistakes committed
by their subordinates are rectified as soon as possible. They are requested to
maintain a strict check in general so that the standard of saluting is brought up to
its highest pitch.
I. GENERAL
1. It is to be impressed upon all ranks that salute is a Military and Police
method of greeting the superiors and not a servile act. It is an outward sign
of the inward spirit of discipline and respect for superiors. The unity and
discipline of a Force is indicated as much by the manner the men salute and
officers return the salute as by any other action.
2. The extreme importance of returning the salute with precision and courtesy
cannot be over-emphasized. It is extremely bad discipline and bad manners
to acknowledge salute by raising a stick, by a negligent gesture of the hand,
or to return the salute with disengaged hand in the trousers pocket. Officers
returning the salutes of die subordinates must not regard this as manner of
condescension of their part but as a bounded duty.
3. Failure to salute shows disrespect, idleness and a low standard of discipline.
Failure by an Officer in uniform to insist on being saluted is a breach of
discipline.
II. MISCELLANEOUS
1. The Salute will be given with the right hand. In case where, from physical
incapacity a right hand salute is impossible, the salute will be given with
the left hand.
2. Officers will be saluted at all time/whether in uniform or plain clothes.
3. When two or more officers are together, the senior only, whether in uniform
or not, will return Salutes.
4. Officers or men passing troops with uncased standard, guidens or colors
will salute the standard etc., except when carried by units forming part of
the escort at a Military/Police funeral.
5. Officers, men and colors passing a Military/Police funeral will salute the
bier.
298
6. The rider of a bicycle (pedal or motor) or driver of mechanized vehicle will
salute by straightening the hands when the vehicle is in motion, but shall
not turn the head owing to the danger of taking the eyes off the road.
7. When the vehicle is stationary he will salute by turning his head smartly
towards an Officer passing him but not while in motion, owing to the danger
of taking the eyes off the road.
8. When two or more Officers are standing as a group or in a line, the senior-
most of them will salute by calling others to attention.
9. If two or more Officers or men are placed in the Orderly room or otherwise
brought before a senior officer, the senior-most of them will place himself
on the right, call the party to attention and salute.
10. If a party as above is placed before a Senior Officer within the Orderly
Room or otherwise by an officer other than the party members, the whole
party will be called to attention and ordered to salute. All, including the
Officer incharge will salute. If, however, there is no sufficient room in the
Orderly Room to facilitate all members of the party to salute, the Officer
incharge will only call the party to attention and he alone will salute.
11. All Officers and men should be conversant with the various kinds of flags
flown on vehicles of different tanks of high Police Officials and Ministers as
also the car badges or ranks displayed on their cars. It should be borne in
mind that the flying of such flags or the display of the appropriate badge of
rank indicate that the Officers whose rank is thus indicated is actually traveling
by means of the vehicles. It follows, therefore, that Officers and men must
salute a car which passes them and which is displaying the flag and insignia
of rank even though the occupant or occupants may not be visible.
12. When appearing in a conference or assembly of Superior Officers, only the
senior-most Officer will be saluted. It is incorrect to salute in turn other
Officers.
13. An Officer in uniform wearing a hat and appearing in an office or orderly
room before a Senior Officer will salute, retain his hat on his head and
stand to attention unless and until he is asked to sit down. On being asked
to sit down, he should remove his hat and place it on his lap or in some
convenient, out of the way, place. It is highly improper to place the hat on
the table of the Superior Officer or to retain it on one’s head while sitting.
14. National Anthem:- The following rules will be observed when the National
Anthem is played:-
(a) While on parade all Officers of rank of S.I. and above will salute and
the rest of the men will come to attention.
(b) While on move, the party commander will halt die party, if the pair/is
299
 commanded by a HG, the H.G alone will salute whereas the rest of
the men will remain at attention.
(c) If standing in an organized party, the salute will be given only by
Officers of the rank of S.I. and above except a H.C., who will salute if
he is in charge of a party and the others will come to attention.
(d) All Police Gazetted Officers in uniform, putting on head dress, will
salute. Those without head dress will stand to attention.
(e) All Officers wearing Western style civilian dress will take off their
head dress and stand at attention.
(f) All Officers carrying a drawn sword will remain on the carry.
15. All Officers and men will salute the Court (the Magistrate or the Judge, as
the case may be) on entering court room. Police Officer irrespective of
their ranks will salute Magistrates, no matter what their status may be, on
entering a court when the court is in session, otherwise senior Police Officers
are not required to salute Junior Magistrates and others.
16. Personnel employed in the traffic control will not salute when they are
actually in the control of traffic as it is likely to direct their attention entirely.
They will, however, come to attention when persons entitled to be saluted
pass them.
17. When wearing European style civilian dress, it is etiquette and good manners
to remove the: head dress before entering the room of superior or a dwelling
place of any kind. It is not necessary to remove the head dress while entering
a shop.
18. When Of ficers are in a body apart altogether from the parade, they will
salute independently on the approach of a superior. It however, they are on
an Official parade, they will be called to attention by the senior-most Officer
among them who alone will salute.
19. Saluting on Parade:-
(a) When a Senior Officer has arrived on parade and has been greeted by
the Parade Commander by calling the parade to attention and saluting,
it is not necessary for anybody on the parade to salute when he is
going round unless addressed by him or having occasion to address
him.
(b) If the superior Officer arrives late on parade, i.e., after the parade has
started, the parade, will not be called to steady. The Parade Commander
will himself salute the Superior Officer and obtain instruction from
him, if any.

300
 (c) When the superior Officer goes round the parade ground, the sub-
unit commanders will only salute, if they are not engaged in instructing
their squads, otherwise they will continue without directing the squad
to attention to greet the visitor. If however, the superior Officer
addresses any Squad Commander, the Squad Commander will
immediately stop his instructions, bring squad to attention and will
himself salute. After having done with the superior officer, he will
proceed with his squad in accordance with the programme.
Methods of Saluting:-
(a) In Uniform - All Officers and men will smartly salute as laid down in the
drill manual.
Officers and men will not salute when without head-dress. They will only
come to attention smartly and will not bow down in this position to greet a
superior.
(b) In P.T. or Games Dress - An individual will smartly tome to attention. He
will on no account rise on die balls of the feet. This is a common mistake
often committed by most of the men.
(c) In Indian Style civilian dress - Officers and men will greet in the national
style (i.e., Namaste, Jai Hind, Adab, etc.) at all occasion. They are not
required to remove their head-gear at anyplace.
(d) A person when coming up to a senior to deliver a message will halt at a
distance of two paces, pause, salute, deliver the message, salute again, turn
about and march off in quick time.
(e) When a person is already at the position of “attention”, lie will not click his
heels on saluting.
(f) When a person is carrying a cane or short lathi, he will place it under the
left arm-pit before saluting.
(g) When passing a person to be saluted, the individual saluting is required to
do so three paces before reaching him and to lower the hand three paces
after passing him.
(h) When carrying a cane or a short lathi and saluting on the move, it is necessary
to place the cane or short lathi under the left arm-pit in two motions, each
on the left foot starting six paces from the person in order to. come up to the
salute when three paces from him.
(i) While saluting to the left or to the right, the head and eyes will be turned in
the required direction smartly and simultaneously with the hand.
(j) The salute with the rifle is carried out at the “slope”. The salute requires
301
 the same action of the hand for the salute to the front as to the flank, if the
salute is to be given to one side or the other.
20. When a Senior Officer comes to a function accompanied by a lady, the
Officer will be greeted first if die function happens to be on official parade
and the Officer supposed to be the reviewing officer, otherwise on all other
occasions the lady will be greeted first.

TYPES OF DRESSES
CEREMONIAL DRESS:
REVIEW ORDER ‘A’ :- Jacket khaki drill/gabardine, cotton or cotton terrene
(during hot weather) and khaki gabardine woolen or woolen terrene (during cold
winter), khaki poplin shirt, navy blue tie, brown ankle boot/shoes, khaki socks,
sum browne belt with or with out sword peak cap with badge, (pagari for sikh
officers), rank badges, name tab, title shoulder, formation sign, dark blue laneyard
with whistle, medals with ribbon as per entitlement and decorations.
REVIEW ORDER ‘B’ :- Trouser khaki drill, shirt khaki cellular (khaki cotton
terrene trouser and shirt), brown ankle boot/shoes, khaki socks, sum browne belt,
(with or with out sword), Peak cap with badge (Pagarifor sikh officers), rank
badge, title shoulder, Name tab, formation sign, dark blue laneyard with whistle
and medals with ribbon as per entitlement and decoration.
WORKING DRESS :-
Trouser and shirt cotton terrene (shirt Angola during winter), brown ankle/oxford,
shoes, khaki socks, leather belt, peak cap/beret cap with badge (pagari for Sikh
officers), rank badges, title shoulder, formation sign, dark blue lanyard with
whistle, name tab, ribbon as per entitlement and decoration.
MESS DRESS :-
Black short buttoned up coat with black trousers or white trousers or white short
buttoned up coat with white trousers or black trousers, miniature medals. For
state functions full medals, Plain black leather oxford shoes with plain toe caps
with five pairs of eyelets.
PT. DRESS :-
White shorts/ white track pants, white T shirts, white shoes and white socks.
SPORTS MEET :-
Blazer navy blue, white/grey trouser, white shirt, tie, black oxford shoes with
black socks or instead of tie and black shoes (scarf with white shoes and socks
combination).
302
FORMAL DRESS :-
Gents :- Formal trousers full sleeve shirt, tie black oxford shoes and socks.
Ladies :- Saree/salwar kameez and sandals.
INFORMLAL CIVVIES :-
Gents : Formal trousers Jull/lialf shirt, black shoes and socks Ladies : Saree/
salwar kameez and sandals.
SPECIAL PROVISION FOR WOMEN OFFICERS :-
Working dress :-
Slacks- pleatless trousers of khaki color with two side pockets similar in pattern
to those prescribed for male officers with front flap closed and a zip flap on the
right side at a position under the arm, the front flop being optional.
Shoes - Derby brown leather shoes or plain brown leather shoes with heels not
more than 1 inch measured from the base of the rear stitching of the uppers.
Ankle boots and field boots :- Of the same specification as those prescribed for
male officers, with heels not more than one and half inch measured from the base
of rear stitching of the uppers.
Mess dress- Saree of cream color silk in winter and cotton and a maximum 5
inches. The zari border may be either of gold plated silver thread or silk thread in
a floral pa
Blouse - Color matching with saree,
Foot wear - Cream colored sandals/shoes with straps and covered toes, heels not
exceeding two and half inches. white T shirt with 3 buttons.
P. T.Kit - white shorts/white track pants ,white high collered T shirt, white shoes
and white socks
Cosmetics - No cosmetics shall be used by lady officers except a Hindi on forehead
and a Sindur fitting in the head parting.

303